Negotiation Genius (Deepak Malhotra, Max Bazerman, 2008)

Negotiation Genius (Deepak Malhotra, Max Bazerman; How to Overcome Obstacles and Achieve Brilliant Results at the Bargaining Table and Beyond (2008))

PART I: THE NEGOTIATOR’S TOOLKIT 
CHAPTER 1: Claiming Value in Negotiation 

The year was 1912, and the U.S. presidential election was in full swing. Former president Theodore Roosevelt had decided to return to the political arena due to his frustration with the way his successor, President William Howard Taft, had been running the country. It was a tough campaign, and every day seemed to present a new challenge. But here was a challenge that no one had anticipated: three million copies of Roosevelt’s photograph had already been printed for circulation with a campaign speech when Roosevelt’s campaign manager discovered a catastrophic blunder—the photographer had not been asked for permission to use the photograph. To make matters worse, copyright law allowed the photographer to demand as much as $1 per copy of the photograph. In 1912, a loss of $3 million would be equivalent to a loss of more than $60 million today. No campaign could afford this price. The alternative was almost equally unattractive; reprinting three million brochures would be tremendously costly and could cause serious delays. The campaign manager would have to try to negotiate a better deal with the photographer. If you were the campaign manager, how would you handle this negotiation?

Now consider how Roosevelt’s manager dealt with the situation. After carefully analyzing the problem, he sent the following telegram to the photographer: "Planning to distribute three million copies of campaign speech with photographs. Excellent publicity opportunity for photographers. How much are you willing to pay to use your photographs? Respond immediately."

The photographer did not take long to issue a reply. He sent back a telegram with the following message: “Appreciate opportunity, but can only afford $250.”

Most people, when they hear this story, are taken aback. How did the campaign manager turn around such a hopeless situation so completely? The reason for this reaction is that even the most seasoned negotiators may not think systematically about negotiations, nor prepare for and execute negotiations strategically. Our goal is to make the manager’s solution to the negotiation problem appear obvious to you. By understanding and applying the principles and strategies of value claiming covered in this chapter, you, too, will be able to handle difficult negotiations with the kind of genius demonstrated by Roosevelt’s campaign manager.

STRATEGIES FOR CLAIMING VALUE IN NEGOTIATION 

Our five-step pre-negotiation framework offers a simple yet effective approach. (In the chapters that follow, we will add to this list as we confront more complex negotiations.)

Step 1: Assess your BATNA. The first step in any negotiation is to ask yourself, “What will I do if the current negotiation ends in no deal?” In other words, you need to assess your BATNA, or best alternative to negotiated agreement—the course of action you will pursue if and when the current negotiation ends in an impasse.3 Without a clear understanding of your BATNA, it is impossible to know when to accept a final offer and when to walk away in order to pursue other options. Your BATNA assessment requires the following three steps:

1. Identify all of the plausible alternative options you might pursue if you are unable to reach an agreement with the other party.
2. Estimate the value associated with each alternative.
3. Select the best alternative; this is your BATNA.

Step 2: Calculate your reservation value. An analysis of your BATNA is critical because it allows you to calculate your reservation value (RV), or your walk-away point in the current negotiation.

A careful assessment of your BATNA is essential if you are going to establish a rational reservation value that is based on a realistic assessment of your alternatives. Unfortunately, people often make strategic mistakes when they confuse their BATNAs with other elements of the negotiation. Keep in mind that your BATNA is not what you think is fair, or what you originally paid for the item you are selling, or the price that you hope to achieve. Your BATNA is the reality you will face if you reach no deal in the current negotiation.

Step 3: Assess the other party’s BATNA.

Now that you have assessed your BATNA and calculated your reservation value, you know the lowest offer you would be willing to accept in the Hamilton negotiation. Of course, you do not want to settle for a low sale price, so you will need to figure out how high a price you might be able to negotiate. In other words, you have to figure out the other party’s reservation value. 

Remember Roosevelt’s campaign manager? Had he focused only on his own BATNA (reprint three million brochures) and his own reservation value (pay the photographer thousands of dollars), the negotiation would have been a disaster. The manager’s genius lay in his decision to assess the photographer’s BATNA. In other words, he asked, “What would the photographer do if the negotiation ended in impasse?” If no deal could be struck and Roosevelt decided not to use the photograph, the photographer would make little or no money on the photograph; the photographer would also lose the opportunity for national publicity. In other words, while the campaign manager’s BATNA was quite poor, so was the photographer’s! As a result, the photographer could be induced to accept little or no money at all.

Step 4: Calculate the other party’s reservation value.

Step 5: Evaluate the ZOPA.

Once you have an idea of each party’s reservation value, you can evaluate the zone of possible agreement, or ZOPA. The ZOPA is the set of all possible deals that would be acceptable to both parties. Put another way, the ZOPA is the space between the seller’s reservation value and the buyer’s reservation value.

NEGOTIATION POSTMORTEM 

One way to evaluate your performance is to ask whether you surpassed your reservation value: clearly, you did. While this is certainly good news, it may not be a great measure of negotiation success. Why? Because it’s possible to surpass your RV and yet only claim a small portion of the total value up for grabs. Another way to evaluate your performance is to consider the entire ZOPA.

While these two metrics are useful, they both suffer from one important drawback: they evaluate your performance relative only to what you knew before the negotiation. A more complete measure would evaluate your outcome according to what you could have discovered during the negotiation. How would you feel if you discovered that Connie’s RV was not $48 million but $46 million?

Presumably, you would feel that you did even better than you had originally thought: you captured all of the ZOPA. Alternatively, how would you feel if Connie’s RV was much higher—$55 or $60 million? In that case, Connie would have captured the lion’s share of the value. As you can see, how well you actually performed in this negotiation depends on an evaluation of how well you could have done.

COMMON NEGOTIATOR MISTAKES 

To start, here are a few clear mistakes:
1. You made the first offer when you were not in a strong position to do so.
2. You made a first offer that was not sufficiently aggressive.
3. You talked but did not listen.
4. You tried to influence the other party but did not try to learn from her.
5. You did not challenge your assumptions about the other party.
6. You miscalculated the ZOPA and did not reevaluate it during the negotiation.
7. You made greater concessions than the other party did.

SHOULD YOU MAKE THE FIRST OFFER? 

When we pose this question to the executives in our classes, most insist that you should never make the first offer. Instead, they say, let the other party make the first offer; this provides valuable information and tells you where they are coming from. But there are also many executives who believe you should always make the first offer; by doing so, they argue, you take control of the dialogue and negotiate “on your terms.” The right answer—hardly surprising to those who know a trick question when they see one—is “it depends.”

The primary benefit of making a first offer in negotiation is that it establishes an anchor. An anchor is a number that focuses the other negotiator’s attention and expectations. Especially when the other party is uncertain about the correct, fair, or appropriate outcome, they are likely to gravitate toward any number that helps them focus and resolve their uncertainty. As it turns out, first offers tend to serve this purpose well: they anchor the negotiation and strongly influence the final outcome.

AN EXPERIMENT ON POWERFUL EFFECTS OF ANCHORING 

In real estate, the list price is the “first offer” made by the seller. Thus, this study manipulated the first offer to see whether it would affect the perceptions of experienced real-estate agents. After seeing the house and reading all of the information, agents were asked to evaluate the house on four dimensions:

1. What is an appropriate list price for this house? (Appropriate List Price)
2. What do you estimate is the appraisal value of this house? (Appraisal Value)
3. As a buyer, what is a reasonable amount to pay for the house? (Willingness to Pay)
4. What is the lowest offer you would accept for this house if you were the seller? (Lowest Acceptable Offer)

Figure 1.2 graphs the responses to these questions by agents who were provided each of the list prices. As you can see, agents were strongly influenced by whichever list price they were arbitrarily assigned! On every measure, those given a higher list price thought the house was worth more than did those given a lower list price. Furthermore, when the agents were asked whether their answers had been influenced at all by the list price given to them on the information sheet, more than 80 percent of them said no.




HOW SHOULD YOU RESPOND TO THEIR INITIAL OFFER? 

STRATEGY 1: IGNORE THE ANCHOR

The best thing to do in the event that the other party makes an aggressive first offer—whether high or low—is to ignore it. This doesn’t mean you should pretend you didn’t hear it. Rather, respond to this effect: “Judging by your offer, I think we might be looking at this deal in very different ways. Let’s try to bridge that gap by discussing…” In this manner, you can shift the conversation to an entirely different topic, one that allows you to reassert control of the discussion.

STRATEGY 2: SEPARATE INFORMATION FROM INFLUENCE

Every offer is a combination of information and influence. The other party’s offer tells you something about what she believes and what she wants (information), but it also has the power to derail your strategy (influence). Your task is to separate the information contained in the particulars of the offer (and the way in which it was made) from the other side’s attempt to influence your perceptions. The best way to stave off influence is to stick to your original game plan. If you walked in with a prepared first offer, don’t allow the other side’s anchor to soften it. This does not mean that you should ignore substantial information that changes your beliefs about the actual ZOPA. For example, if the other side has just provided credible evidence that she has an attractive offer from a competitor of yours, this might be reason to adjust your counteroffer. However, it is important to realize that anchors will affect perceptions and counteroffers even in the absence of any real information provided to you. For example, the negotiator’s mind can sometimes fail to distinguish between these two statements:

• Information and Influence: “We have received a better offer from Company X. As a result, we think your initial offer is low. We would like you to increase it to $7 million.”

• Influence Only: “As you know, there are other companies with whom we do business. We have spoken with them. As a result, we think your initial offer is low. We would like you to increase it to $7 million.”

STRATEGY 3: AVOID DWELLING ON THEIR ANCHOR

Many negotiators believe that if someone anchors aggressively, you should push them to justify the anchor, thereby exposing the frivolous nature of their extreme demands. This is a dangerous strategy. Why? Because the more an anchor is discussed in a negotiation, the more powerful it becomes. If you ask the other party to justify their offer or discuss it further (e.g., “How did you come up with that number?”), you increase the power of that anchor to define the negotiation parameters. Almost always, your counterpart will find a way to frame the negotiation such that their offer makes at least a modicum of sense.

On the other hand, you do not want to miss out on the opportunity to learn something new about the deal or about your counterpart’s perspective. To resolve this dilemma, try the following: if you are surprised by their offer, probe a little to find out if there is in fact any substantive new information that you can obtain. If no such information is forthcoming, quickly shift attention away from the anchor by sharing your own perspective and defining the negotiation in your terms.

STRATEGY 4: MAKE AN ANCHORED COUNTEROFFER, THEN PROPOSE MODERATION

Finally, if it is not possible to ignore or dismiss the other party’s anchor, you should offset its influence by making an aggressive counteroffer. In doing so, you retain the ability to capture as much of the ZOPA as possible. However, countering aggression with aggression comes at a risk: the possibility that both parties will become entrenched and reach an impasse. To mitigate this risk, you should offset their anchor with an aggressive counteroffer, and then suggest that you need to work together to bridge the gap. In addition, you should offer to make the first move toward moderation by discussing your own perspective (i.e., by justifying your aggressive counteroffer). This allows you to deflate their anchor while shifting from an aggressive exchange to a quest for common ground. For example, in response to an aggressive anchor, you might say:

Well, based on your offer, which was unexpected, it looks like we have a lot of work ahead of us. From our perspective, a fair price would be closer to $X [your counter-anchor]. I will explain to you how we are valuing this deal, but it appears to me that if we are to reach any agreement, we will both have to work together to make it happen.

STRATEGY 5: GIVE THEM TIME TO MODERATE THEIR OFFER WITHOUT LOSING FACE

If the other party’s initial offer is very extreme—far outside the ZOPA—you may need to inform them that their offer is not even a basis for starting the discussion. This assertion should be followed by information regarding your own perspective and a candid invitation to reopen negotiations from a very different starting point.

WHAT SHOULD MY FIRST OFFER BE?

Suppose you have collected enough information before and during the negotiation to make an appropriate first offer. How aggressively should you anchor? There are four factors to consider:

1. Keep the entire ZOPA in play. 

How can you meet the goal of making an offer that keeps the entire ZOPA in play? By making an offer that falls outside the ZOPA—one that you know the other side will not accept. In this manner, when substantive negotiations begin, you will still have the ability to claim as much value as possible. The idea is to force the other party to negotiate their way into the ZOPA. If your first offer is already inside the ZOPA, you have given up the ability to claim value that lies between your offer and the other party’s RV from the very start.

2. Provide a justification for your offer.

How far outside the ZOPA should your offer be? The more aggressive your first offer, the more likely it is that the other party will be offended by it, think that you are not serious, or believe that there is no way of reaching an agreement with you.

How can you balance these concerns? First, consider the context: the degree of aggressiveness should be appropriate to the situation. In most real-world negotiation contexts, you will not want to be too far outside the ZOPA; otherwise, you lose credibility. In other situations (business disputes involving a mediator, contentious labor-management negotiations, haggling with a street vendor, et cetera), it is normal and expected for both parties to open with extreme demands. It would be unwise in these cases to moderate your demands too much because the other side is still likely to anchor aggressively.

To determine your exact offer, ask yourself the following question: “What is the most aggressive offer that I can justify?” You should never make an offer so extreme that it cannot be stated as follows: “I would like to propose X, because...” If you cannot finish this sentence in any meaningful way, you are probably asking for too much.

3. Set high, but realistic aspirations.

In our negotiation seminars, we ask participants to write down their target price—that is, the outcome they hope to achieve—before the negotiation begins. After the simulation has concluded, we analyze the relationship between negotiators’ target price and final negotiated price. These two correlate highly; that is, those who have more aggressive targets tend to achieve more favorable outcomes than do those with more modest goals.

Why? First, those who set high aspirations tend to make more aggressive first offers in order to reach their target. Thus, aspirations influence first offers, which in turn influence final prices. Second, those with aggressive targets work harder at haggling once both parties’ opening offers are on the table. High aspirations serve as self-fulfilling prophecies; they motivate the kinds of behaviors that help us achieve aggressive targets.

This simple advice — "Always reach for the stars!" — is nonetheless often ignored by negotiators; few set explicit targets prior to negotiation. But targets that are inspired by high aspirations and yet grounded in reality (i.e., in your assessment of the ZOPA) are effective because they motivate behavior and minimize your susceptibility to influence tactics.

4. Consider the context and the relationship.

The most important thing to consider when making any offer is the context of the negotiation. What type of relationship do you have with the other side? Will hard bargaining be ill-received? Are reputations at stake? What norms drive your interactions? For example, you might have evaluated the ZOPA perfectly and justified your offer brilliantly, but if you lose sight of the fact that your tactics could affect the relationship, you might lose the deal—or worse, lose the deal, damage the relationship, and ruin your reputation all at the same time. Thus, your offer and your justifications should be informed by your understanding of the needs and sensitivities of the relationship. Your goal should not simply be to get the best possible deal while preserving the relationship, but to get the best deal while strengthening the relationship and your reputation. You may have to forgo some short-term gains to meet this goal, but this sacrifice will almost always be worth the price.

HOW FAR CAN I PUSH THEM? 

Knowing the other side’s walk-away point tells you just how far they can be pushed—and how much value you can capture. Of course, the other side has no incentive to reveal their reservation value to you. How, then, can you obtain the information that will help you estimate their RV with greater accuracy? Here are the steps to follow:

Step 1. Exhaust all pre-negotiation sources of information.

Consider another situation in which such background information is key: negotiating a job offer. Often, when MBA students come to us seeking advice regarding negotiations with prospective employers, they are confused about what is negotiable, the degree to which each issue is negotiable, and how much is reasonable to demand. When we ask them what they have done to resolve this uncertainty, they usually tell us that they have only discussed these questions informally with their classmates. That is certainly not enough of an effort. We encourage them to talk to students from their program who were hired the previous year by the same firm, friends and acquaintances who have worked in (or who have offers from) firms in the same industry, and staff in the MBA placement office. They can also obtain information from industry publications or from websites that provide hiring and salary data for a wide variety of professions. More generally, in any negotiation, once you know what you do not know, it is important to seek out all potential sources of information.

Step 2. Identify your assumptions prior to the negotiation.

Socrates is believed to have said: “I am likely to be wiser to this small extent, that I do not think I know what I do not know.” Such wisdom about one’s limitations is critical in negotiation. For example, you are unlikely ever to know the other side’s exact reservation value. As a result, you do not know the ZOPA; you can only estimate the ZOPA—and revise that estimate as you gather more information.

Step 3. Ask questions that challenge your assumptions.

The wrong way to approach a negotiation is to start bargaining as if your assumptions are correct. Instead, ask questions to clarify matters. 

Step 4. Ask indirect questions.

Naturally, the other party will sometimes refuse to answer questions that could help you determine their reservation value. In that case, you need to ask questions that are less direct—and less threatening. 

Consider the questions that our MBA job candidate might ask prospective employers to determine the hiring manager’s likely reservation value:

• How many hours do employees typically work each week?
• What kinds of projects will I be working on?
• Who will my clients be?
• Whom does the firm typically hire?
• With whom does the firm typically compete for hiring?
• What, if any, are the formal constraints on compensation for new hires?

Step 5. Protect yourself from lies and uncertainty with contingency contracts.

Suppose you have done everything right: you have identified what you do not know, you have exhausted all sources of information prior to negotiation, and you have done everything you possibly can to obtain information from the other side. Yet you remain uncomfortable because you still lack certain vital information. For example, imagine that Connie has told you that Estate One will not use the Hamilton property for commercial development. Although you have no way of knowing with any certainty, you believe this is a lie. What should you do now?

Consider the use of a contingency contract. Contingency contracts are agreements that leave certain elements of the deal unresolved until uncertainty is resolved in the future. In the Hamilton negotiation, a contingency contract might state: “The sale will be made at a base price of $46 million, with the condition that if the land is used for commercial development in the next seven years, Estate One will pay an additional $10 million to Pearl Investments.” The moment this clause is included in the agreement, Estate One no longer has a motivation to lie! Because the sale price is now tied to Estate One’s plans, they cannot benefit from deceiving you. Furthermore, even if Connie was not lying (i.e., Estate One is not currently planning commercial development), the contingency contract protects you against a future change of plans by Estate One.

Contingency contracts not only protect you from lies, but also help you detect lies.

EFFECTIVE HAGGLING STRATEGIES 

When most people think about negotiation, they think about haggling— the iterative give-and-take that takes place after each party has made its initial offer. Haggling is a necessary component of every negotiation. Why? Because it is not sufficient that parties discuss options that exist within the ZOPA; to reach a specific negotiated agreement, they must coordinate and ratify a mutually acceptable final deal. Since neither party wants to concede more than the other, each tends to concede slowly and, typically, only in response to the other side’s concessions.

STRATEGY 1: FOCUS ON THE OTHER PARTY’S BATNA AND RESERVATION VALUE 

Think back to when Roosevelt’s campaign manager discovered that he might owe as much as $3 million to a photographer. Instead of focusing on his own weak BATNA (reprint millions of brochures), the manager focused on the photographer’s weak BATNA (make no money and lose a publicity opportunity). In doing so, the manager not only avoided paying a high price, but also made some money on the deal. Negotiators who focus on their own BATNA (i.e., “What can I do without the other party?”) tend not to set high aspirations and are happy getting anything better than their RV. Meanwhile, those who focus on the other party’s BATNA (“What will they do without me?”) are paying attention to the amount of value they bring to the other party. These folks tend to set higher aspirations and capture more value in the deals they negotiate.

STRATEGY 2: AVOID MAKING UNILATERAL CONCESSIONS 

Once each party has made an initial offer, it’s time to take measured steps toward a mutually acceptable agreement. Negotiation geniuses are willing to be flexible and to make concessions, but they also demand reciprocity. It is important to avoid making unilateral concessions. Luckily, a norm of reciprocity pervades most negotiation contexts: parties widely expect and understand that they will take turns making concessions. If the other party violates this norm, you should rectify this problem immediately. The next five points show how to do so.

STRATEGY 3: BE COMFORTABLE WITH SILENCE 

Many people are uncomfortable with silence. As a result, they speak when they should not. A particularly dangerous time to speak is after you have made your offer and the other side is considering it. If the other side seems to be taking too long to respond, negotiators often grow nervous and start bargaining against themselves. Before your counterpart has even voiced a concern or a grievance, you might be tempted to retract your offer or to make further concessions.

Experienced negotiators have told us that they use silence to their advantage in exactly this way. Instead of responding negatively to an offer, they simply wait it out. Very often, the party that has made the offer will begin to qualify it, moderate it, or simply signal a greater willingness to concede. Effective negotiators understand not only the power of silence, but also the need to be comfortable with it. Just remind yourself that if you speak when it is their turn, you will be paying by the word.

STRATEGY 4: LABEL YOUR CONCESSIONS 

According to the norm of reciprocity, negotiators should reciprocate the concessions made by others. Because people are hardwired to feel obligated when someone has provided them something of value, this norm is a powerful motivator of behavior. Yet people are also motivated to undervalue or ignore the concessions of others in order to escape feelings of obligation. Our research has shown that it is easy for people not to reciprocate when the other party’s concessions are not top of mind. For this reason, it is critical to label your concessions. Instead of simply giving something away or moderating your demands, make it clear that your action is costly to you. Because labeled concessions are hard to ignore, it becomes difficult for recipients to justify nonreciprocity.

STRATEGY 5: DEFINE WHAT IT MEANS TO RECIPROCATE 

Reciprocity is even more likely if you not only label your concession, but specify what you expect in return. This strategy eliminates another piece of ambiguity. Even if the other side acknowledges your concession, they might still reciprocate with something of low value unless you make it clear that such a move does not fulfill their obligation to reciprocate. For example, your concession might take the following form: “I understand that we are still millions of dollars apart. I’m willing to moderate my demands, though this will be very costly to me. I’m making a concession with the understanding that you will reciprocate with concessions of similar magnitude. This is the only way we will be able to reach an agreement we both can accept.

STRATEGY 6: MAKE CONTINGENT CONCESSIONS 

Contingent concessions explicitly tie your concessions to specific actions by the other party. In other words, you can phrase your concessions in a quid-pro-quo manner to clarify that you will only make them if the other party does their part. For example: “I can pay a higher price if you can promise me early delivery.”

While such concessions are among the safest a negotiator can make, that doesn’t mean they are always appropriate. The more conditions you place on your concessions and your willingness to cooperate, the more difficult it may be to build trust and strengthen the relationship. Thus, contingent concessions should be used as needed, but not overused.

STRATEGY 7: BE AWARE OF THE EFFECTS OF DIMINISHING RATES OF CONCESSIONS 

In most negotiations, concession rates follow a pattern: early concessions are larger in size than later concessions. In other words, negotiators tend to offer diminishing rates of concessions over the course of the negotiation. For example, at the car dealership, the salesperson might start at $45,000, then go to $44,000, then to $43,500, then to $43,300. This may be a reasonable trend; as a negotiator gets closer to his reservation value, there is less room for large concessions. As a result, most negotiators expect this pattern and take it as a signal that the other party’s RV is approaching. But it’s also possible that the other party could use this expectation strategically. That is, a party that is far from his RV might suggest that he is running out of room by offering concessions that quickly diminish in size. It is important to consider this possibility when updating your beliefs regarding the true size of the ZOPA.

NEGOTIATING THE RELATIONSHIP 

Many people believe that you can either get a great deal for yourself, or you can play nice and make the other side happy. As it turns out, this is not the way it works. Whether the relationship is strengthened, weakened, or destroyed in the negotiation does depend on how satisfied each party is with the final outcome—but satisfaction has less to do with how well someone actually negotiated and much more to do with how well they think they negotiated. With this in mind, negotiation geniuses not only manage their own outcomes, they also manage the other side’s satisfaction. Put simply: you are negotiating not just the deal, but also the relationship.

1. Responding to an offer that you love—one approach. 

Imagine that you have done your homework and carefully evaluated the ZOPA. You have thought hard about your first offer and have come up with one that you believe to be aggressive; it falls outside the ZOPA and should serve to anchor the negotiation effectively. You make the offer. The response? The other party grins and accepts your offer immediately! How do you feel? In all likelihood, you feel terrible. It dawns on you that you have misjudged the ZOPA, made a poor first offer, and failed to capture much of the value that was up for grabs. You blew it!

Now turn the situation around. Imagine that the other side has made a first offer that you find surprisingly attractive. How should you respond? If you accept too quickly or too enthusiastically, you are likely to upset the other party. To increase their satisfaction from the deal, you might take some time to ponder the offer. Then, when you eventually accept the offer without enthusiasm, they are likely to feel that they got a great deal. The outcome is the same in both cases, but the latter approach makes the other side happier.

2. Responding to an offer that you love—another approach. 

If you really want to increase your counterpart’s satisfaction from the deal, you might want to do more than simply wait before you respond. If you accept their first offer, even begrudgingly, they are likely to feel some regret and wonder whether they could have gotten more from you. This suggests a different strategy: make a counteroffer and ask for additional concessions. That is, if you really want the other side to feel satisfied with the negotiation, take more of their money! Even if they have to make some nominal concessions, they will be happier than if you accepted their first offer. This interesting result wonderfully illustrates the dissociation between outcomes and satisfaction in negotiation: satisfaction has everything to do with how well you think you did, and often little or nothing to do with how well you actually did.

3. Responding to an offer that you love—yet another approach. 

Consider the following anecdote from Professor Richard Shell’s book Bargaining for Advantage. When, in the early 1930s, the Institute for Advanced Study at Princeton University was recruiting Albert Einstein, the head of the institute wrote to Einstein asking him how much he expected to be paid. Einstein wrote back:

“$3,000 (annually), unless you think I can get by with less.” 

Now, this seems like a surprisingly dimwitted first offer from a man as smart as Einstein. But look at Princeton’s response: “We’ll pay you $15,000 a year.” Einstein accepted and the deal was done. Why didn’t Princeton accept Einstein’s low offer or, better yet, negotiate an even lower salary? For one thing, as the adage proclaims, “Time reveals truth.” Writing from Austria, Einstein may not have known how much he was worth to Princeton, but this would change when he joined the faculty in the United States. In other words, Einstein’s perception of the ZOPA may have been inaccurate while negotiations were under way; eventually, however, he would update his assessment. When he did, he might feel as if Princeton had negotiated in bad faith by accepting his uninformed initial offer. In addition, by offering Einstein five times what he requested, Princeton administrators sent a strong signal about the school’s integrity, their interest in his well-being, and their desire to negotiate in good faith. By declining to take advantage of his attractive first offer, they might have cheaply “purchased” the kind of loyalty and strong relationship that is hard to come by at the bargaining table.

More generally, this story suggests that sometimes the smartest response to an offer that you love is to give something back. If you have been given an opportunity to strengthen the relationship or enhance your reputation, and all you need to do is reciprocate in kind to a generous (i.e., not aggressive) opening offer, it may be foolish to do otherwise.

4. Responding to an offer that you love—a caveat! 

So far we have looked at this issue under the assumption that the other party has made a poor first offer that allows you to capture most of the value in the negotiation. But this assumes that your evaluation of the ZOPA is the correct one! As we have discussed earlier, such assumptions can be costly. If the other side makes an offer that appears to give you everything you could hope for and more, it is critical that you stop and ask yourself: “What do they know that I don’t?”

For example, if the other side offers to buy something from you for more than you could have dreamed, you should ask yourself whether you made a mistake in estimating their reservation value. Maybe the item you are selling is more valuable than you thought. Maybe they are more desperate than you expected, or have a lot more money than you thought. In short, if you are surprised by an offer, don’t celebrate—think! You might still decide that they have made too generous an offer, but it is better to postpone your counteroffer until you are sure you know where things stand.

MANAGING YOUR OWN SATISFACTION 

Earlier, we stated that one way to obtain better outcomes is to have high aspirations; those who set aggressive targets tend to capture more value. Here’s something we neglected to mention: those who set aggressive targets and get better outcomes as a result also tend to be less satisfied with the deals they negotiate!8 Why? Because when the negotiation is over, they compare their final outcome to their high initial aspirations. Naturally, those with high aspirations will be more likely to fall short, even though they achieved better outcomes than those who set low aspirations.

Thus, increasing your satisfaction with a deal requires a simple change of mental habits: focus on your target during the negotiation; when it is over, shift your focus to your reservation value. By doing so, you will negotiate effectively (thanks to your high aspirations) and still be satisfied with your outcome afterward (because you are now comparing it with your RV). Because your satisfaction with a deal depends on your point of comparison, or reference point, it pays to pick a low reference point when there is nothing more that you can do to change the outcome.

CHAPTER 2: Creating Value in Negotiation 

By October 2000, Richard Holbrooke, U.S. ambassador to the United Nations, was facing a rapidly deteriorating situation. Members of the U.S. Senate were calling for a U.S. withdrawal from the United Nations. Meanwhile, at the UN, U.S. representatives were being sidelined in committee meetings, and the United States was on the verge of losing its vote in the General Assembly. The conflict was over a large sum of money—more than $1 billion. The United States owed this amount in arrears to the UN, but was unwilling to pay unless the UN agreed to a variety of reforms.

The conflict could be traced back to the founding of the United Nations. In 1945, the United States had agreed to pay 50 percent of the UN’s yearly regular budget. The amount owed by each country was recalibrated several times over the ensuing years as other nations began to develop economically and wanted more influence in the UN. The most recent adjustment affecting the United States had been in 1972, when the U.S. assessment was reduced to 25 percent of the regular UN budget. The U.S. was also paying approximately 30 percent of the peacekeeping budget, which, due to conflicts in Somalia, Rwanda, and Bosnia, was increasingly seen as an unpredictable and hefty commitment. As a result, by the end of the decade, the United States was demanding another recalibration of assessments. Feeling that the United States was paying too high a share of the dues, Congress decided to hold the nearly $1 billion debt hostage. The U.S. demand (as manifested in the Helms-Biden bill) was this: the United States would pay what it owed if the UN agreed to a variety of reforms, in particular a reduction of the U.S. assessment from 25 percent to 22 percent.

There were three serious problems with this demand. First, other nations viewed it as unfair: the United States was essentially asking for a concession in return for something it already owed. Second, this was not a two-party negotiation in which the United States simply had to convince a UN delegation. Because UN regulations stipulated that such a change could only be approved with the consensus of all UN member states, Ambassador Holbrooke would have to convince all 189 countries to agree to the U.S. demands. Third, Holbrooke was facing a deadline. The Helms-Biden bill had appropriated $1 billion toward payment of arrears, but this money would disappear from the budget on January 1, 2001.

It became clear early in the process that negotiations between the UN and the United States would not be easy. Holbrooke’s team had hoped that Japan and the Europeans would pick up most of the slack created by the reduction in U.S. assessments. The Japanese, however, made it clear that not only were they unwilling to increase their dues, but that if the U.S. received a reduction, they, too, would demand one. Japan was the second-highest contributor to the UN, paying a little over 20 percent of the regular budget. The Japanese felt this amount was too high given that Japan did not even have a seat on the UN Security Council. The Europeans also appeared extremely hesitant to approve an increase in their assessments.

In the face of such resistance, how could Holbrooke and his team convince even one nation to increase its assessment? How could they avoid an impasse?

As the year 2000 wore on, Holbrooke and his team decided to start from scratch. They drew up a chart of every UN member state and determined how much each was currently paying. They then began to visit representatives from every single country—not to convince them, but simply to understand their perspective. They quickly confirmed that no country wanted an increase in its assessment. But that was not the whole story. Holbrooke pushed further in his discussions to discover why they could not pay more. The reasons varied widely, but one important—and unforeseen—reason soon became salient. One of the problems faced by many countries—that would otherwise agree to increase their contributions—was the fact that fiscal year 2000 was coming to an end, and their federal budgets for 2001 were already fixed. Holbrooke was asking for a change in assessments before January 1, 2001. This deadline was making the deal unworkable.

As the reason underlying the reticence of these UN member states became apparent, so did the solution. Holbrooke proposed that the U.S. assessments be reduced from 25 percent to 22 percent immediately to meet the Helms-Biden deadline, but that other nations not be asked to increase their contributions until 2002. “That made a fantastic difference,” recalled Ambassador Holbrooke, “that really worked.”

On the surface, the negotiation with UN member states appeared to be a zero-sum negotiation: whatever one party gained resulted in an equivalent loss to another. As in the Hamilton Real Estate case discussed in Chapter 1, there appeared to be only one salient issue—in this case, assessments— and the parties were making incompatible demands. Holbrooke’s genius lay in discovering that the dispute entailed not one but two issues: the size of assessments and their timing. Only when the negotiators stopped haggling over one divisive issue (assessment size) and broadened their focus to include the issue of timing could they strike a deal.

While the final agreement required compromise by both sides, it also allowed each side to get what it wanted most on the issue it cared about most: the U.S. got the assessment size it wanted, and other countries got the timing they wanted. You might still wonder how such a deal was possible, given that it would create a shortfall in dues for the year 2001. As it turns out, thanks to another successful negotiation by Ambassador Holbrooke, philanthropist Ted Turner agreed to cover the one year budget shortfall with a personal donation of over $30 million, and the Republicans in Congress, though initially reluctant to permit a donation from a politically liberal contributor, eventually accepted the deal.

A MULTI-ISSUE NEGOTIATION 
As the Holbrooke negotiation suggests, however, dealmaking is often more complicated than it is thought. Effective negotiators need to prepare to execute complex negotiations that entail multiple issues, complex analysis, and considerable uncertainty.

CREATING VALUE THROUGH LOGROLLING 

Effective negotiators look for opportunities to create value by making trades across multiple issues. The act of trading across issues is called logrolling. Logrolling requires that you not only know your own priorities, but that you learn about the priorities of the other side. If the other side values something more than you do, you should give it to them in exchange for reciprocity on issues that are a higher priority for you. In his negotiations with the UN member nations, Ambassador Holbrooke demonstrated this knowledge implicitly. Once he discovered that the size of assessments was relatively less important to other nations than the timing of assessments, he structured a deal that gave the United States what it valued most (change in assessment amount) and gave other contributing nations what they valued most (delay in implementation).

In negotiation, you should consider giving up something that you value—even to someone you do not care about—if that person values it more than you do. This is not a matter of altruism or kindness, but of value creation. If you create value, you have the opportunity to capture a portion of this created value for yourself.

This insight is critical: negotiators should seize every opportunity to create value. If the other party values something more than you do, let them have it—but don’t give it away, sell it. Of course, if you do care about the other side, all the more reason to create value. But remember that creating value is not just what a “nice” negotiator does when she cares about the other side. It’s what a negotiation genius will do categorically.

CREATING VALUE BY ADDING ISSUES 

- A good negotiator will do whatever it takes to close the deal, while a negotiation genius will do whatever it takes to maximize value in the deal. A good negotiator plays the game well; a negotiation genius changes the nature of the game itself. In this case, that means identifying and pursuing opportunities for value creation that are not obvious.

- Adding issues to a negotiation is an important tactic for value creation because of a simple formula: more issues = more currency. The more issues you have to play with, the easier it will be to find opportunities for logrolling. 

- The goal of negotiation is not to get the best possible outcome on any one issue, but to negotiate the best possible package deal based on a consideration of all of the issues.

- Many negotiators, including some seasoned dealmakers, believe that negotiation is about compromise. This is not true. Negotiation often entails compromise, but it is not about compromise. 

- Our goal here is not simply to help you reach agreements that both parties consider to be “win-win” our goal is to help you maximize value.

- As it turns out, even a desire to make the other side happy is not enough to help maximize value creation. People in close relationships (such as spouses) often negotiate worse outcomes than do people who care less about their counterpart. Why? Because those in close relationships compromise across the board in order to avoid being perceived as greedy or overly self-interested. As a result, they often ignore opportunities for logrolling and, instead, destroy value rather than create it! Excellent partners—in personal and business relationships alike—master the ability to communicate openly and share information about their real needs and priorities. In doing so, they identify all of the potentially relevant issues and cooperate to create maximum value. And, once you have created the conditions for value maximization, you can focus on capturing as much of that value for yourself as you deem appropriate given your relationship with the other party and your desire to be fair.

- In business negotiations, price is often the divisive issue. Smart negotiators recognize the limitations of one-issue deals and work to broaden the scope. Here are a few of the negotiable issues that you can introduce into the discussion the next time the other side appears entirely focused on price:

• delivery date
• financing
• quality
• contract length
• last-look provisions
• arbitration clauses
• exclusivity clauses
• level of service support
• warranties
• future business

YOUR GOAL SHOULD BE TO MAXIMIZE VALUE 

In technical terms, a revision of the agreement is referred to as a Pareto improvement when "changes to a deal make at least one person better off without making anyone worse off". As you can see, Pareto improvements create value in negotiation. One of your goals in every negotiation should be to look constantly for Pareto improvements until you have reached an agreement that is Pareto efficient: that is, until there is no way to make one party better off without hurting the other.

The virtue of Pareto efficiency is that it ensures that no money is left on the table (i.e., burned) at the end of the deal. But notice that Pareto efficiency says nothing about how the created value is divided between parties.

CREATING VALUE THROUGH CONTINGENCY CONTRACTS 

In your Moms.com negotiation, recall your disagreement with Kim regarding how much revenue the show is likely to bring to WCHI. 

Kim argued that the show was likely to receive low ratings (3–4).

You suspected he was lying; your research showed expected ratings of 5–6. 

What did you do when that difference of opinion surfaced? You essentially ignored it, decided to “agree to disagree” on the issue, and moved ahead with other substantive discussions. 

Is that the best way to handle such disagreements? Very often, it is not. 

Let’s consider a better, more systematic approach for handling disagreements regarding expectations about the future success, quality, or performance of a good or a service that you might be negotiating.

First, try to figure out who is right and who is wrong. For example, you might share your research with each other and work together to analyze the data. You might agree to conduct additional research together, or you might bring in a disinterested third party whom you both trust to do the research. Any of these approaches will help you resolve your differences and allow you to negotiate based on shared assumptions and analyses. You hope, of course, that the additional research will support your contention (in this case, that the show’s ratings will be high). If both parties can agree that expected ratings and expected revenue are high rather than low, you stand to make more money in the sale.

Another solution to the disagreement is for both parties to compromise. In other words, you might agree to assume that both sides are probably somewhat incorrect and that an average (4–5) is a reasonable best estimate of ratings. The benefit of this approach is that you do not have to waste extra time or money gathering additional data or hiring a third party. A problem with this approach is that if you truly believe that your numbers are correct—and that the other side is either incompetent or dishonest—you will not want to compromise. Why would you throw away your own numbers simply because the other party (who has an incentive to lowball the estimate) is telling you that you are wrong?

This brings us to a third solution, one that avoids the costs of gathering more data, avoids the hassle of trying to convince the other side that you are correct, and avoids capitulating to the desires of a party you do not trust: negotiate a contingency contract. As discussed in Chapter 1, contingency contracts allow negotiators to avoid arguing about the likelihood of some future event (in this case, the show’s ratings) and instead wait to see what actually transpires.

PREPARATION STRATEGIES FOR VALUE CREATION 

STRATEGY 1: IDENTIFY YOUR MULTIPLE INTERESTS 

Most negotiators take the domain of negotiation as given. For example, they enter talks thinking, “Today we’re going to be haggling over salary,” or “We’re meeting with the client to negotiate an extension of the contract length,” or “This negotiation is about the sale of our company.” A more effective strategy is to think about all of the things that you value that the other party might have the ability to provide. For example, in addition to negotiating your salary, perhaps you should also negotiate your start date, vacation days, signing bonus, job description, promotion schedule, and stock options.

The goal is not to overwhelm the other party with demands, but to give them a lot of different ways to compensate you and make you happy. If they cannot increase your salary but they can make you equally happy with some combination of signing bonus, change in job description, and more aggressive promotion opportunities, both of you stand to gain. They get to hire their preferred candidate (you) without paying a high salary, and you get a compensation package that makes you happy. Similarly, when approaching the sale of your company, it is critical that you think about everything that you value. For example, you might care about the preservation of your company’s legacy, maintaining a seat on the board, having a minority stake in the company, or safeguarding the continued employment of your workers. It may be that you are unwilling to accept the price offered when it is the only issue being negotiated, but the price becomes acceptable if you can retain some shares, are given a seat on the board, and have the ability to protect your workers. Unfortunately, some such issues never see the light of day because the seller assumes that “they will never agree to give me a seat on the board” or that “they’ve already decided whether they will keep or lay off my employees.”

STRATEGY 2: CREATE A SCORING SYSTEM

Identifying issues is only the first step. Next, you need to think about your relative priorities over the many issues.

How do you trade off salary against stock options, starting date, or promotion track? How much would you be willing to give up in salary to work in a specific division of the firm?

A scoring system offers a way to organize your interests and priorities so that you can answer these questions efficiently. To create a scoring system, list each issue and weight it according to its importance using a computer spreadsheet program. You will need to think of a common metric for evaluating each issue. For example, you might start with a hundred points and distribute these points across the issues (and across potential outcomes for each issue) in proportion to their relative importance. Another easy metric involves converting everything into dollar values (e.g., each additional day of vacation equals $600 in salary). Having a common metric across all issues will help you evaluate the package offers the other party makes and also help you structure your counteroffers more carefully and strategically.

STRATEGY 3: CALCULATE A PACKAGE RESERVATION VALUE 

Instead of having a reservation value for each issue (“The lowest salary I will accept is $X, the lowest signing bonus is $Y, and the lowest number of stock options is Z”), you should use your scoring system to calculate an overall reservation value. For example, if your BATNA is to accept an offer from Company A, entering the specifics of the offer from Company A into your scoring system will give you the total value (in points or dollar terms) of that offer. This is your package reservation value (PRV). Now, in your current negotiation, you know not to accept any offer that gives you a total value less than your PRV. 

The problem with having a separate reservation value for each issue is that your options become limited. You may not want a salary below $X, but are you sure you would not be willing to accept a lower salary if the other side made significant concessions on many or all of the other issues you value? Often, negotiators set arbitrary limits on individual issues (such as salary, bonus, stock options, delivery dates, closing dates, up-front payment, et cetera) because they think that anything beyond that limit would be “unfair” or “unreasonable.” But doing so only limits the negotiator’s flexibility. If the other party cannot stay within your limit on that one issue, but can more than make up for it with other concessions and guarantees, you both may stand to lose because of the limit you have set.

STRATEGY 4: IDENTIFY THE OTHER PARTY’S MULTIPLE INTERESTS 

In negotiation, there often will be issues that you do not care about—but that the other side cares about very much! It is critical to identify these issues. For example, you may be indifferent between whether you start your new job in June or July. But if your potential employer strongly prefers that you start as soon as possible, that’s a valuable piece of information. Now you are in a position to give them something that they value (at no cost to you) and get something of value in return. For example, you might start a month earlier and receive a larger signing bonus for doing so.

EXECUTION STRATEGIES FOR VALUE CREATION 
STRATEGY 1: NEGOTIATE MULTIPLE ISSUES SIMULTANEOUSLY 

We often ask seasoned negotiators the following question: when you are involved in a complex, multi-issue deal, which issues do you negotiate first, the easiest or the toughest? Most negotiators respond that it’s best to start with the easy issues. According to this logic, starting with easy issues allows negotiators to build trust and gather momentum toward an agreement; if you start with a difficult issue, you might derail the negotiation from the start. Another benefit of starting with an easy issue is that it allows you to make a low-cost concession early and set the stage for the other side to reciprocate later on issues of more value to you. While this strategy seems reasonable, some negotiators tell us that it is a better idea to start with the tough issues first. They point out that some issues are “make or break” if you can’t reach agreement on them, there’s no point in wasting time on other, less important issues. Finally, a third group of negotiators responds with the seemingly fail-safe answer “It depends.”

As it turns out, we disagree with all three responses. While negotiators typically find it more natural (and easier) to negotiate one issue at a time, a much better strategy is to negotiate multiple issues simultaneously. Why? Because negotiating one issue at a time eliminates the possibility of logrolling. For example, in the Moms.com negotiation, if you have already reached agreement on the licensing fee and are now negotiating the number of runs, it will be extremely difficult to agree to eight runs. The only way Hollyville will allow eight runs is if WCHI concedes on a different issue— but if you have already put aside the other issues, this is not possible. Notice that, when considered separately, both issues in the Moms.com negotiation are effectively zero-sum; the buyer and seller have diametrically opposed interests on each issue. Only when they negotiate these issues simultaneously can they create a non-zero-sum negotiation that allows for value creation. In other words, although the buyer and seller will be in conflict on each issue, they are not equally passionate about each issue. The relative importance of each issue to each party only becomes apparent when the issues are discussed simultaneously.

STRATEGY 2: MAKE PACKAGE OFFERS 

Negotiating multiple issues simultaneously does not mean that you must literally talk about every issue at the same time. It does mean that you should avoid reaching final agreement on any one issue until you have had the opportunity to discuss every issue. Especially when there are many complex issues to discuss, a particularly productive approach is to begin with a discussion of each side’s perspective and preferred outcome on each issue. Once you have shared preliminary information, you can begin comparing relative preferences across issues. Finally, when it is time to exchange offers, make package offers. That is, instead of making an offer or demand on one issue (such as price or salary), propose a package deal that communicates to the other side your preferred outcome across all of the issues. This helps the other party isolate aspects of the offer that are particularly problematic and propose counteroffers that do not simply ask for more on each issue. Instead, your counterpart can signal flexibility on some issues while making demands on others. 

Consider the following two approaches for negotiating the price of a service agreement between your firm and a potential client. Which approach is likely to create more value in the end?

A. “Thank you for providing me with a detailed list of the services that your firm requires and for explaining that you would like to begin the service period in July. We can provide these services at a cost of $650,000.”

B. “Thank you for providing me with a detailed list of the services that your firm requires and for explaining that you would like to begin the service period in July. Thank you also for signaling that you have some flexibility on when the service period begins and for your interest in exploring the ‘premium’ service option that I described. This gives us a number of different ways to price the services you value. Here are two options:

“Option 1: If the service period begins in July, and without the premium service, we can provide these services at a cost of $650,000. If you would like to add the premium service, that will come at a cost of $50,000, for a total price of $700,000.

“Option 2: If the service period begins earlier, in March, and without the premium service, we can lower the price to $635,000. If you would like to add the premium service, that will come at a cost of $45,000, for a total price of $680,000.”

Approach B helps your potential client understand what trade-offs are possible, and makes it much more likely that the two of you will reach an efficient agreement.

STRATEGY 3: LEVERAGE DIFFERENCES OF ALL TYPES TO CREATE VALUE 

Because people are different, conflict is natural. We have different perspectives, interests, needs, constraints, careers, educational backgrounds, and experiences. But while differences often lead to conflict, they also provide a means of resolving conflict. The reason logrolling creates value, for instance, is that parties have different priorities. If their priorities were identical, there would be no way for one person to concede on Issue A in return for more of Issue B. Similarly, consider the essence of contingency contracts: they create value because the two parties have different expectations about the future. If their expectations were identical, they would have no opportunity to introduce clauses that increase both parties’ expected value.

Negotiation geniuses understand this crucial insight: you can leverage differences of all types to create value. For example, consider differences in risk preferences. If you are risk averse and someone else is risk neutral, you are in a position to pay that person to take on your risk. Sounds funny, right? But that is exactly what an insurance company does. You pay your health, automobile, or home insurance company a premium to cover your losses in case something goes wrong. On average, you will lose money when you buy insurance. But because you are risk averse, you are willing to lose some money in exchange for paying the risk-neutral company to take away your risk. This makes both of you better off and no one worse off—which means value has been created! 

As another example, consider differences in time preferences. If you are not currently using something you own, but another party needs it right away, you can give them what you have in return for a payment. If this sounds familiar, it’s because this is what happens when you deposit some of your money with a bank. You give your money to the bank because you do not need to spend it immediately. In return, the bank gives your money to its borrowers and pays you for the use of your money in the form of interest. This exchange makes both of you better off.

POST-NEGOTIATION STRATEGIES FOR VALUE CREATION 

Negotiation geniuses do not stop after having created value during the negotiation; they continue to seek out Pareto improvements even after the deal is signed. A powerful tool for value creation is the use of post-settlement settlements (PSS), settlements that are reached after the initial agreement is signed.

Why might you propose a post-settlement settlement? Because, for a variety of reasons, a PSS can lead to Pareto improvements. First, the already-signed agreement confirms the parties’ ability to work together to reach value-creating deals and creates an environment of optimism.

Second, once a signed agreement exists, parties feel less anxious and are often more willing to share information. Third, if presented correctly, both sides will understand that they will only accept a PSS if it improves both of their outcomes. In other words, the recently signed agreement becomes the new BATNA for both parties.

This is a crucial point: you don’t want the other side to perceive the PSS as your attempt to renege or squeeze last-minute concessions out of them. On the contrary, you should present the idea of a PSS as an opportunity for both parties to benefit. Indeed, state this ground rule explicitly at the outset: either we both benefit, or we stick with what we have agreed to already.

THE GENIUS OF VALUE CREATION: Even the most self-interested negotiators must rely on others to satisfy their own interests. Remember: to take what is there, you must work with the other side to make what is there.

CHAPTER 3: Investigative Negotiation 

THE SEVEN PRINCIPLES OF INVESTIGATIVE NEGOTIATION 

PRINCIPLE 1: DON’T JUST ASK WHAT—ASK WHY

Many experienced negotiators believe that the purpose of listening to the other side is to find out what they want. This sounds reasonable. After all, unless you know what the other side wants, how can you structure a deal that they will be willing to accept? Similarly, negotiators tend to spend most of their own speaking time telling others what they themselves want or need. Unfortunately, this approach—finding out what each side wants—often derails negotiations. The reason: too much focus on what people want distracts your attention from discovering why they want it.

PRINCIPLE 2: SEEK TO RECONCILE INTERESTS, NOT DEMANDS

One of the biggest mistakes a negotiator can make is to focus exclusively on trying to reconcile the demands of each party. Investigative negotiators move beyond demands and instead focus on each side’s underlying interests.

The key insight: negotiation geniuses are not discouraged when the demands of each party seem incompatible. Instead, they probe deeper to find out each side’s real underlying interests. This strategy allows them to think more broadly and creatively about agreements that might satisfy the interests of both sides.

PRINCIPLE 3: CREATE COMMON GROUND WITH UNCOMMON ALLIES

It is tempting to believe that Gore and Nader supporters were able to negotiate an agreement in 2000 because they shared an overarching goal: defeating Bush. What happened four years later, however, suggests otherwise. In the 2004 presidential campaign, Democratic candidate John Kerry challenged Republican President George Bush. Again Nader entered the fray. Knowing that Nader’s candidacy had likely cost them the 2000 election, Democrats were in an uproar. Many who had supported Nader in 2000 begged him not to run. Nader refused to abandon his campaign, despite polls showing he had the support of less than 2 percent of voters.

In the summer of 2004, it was revealed that Nader had begun to receive—and to accept—a number of large donations. But these donations did not come from his supporters on the far left—they came from Republicans! Clearly, Republicans were supporting Nader’s candidacy to take votes away from their more dangerous competitor, Kerry. As in 2000, the bargain was consummated in the midst of a seemingly zero-sum game between competitors. This time, it was an implicit pact between Nader supporters (who benefited by receiving additional money with which to attract votes) and Bush supporters (who benefited by diminishing the votes available to their primary opponent, Kerry). Despite the clear-as-day nature of this transaction, Nader’s running mate, Peter Camejo, defended the acceptance of Republican donations by saying, “We have no way to know what the intent of the money is.”

Professors Adam Brandenburger and Barry Nalebuff coined the term co-opetition to describe the mixed motives we often do (and should) have when engaging with those whom we view as our competitors. According to the principle of coopetition, it is possible to simultaneously cooperate and compete with others. You saw this principle at work in Chapter 2, where we developed a framework for simultaneously creating and claiming value in negotiation. Here the power of co-opetition becomes even clearer: those who view their relationship with the other side as one-dimensional (“He is my enemy”) forgo opportunities for value creation, whereas those who appreciate complex relationships and explore mutual interests are able to create common ground.

PRINCIPLE 4: INTERPRET DEMANDS AS OPPORTUNITIES

An executive student, the CEO of a successful construction company, related the following story in one of our classes. The CEO was negotiating a deal in which a buyer would contract with his company to build midsize office buildings. After months of negotiations finally concluded—but just before the contract was signed—the buyer approached the executive with an entirely new and potentially costly demand: a clause in the contract that would require the builder to pay large penalties if the project’s completion was delayed by more than one month. The builder was initially outraged by this sudden demand; it seemed as though the buyer was trying to squeeze some last-minute concessions from him. 

The builder weighed his options: he could accept the buyer’s demand and seal the deal; he could reject the buyer’s demand and hope this would not destroy the deal; or he could try to negotiate to reduce the proposed penalties. Then he thought more deeply about the situation. What did the buyer’s demand reveal? At the very least, it revealed that the buyer was concerned about delays and that he valued timely (and perhaps early) project completion. With this in mind, the executive approached the buyer with the following proposal: he would pay even higher penalties than the buyer had demanded if the project was delayed, but the buyer would give the construction company a bonus if the project was completed earlier than scheduled. After working out the details, both parties agreed to this clause, and both were happier with the deal. The builder was confident that he would finish on time and receive the bonus, and the buyer was able to minimize his downside risk. 

The genius of the CEO’s approach lay in his ability to focus on the other party’s needs and interests rather than on his own predicament. Typically, when facing demands from the other party, negotiators adopt a defensive posture: “How can I avoid accepting this demand?” Investigative negotiators confront demands the same way they confront any other statement from the other party: “What can I learn from this demand? What does it tell me about the other party’s needs and interests? How can I use this information to create and capture value?”

PRINCIPLE 5: DON’T DISMISS ANYTHING AS “THEIR PROBLEM”

While our own constraints are highly visible to us, it’s easy to overlook those of the other party. In fact, negotiators often adopt the attitude “It’s their problem, not mine.” Unfortunately, in negotiation, their problem quickly becomes your problem. For example, if one party faces a deadline, the amount of time available to negotiate diminishes for both parties. Similarly, if one party is unable to fulfill her responsibilities, she may be legally liable, but both parties may stand to lose profit.

In the UN negotiations (in the chapter 2), Ambassador Holbrooke was able to leverage his relationship with Ted Turner (who agreed to donate
over $30 million to offset the one-year shortfall in UN dues) to solve the budget constraints faced by other member states. A problem was solved not out of benevolence or altruism, but because the negotiators understood that an unconstrained “opponent” would have more to offer than would someone whose hands were tied.

PRINCIPLE 6: DON’T LET NEGOTIATIONS END WITH A REJECTION OF YOUR OFFER

How many times have you tried to make a sale, or tried to close a deal, only to have your final offer rejected? What do you do when this happens? If you are like most people, once the other side has said no to the best offer you could conceive, you feel there is little left for you to do. Often, you are correct. Sometimes, however, you are very wrong.

A few years ago, Linda, the CEO of a company that manufactures specialty gift items for many Fortune 500 clients, found herself at the receiving end of a rejection. A very big potential client, whom she had courted for months, had decided that they would purchase from her competitor. The final heartbreak came after both manufacturers had submitted their final offers and the client had picked Linda’s competitor. Linda was surprised, but accepted the loss as a part of life. So she had no illusions of winning the deal when she decided to make one last call to the client. When the VP of purchasing came on the phone, Linda asked whether he would be willing to tell her why her final offer had not been sufficient to win the deal. “This information could help me improve my product and service offerings in the future,” she explained.

Linda was quite surprised when the VP explained why the competitor had beaten her offer. As it turned out, Linda had been under the false assumption that the client cared mostly about price. In her final offer, Linda had done everything possible to reduce the cost to the client; in doing so, she had eliminated features of the product that the client valued significantly. Her competitor, on the other hand, was charging a much higher price, but included the key product features. After listening intently to the VP’s explanation, Linda thanked him for his candor. She then explained that she had misunderstood the client’s position. “Knowing what I know now,” she said, “I’m confident that I can beat their offer.” She then asked the VP whether he was still in a position to entertain a revised offer from her firm. The VP said that he was. One week later, Linda had won the client over—and signed the deal.

The key lesson of this story, one that Linda has applied ever since, is that negotiations should never end with a “no.” Instead, they should either end with a “yes” or with an explanation as to “why not.”

You may discover that the other side has needs that you simply cannot meet, or that your competitor creates value in ways that you cannot. If so, you can confidently walk away from the negotiation knowing that no deal was possible. But you might instead discover that there were options you overlooked, needs you did not consider, or issues you did not explore carefully. The very least that an investigative negotiator will do after being rejected is to ask: “What would it have taken for us to reach an agreement?” Even if the answer confirms that you cannot win the deal, you may learn important information that will help you in your future negotiations with this or other potential customers.

In short, there is nothing wrong with “no deal” or with a rejection of your offer—as long as the reason for the “no deal” is that there is no ZOPA (i.e., no mutually agreeable outcome). If you are not the partner who helps the other side create the most value, then you do not deserve the deal. But if you can create the most value, and there is no deal because you were out-negotiated, then that is a tragic, value-destroying outcome. Investigative negotiators do not fear rejection, but they also don’t let things end there; they investigate further to find out if there really is no scope for a deal. Investigative negotiators understand that “why not” is often as important a question as “why.” And above all, investigative negotiators never stop learning—not even when the deal is lost and they have been asked to leave the room.

PRINCIPLE 7: UNDERSTAND THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN “SELLING” AND "NEGOTIATING"

Imagine you’re watching a salesperson at work. What do you see? What approach is the salesperson taking? What strategies is he employing? What does the salesperson focus on? 

When asked to imagine a salesperson in action, most people envision someone making a “pitch”— arguing the merits of his case and trying to convince a potential target that they should buy what he has to offer.

Now imagine you’re watching a negotiator at work. What do you see? What approach is the negotiator taking? What strategies is he employing? What does the negotiator focus on?

If you again envision someone making a pitch, you are failing to discern the crucial distinction between “selling” and “negotiating.” Selling involves telling people about the virtues of the product or service you have to offer, focusing on the strengths of your case, and trying to induce agreement or compliance. Effective negotiating requires this kind of active selling, but it also entails focusing on the other side’s interests, needs, priorities, constraints, and perspective. Negotiation geniuses—and all great salespeople—understand this difference. They also understand that their ability to structure a deal that maximizes value often hinges not on their ability to persuade, but on their ability to listen.

FIVE STRATEGIES FOR ELICITING INFORMATION FROM RETICENT NEGOTIATORS 

STRATEGY 1: BUILD TRUST AND SHARE INFORMATION

How can you build trust? First, understand that negotiation causes anxiety for everyone—even for that tough, poker-faced negotiator whom you hate to have across the table from you. This anxiety is rooted in the fear that the other party will exploit you if given the opportunity. If you can alleviate this fear, both sides will feel less anxious and will be able to share information more easily. 

Here are three powerful ways to alleviate fear and build trust:

1. Understand and speak their language

This advice is not only relevant in cross-cultural negotiations; executives from different firms and industries also speak different languages. In one case that we know of, a consulting firm lost its bid for a multimillion-dollar project because the firm’s representative did not understand just one specific word of technical jargon that the client was using. That one brief moment of linguistic ignorance cost the firm millions in revenue. How could this have been avoided? The consulting firm could have taken the time to more thoroughly study the client’s industry or could have picked as its representative someone with experience in the client’s industry. When you speak the other side’s language, you not only build a sense of kinship; you also signal that you care about their needs and are interested in building a long-term relationship.

2. Increase the ties that bind.

If yours is a purely business or political relationship, the other side has every reason to believe that you will exploit them when it is in your economic or political interest to do so. Learning about the other side’s family and their life, spending time with them in informal settings, sharing common friends, and living or working in the same community will facilitate trust. Even increasing your economic or political ties with the other side can facilitate trust. Imagine a firm that sells one service to a client under a one-year contract. Now imagine a firm that sells multiple services to the same client, with long-term contracts that expire at different times. Both of these firms will want to renew a contract when it expires. But which of these firms has a greater opportunity to cultivate the trust that is necessary for securing future business with the client?

3. Build trust when you’re not negotiating. 

Your greatest opportunity to build trust comes when your cooperative, benevolent, or ethical behavior cannot be interpreted as self-serving. Anyone can be nice when they are trying to get the deal; smart negotiators maintain and strengthen relationships with others even when there is no obvious economic or political reason to do so. By keeping in touch with exclients, delivering a better product than promised, passing along unanticipated cost savings, and behaving ethically across the board, you can increase the likelihood that your next negotiation will be with someone who trusts you. This highlights another important point: the best way to build trust is to actually be trustworthy. Negotiators who strategize, economize, or cut corners when it comes to ethical behavior are typically not in a position to build the trust necessary for information exchange and value creation.

STRATEGY 2: ASK QUESTIONS—ESPECIALLY IF YOU ARE SURPRISED OR SKEPTICAL

Negotiators often do not bother to ask questions because they assume the other party will not answer them. This is a colossal mistake. While there is no guarantee that someone will answer your questions, one thing is certain: your questions are more likely to be answered if you ask them than if you don’t. But asking the important questions is not enough; the real trick is in knowing how to ask them.

For example, if you want to know the other side’s reservation value, it is usually futile to ask them for their bottom-line figures; they are unlikely to answer. But you can ask other questions that they will answer—and that will give you essentially the same information. Consider these less-threatening queries:

• “What do you plan to do with the products you’re purchasing from us?”
• “Tell me about your customers.”
• “What do you plan to do if we can’t provide you with the services you need?”
• “How does this deal fit into your overall business strategy?”
• “Tell me more about your organization.

STRATEGY 3: GIVE AWAY SOME INFORMATION

You have tried to build trust and share information. You have exhausted your list of questions. Yet the other party is still unwilling to give you the information you need. Now what?

Leverage the norm of reciprocity and be the first to give away some information. For example, you might say: “I know we have a lot to talk about. If you’d like, I can start by discussing some of the issues that are most important to me. Then you can do the same.” This tactic helps reduce the other party’s anxiety; if both parties are sharing information, both are mutually vulnerable. The key, then, is to share information incrementally, back and forth. In this way you can minimize your own risks: if the other party is still reluctant to discuss matters, you can decide to hold back as needed.

When using this strategy, it is critical for you to know what kinds of information to share and withhold. First, you should rarely give away your reservation value—and certainly not early in the negotiation.

On the other hand, it is generally safe to share information regarding your priorities across different issues. This advice often surprises people because they reason as follows: “If I tell them what I don’t value, I won’t be able to demand large concessions in return for giving it to them.” The key is to share information about your relative priorities without minimizing the absolute importance of any one issue. Compare these two approaches: What not to say: “Of the five issues we are here to discuss, I only care about Issues 2 and 4. I don’t really care what we decide about the other items.”

How to say it: “The five issues we are here to discuss are all critical because each has a significant impact on my bottom line. It may be difficult for me to offer concessions on any of the issues. But if I had to choose, I would say that Issues 2 and 4 may be the most critical—these are the issues on which I am least flexible.”

Giving away such information provides two important benefits. First, if your counterpart is a skilled negotiator, she will start identifying trades that will allow you to logroll and create value. For example, she might suggest that she can give you what you need on Issue 2 in exchange for what she needs on Issue 1. Second, even if your counterpart is not a negotiation genius, she is still human—and humans tend to reciprocate behavior. When you lie to people, they often lie in return. When you apologize, they often express contrition or regret as well. And when you give them useful and credible information, they often respond by sharing information with you.

STRATEGY 4: NEGOTIATE MULTIPLE ISSUES SIMULTANEOUSLY

As we noted in Chapter 2, logrolling requires that you put all of the issues on the table at the same time and, instead of discussing them one by one, jump back and forth among them. Negotiating multiple issues simultaneously is also a great way to get information regarding the other party’s relative preferences and priorities. If you discuss one issue at a time, the other party is likely to treat each issue as the most important one in the negotiation. To get a clear read on their true priorities, open up the discussion to include multiple issues and put them in a position where they must make an implicit choice about which issue or demand to emphasize. To determine which issues are most important to the other party, look for the following signs:

• Which issue does he want to return to constantly?
• Which issues make him the most emotional or tense?
• While discussing which issues is she most likely to talk rather than to listen?
• Which issues is she most obstinate about when you ask for a compromise?

STRATEGY 5: MAKE MULTIPLE OFFERS SIMULTANEOUSLY

Imagine that you have tried all of the strategies above and the other party is still reluctant to provide the information you need. What you need now is a tactic that elicits information without him even knowing that he is giving it. Try this: Next time you are preparing to make an offer, don’t just make one. Instead, make two offers simultaneously. Specifically, make two offers that are of equal value to you, but that differ slightly from each other.

Consider the following negotiation with a real-estate agent you are hiring to sell your house. The two primary components of the agent’s contract are commission (the percentage of the sale price that the agent will receive) and contract length (the length of time that the agent has exclusivity to sell the house). The agent wants a high commission (6 percent) and a long contract (six months). You want to give the agent a lower commission and keep the contract length to a minimum. How can you find out which issue the agent values more? First, calculate how these two issues trade off for you by creating a scoring system (see Chapter 2). Let’s say that you discover that it would be equally valuable to you to reduce the commission by 1 percent or to reduce the contract length by one month. So, you make the following two offers to the agent:

Offer X: 2.5 percent commission, three-month contract
Offer Y: 3.5 percent commission, two-month contract

The agent responds that, while neither offer is entirely acceptable to her, she prefers Offer X to Offer Y. This gives you important information! Because these offers are equal in value to you, her choice reveals that (relative to commission rate) the agent values additional time (i.e., contract length) more than you do. Thus, if you try to structure a deal with a relatively low commission in exchange for a longer contract, you are likely to make both parties better off. The agent’s stated preference might also tell you something else—something that should be of concern. Why does the agent value additional time so much? Is she very busy these days? Is she not a good salesperson? These are issues you can now investigate. This information may have been hard to obtain without the use of multiple simultaneous offers.

Keep in mind that the other party does not have to accept either of your two offers to signal her relative priorities. Indeed, the agent could respond to your offers by saying that both are entirely unacceptable because you have anchored too aggressively. This is not a problem. You can then ask: “Which offer is closer to something you could accept?” or “Which one is completely off the mark?” or “If I were to consider making some changes, which offer should I start working on?” Answers to any of these questions will give you the information you need to start logrolling.

Making multiple offers simultaneously is a great tactic for other reasons as well. Not only does it allow you to discover the interests of reticent negotiators, but it also allows you to anchor more strongly (with two offers rather than one) and to simultaneously come across as flexible. The fact that you are providing options signals that you are willing to be accommodating and are interested in understanding the other party’s preferences and needs.

PART II: THE PSYCHOLOGY OF NEGOTIATION 
CHAPTER 4: When Rationality Fails: Biases of the Mind 

WHEN REASON FAILS US 

Daniel Kahneman received the 2002 Nobel Prize in Economics for his work with Amos Tversky on the systematic ways that the human mind deviates from rationality. This profound work has led to scientific revolutions in many fields, including economics, psychology, finance, law, medicine, and marketing. This work has also transformed the field of negotiation. Prior to the influence of what is known as behavioral decision research, negotiators were simply urged to approach problems from a rational perspective—in other words, they were told to take certain logical frameworks (e.g., very early versions of what we have developed in Chapters 1–3) and to “go be rational.”

By contrast, behavioral decision research emphasizes that while advising negotiators to be rational is necessary, it is far from sufficient. Negotiators also need to be made aware of the mental habits and biases that might prevent them from following rational advice. Behavioral decision researchers have learned a great deal about the nature of the mistakes that we make in negotiations, how we can avoid such mistakes in our own thinking, and how we can anticipate and leverage them in the behavior of others. In this chapter and the next, we will help you develop the self-awareness and rationality that is often missing when negotiators are unprepared, caught off guard, or shoot from the hip. We will also assist you in anticipating the thoughts and moves of your negotiation opponents and partners.

Of course, it’s not news that people are irrational and sometimes make mistakes. What is news is that, in the context of decision-making and negotiation, many of the mistakes people make are systematic and predictable. In fact, even the brightest of executives fall victim to four critical, systematic errors on a regular basis: the fixed-pie bias, the vividness bias, nonrational escalation of commitment, and susceptibility to framing.

1: THE FIXED-PIE BIAS 

Sometimes negotiation is about only one issue. Such negotiations are typically zero-sum in nature: one party can gain only at the expense of the other (assuming they reach agreement). Such negotiations are said to have a “fixed pie” of value or resources: the only thing negotiators can do is slice up the pie and try to get a big piece of it.

In contrast, most negotiations involve more than one issue, including delivery, service, financing, bonuses, timing, and relationships. In Chapters 2 and 3, we explained that the presence of multiple issues allows negotiators to create value by making wise trade-offs; we also offered concrete strategies for finding such trade-offs. Here, we add the warning that negotiators often fail to create value because they assume there is a fixed pie of value or resources even when it is possible to increase the size of the pie. In Chris’s story, as in many successful negotiation stories, success required overcoming the fixed-pie bias and moving toward a mutually beneficial trade. The fixed-pie bias affects even the most seasoned negotiators, causing them to focus exclusively on capturing value for themselves and to ignore approaches that could create value. 

The fixed-pie bias not only makes value creation difficult, it can also lead to reactive devaluation: the tendency of negotiators to denigrate and devalue another party’s concessions simply because these are being offered by an adversary.

Bottom line: when approaching any important negotiation, enter the process with the goal of looking for areas in which you can create value. It is better to assume that you can enlarge the pie and later find out that you were wrong than to assume the pie is fixed and never find out you were wrong.

2: THE VIVIDNESS BIAS

Top MBA students from prestigious universities are in a strong position to negotiate with their employers for the issues critical to their career and personal happiness. These students are smart, well trained, and highly valued by the finest firms in the world. Thus, negotiating the right job package should be easy for this group. If this is the case, then why do so many MBA students change jobs very soon after accepting their first position? One important reason is that they are affected by the vividness bias. Specifically, they pay too much attention to vivid features of their offers and overlook less vivid features that could have a greater impact on their satisfaction. This is a potential trap even for seasoned negotiators.

What can you do to avoid overweighting vivid information in negotiations? In addition to anticipating the vividness bias, here are two strategies that will help you overcome it:

1: Create a scoring system.  

In Chapter 2, we described the process of creating a scoring system and explained how to use one to evaluate offers and structure appropriate counteroffers. A scoring system can also help defend against the vividness bias by keeping you focused on your true interests. If you cross-check your reactions and strategy against the content of your scoring system, you will avoid overweighting vivid issues in your decisions.

2: Separate information from influence. 

In Chapter 1, we introduced the importance of separating information from influence; we revisit this principle here, as it can help you overcome the vividness bias. Consider the fact that the same salesperson who convinces you of a car’s reliability by showing you its rating in Car and Driver can also convince you to purchase an expensive extended warranty for the same car by vividly describing the horrors of high repair costs that were once incurred by someone just like you. Though contradictory, these two pieces of information can both influence you in ways that benefit the salesperson. Given that nearly 50 percent of new-car buyers purchase these (typically overpriced) extended warranties, it seems that many people do not try to reconcile the contradiction; instead, they fall prey to the power of vividness. When faced with a tough decision, negotiation geniuses remember to ask themselves these critical questions: Is this information valuable? Have I learned something new? Am I just being influenced to act in a certain way because of how this information was presented?

3: NONRATIONAL ESCALATION OF COMMITMENT 

Imagine that you are attending an executive class on negotiation with many other experienced managers. The professor takes a $100 bill out of his pocket and announces the following:

I am about to auction off this $100 bill. You are free to participate or just watch the bidding of others. Bidding will start at $5, and people will be invited to call out bids in multiples of $5 until no further bidding occurs, at which point the highest bidder will pay the amount bid and win the $100. The only feature that distinguishes this auction from traditional auctions is a rule that the second highest bidder must also pay the amount that he or she bids, although he or she will obviously not win the $100. For example, if Maria bids $15 and Jamaal bids $20, and the bidding stops, Jamaal will get $80 (the $100 he wins minus the $20 he bid) and Maria, the second-highest bidder, will pay me $15 (the amount she bid). Now, what would be your strategy? Would you bid in the auction? 

Max has run this auction dozens of times, and previously ran similar $20 auctions hundreds of times. The typical outcome: Max wins lots of money.

Here’s how it happens. The bidding starts out enthusiastically. At around $60–$80, everyone except the two highest bidders usually drops out of the auction. The two bidders then begin to feel the tension. Suppose that one bidder has bid $70 and the other has bid $75. The $70 bidder must either bid $80 or stop bidding and suffer a sure loss of $70 (which he must pay as the second-highest bidder). The uncertainty associated with bidding further seems more attractive than the certain loss, so the $70 bidder bids $80, and the bids continue until they reach $95 and then $100. The room grows quiet as the class focuses on the $95 bidder, who must decide whether to accept a $95 loss or continue bidding past $100 in hopes that the other party will quit first. The class laughs as the $95 bidder inevitably bids $105. Bidding in this auction typically ends somewhere between $100 and $1,000.

Why do people start bidding in this auction? Clearly, it is because they are attracted by the possibility of winning and making money. But why do they continue to bid past $100? Because they are trapped—strategically and psychologically. Strategically, once an individual has entered the $100 auction and is among the final two bidders, it takes only a small additional bid to stay in the auction rather than quit—and it seems reasonable to do so. After all, one more bid may be all that is needed to get the other party to quit first. But if both bidders pursue this seemingly rational strategy, the bidding can increase to extremely high levels, with disastrous results for both parties. Strategy is not the only pitfall in the $100 auction—nor in the countless other negotiations, disputes, and conflicts where individuals, firms, and nations escalate their commitment to a failing course of action. Research on the nonrational escalation of commitment reveals that negotiators have a strong psychological need to justify (to themselves and to others) their prior decisions and behaviors. It is often difficult for negotiators to admit that their initial strategy was ill conceived or that they may have made a mistake; to avoid acknowledging these facts, they will escalate their commitment even when it is extremely costly, and perhaps disastrous, to do so. Deepak and his colleagues have demonstrated that emotion can compound the escalation problem.12 Their research on competitive arousal reveals that interactions that heighten feelings of rivalry can create in negotiators the desire to “win at any cost.” Of course, as in the $100 auction, “winning” and “making money” may not be the same thing; if bidding continues past $100, even the “winner” loses!

How can you avoid escalating in the heat of battle? Here are three ideas to consider.

1: Start your negotiation with a preplanned exit strategy. 

In the $100 auction, since neither party knows when the other party will quit, it is difficult to conclude that bidding “just once more” is clearly a bad decision. Unfortunately, this is a slippery slope—whether for bidders participating in the $100 auction, disputants pursuing litigation, or nations whose presidents have committed them to war. This is why it is important to decide in advance the point at which you will cut your losses and stop bidding, litigating, or fighting, should the situation spiral out of control. Of course, this limit should be adjusted as events unfold if you obtain new information relevant to your strategy (e.g., if you learn that the other side has run out of money).

2: Assign and reward a “devil’s advocate” whose job it is to criticize your decisions and find faults in your logic. 

Whom should you pick for this task? The person should have the following three characteristics: they should be trustworthy, they should not have invested in or helped to design the initial strategy, and they should have no conflict of interest regarding the final outcome. In negotiation, it is tempting to surround yourself with like-minded, supportive people who will be easy to deal with and who will boost your confidence. However, when it comes to dealing with the dangerous effects of escalation, you do not need confidence, but rather clarity of thought and good judgment. Since it is not always possible to keep your wits about you, it is a good idea to have someone close at hand whose unbiased judgment you trust.

3: Anticipate and prepare for the escalation forces you are likely to encounter. 

For example, if you are concerned about the need to justify your initial decisions to constituents, you might refrain from committing publicly to a specific course of action. Or if you think that personal animosity is likely to fuel your desire to escalate conflict, it may be better to let others in your team or organization (who are less personally invested) take over substantive negotiations when emotions are running high.

In the context of escalation, then, negotiation genius means a number of things: learning to identify competitive traps, understanding the causes and consequences of escalation, and preparing in advance to “de-escalate” or cut your losses as necessary. By understanding how escalation of commitment works, you will not only avoid expensive mistakes, but be better equipped to anticipate the potentially irrational behavior of your opponents.

4: SUSCEPTIBILITY TO FRAMING 

Consider the choices presented in the “Asian Disease Problem,” first discussed by Amos Tversky and Daniel Kahneman:

Imagine that the United States is preparing for the outbreak of an unusual Asian disease that is expected to kill six hundred people.

Two alternative programs to combat the disease have been proposed. Assume that the exact scientific estimates of the consequences of the programs are as follows. Which of the two programs would you favor?

Program A: If Program A is adopted, two hundred people will be saved.
Program B: If Program B is adopted, there is a one-third probability that six hundred people will be saved and a two-thirds probability that no people will be saved.

Before reading further, choose whether you would prefer to implement Program A or B. Now, for the same problem, decide which of the following two options you would favor:

Program C: If Program C is adopted, four hundred people will die.
Program D: If Program D is adopted, there is a one-third probability that no one will die and a two-thirds probability that six hundred people will die.

If you read carefully, you will discover that Program A and Program C are identical: both result in two hundred lives saved and four hundred lives lost. Program B and Program D are also identical: both lead to a one-third probability of saving everyone and a two-thirds probability of losing everyone. In other words, if people prefer Program A to Program B, then they should also (obviously) prefer Program C to Program D. As it turns out, this is not how people respond. When different groups are given these two sets of options, Program A is favored over Program B (by 72 percent of respondents in Tversky and Kahneman’s initial research), but Program D is favored over Program C (by 78 percent of respondents). Why are people so inconsistent in their preferences?

It turns out that the critical factor is how the options are framed. The two sets of options are identical, but changing the description from “lives saved” to “lives lost” makes people think very differently. Even when the expected values are similar, we tend to be risk averse when thinking about potential gains and risk seeking when thinking about potential losses. In other words, we want the “sure thing” when we have something to gain, but want “all or nothing” when we have something to lose. This is why people choose the less risky program (saving two hundred people with certainty) when thinking about lives saved and the more risky program (saving six hundred people but with only one-third probability) when thinking about lives lost. This problem illustrates the power of framing.

Research on framing effects reveals that most of us will treat risks involving perceived gains (e.g., profits) differently from risks involving perceived losses (e.g., losing a court settlement). This way of thinking can powerfully affect our negotiation behavior. For example, we are much more likely to make concessions and try to compromise when we are negotiating over how to allocate gains (profits, rewards, bonuses, windfalls, et cetera), but more likely to be inflexible and risk reaching an impasse when we are negotiating over how to allocate losses (costs, penalties, and so on). We are also more likely to quit negotiating in favor of the risky path of litigation when involved in a dispute over who is responsible for assuming costs, losses, and liabilities than when the dispute concerns the share of profit that each side is entitled to receive.

Now imagine the following scenario. You have just arrived at a casino and are sitting down to play blackjack. How likely are you to make a $100 bet? Now imagine that you have been playing blackjack for an hour and are already down $600. How likely are you to make a $100 bet? It turns out that people are more willing to take a risk (gambling $100) when they are already in the domain of losses (down $600). Losing your first $100 is much more painful than losing the seventh or even the second $100. Once you are a “loser,” you won’t mind digging yourself into a bigger hole (i.e., losing even more) as long as there is some possibility of digging yourself out entirely.

Now imagine that you have already lost $600—but not at the casino. Instead, the stock market took a slight hit earlier in the week and your investment portfolio lost $600 in value. How will you behave that night at the blackjack table? It turns out you will not want to take the same risks that you took after losing $600 at the casino. In other words, the question is not whether or not you are a loser, but whether or not you feel like a loser in the current situation. Whether or not you feel like a loser depends on your reference point—the comparisons you make to other potential outcomes. If you are comparing your current situation to how much money you had in your pocket when you walked into the casino, you will behave differently than if your reference point is your overall wealth level.

This finding suggests some advice for gamblers: You will take less dangerous risks if you acquire the mental habit of constantly readjusting your reference point. When you’re thinking about when to leave the casino and go home, recall your previously set gambling limit for the night. However, when you are deciding how much to stake on any given bet, think of your current bet as your first bet of the night; remind yourself that the money you lost earlier in the night will not (hopefully!) affect your overall wealth—so it’s silly to think of yourself as being “in the hole.”

The effect of reference points is even more critical for negotiators to understand. In a negotiation, you are not the only one who can manipulate reference points—the other side can, too. If you entered a negotiation imagining that you would extract millions of dollars from the deal, but now it looks as if the ZOPA is much smaller (and you stand to gain only thousands), you may find yourself adopting a loss frame that makes you risk seeking! You may become more aggressive, more likely to issue an ultimatum, and more willing to walk away from the deal. If, instead, you came in expecting to make very little, you will be pleasantly surprised and will adopt a gain frame that makes you risk averse. You will probably become more conciliatory, make less aggressive demands, and be less willing to risk an impasse. Clearly, the two frames lead to very different behaviors—but should they? The value of the deal hasn’t changed across these situations. Your strategy shouldn’t, either.

Understanding the effects of framing and reference points can help you anticipate their powerful consequences and strategize accordingly. In particular, we recommend the following steps:

1. Consider the various reference points that you could be using to evaluate the situation—including the status quo, your aspirations, your expectations, your feared outcome, and so on—and then pick the one that seems most appropriate.

2. Evaluate whether your strategy would still make sense if you were to use a different reference point.

3. Anytime you are considering the use of a risky strategy (such as making an ultimatum or pursuing litigation), think about whether this strategy still makes sense if you change the frame.

CHAPTER 5: When Rationality Fails: Biases of the Heart 

A few years ago in Manhattan, a dispute arose between residents of one co-op apartment unit and the building’s co-op board. The dispute was over $909. This is the amount that the unit’s residents had spent to install window bars to childproof their apartment. The problem? It was unclear who should be responsible for footing the bill. The residents of the unit argued that the building as a whole should pay for the window bars because this was a safety and liability issue. The co-op board argued that, because the unit’s residents were the only ones who wanted the window bars, they should cover the costs. The dispute escalated and eventually ended up in court.

One year later, the two sides’ combined legal bills exceeded $1,000. This might have been a good time for them to end litigation and to negotiate instead. Yet the parties, both convinced that they would win, continued to litigate.

Another year passed. Now their combined legal bills exceeded $10,000—but the disputants were still unwilling to settle out of court. Their conflict was no longer about the money; it was about the justice that each side felt it deserved.

Finally, the co-op board won the court battle. The residents had to pay for the $909 window bars.

Normally, this would be cause for the triumphant party to celebrate. Unfortunately, the ruling came after the litigants had spent close to $20,000 in combined legal costs.

That’s bad. But it gets worse.

The unit’s residents decided to appeal the ruling. The two sides then spent an additional $30,000 on litigation. Ultimately, the appellate court upheld the initial ruling. Now close to $50,000 had been spent on a dispute over $909.

That’s really bad. But it gets worse yet.

The co-op board then sued the unit’s residents to force them to pay the co-op board’s legal fees. The ensuing litigation cost the two parties an additional $50,000. Finally, a judge threw the litigants out of court; the unit’s residents were forced to pay some (but not most) of the co-op board’s legal fees.

The final tally: the window bars dispute, which started with a $909 claim, lasted six years and cost more than $100,000 to resolve.

Not all negotiation errors result from the cognitive biases we discussed in the previous chapter.

Emotions can be just as powerful in derailing agreements. Compounding the problem, we humanbeings are motivated to see ourselves as fairer, kinder, more competent, more generous, more deserving, and more likely to succeed than others. The result of these motivational biases? We tend to make judgments and decisions that are not optimal. In this chapter, we explore a number of motivational biases and their effects on negotiation strategy and outcomes: the problem of conflicting motivations, egocentrism, overconfidence, irrational optimism, the illusion of superiority, selfserving attributions, and regret aversion.

1: THE PROBLEM OF CONFLICTING MOTIVATIONS 

Economist Thomas Schelling argued that each individual behaves like two people: “one who wants clear lungs and long life and another who adores tobacco, or one who wants a lean body and another who wants dessert.” People often face internal negotiations between doing what they want to do versus doing what they think they should do. Too often, the want-self dominates the should-self in important real-world negotiations, leading to behavior and outcomes that you later regret. What can be done?

Many negotiation teachers, executives, and other professionals believe that you need to control your want-self in order to maximize your long-term benefits. According to this view, the should-self is more trustworthy than the want-self, and is better at gauging what is best for you.

There is a contrary view. Behavioral decision researcher George Loewenstein argues that gut-level impulsive responses—the responses of the want-self—are ignored at our peril. “Hunger signals the need for nutritional input,” Loewenstein writes, “pain indicates the impingement of some type of potentially harmful environmental factors, and emotions serve a range of interrupting, prioritizing, and energizing functions.”

Loewenstein argues that visceral reactions make us aware of issues that we care a great deal about, but that we tend to suppress these reactions because of the desire to be responsible, to be mature, or to otherwise conform to society.

These divergent perspectives simply highlight our dilemma: People who never control their want-selves engage in shortsighted behavior that often creates enormous long-term problems. Conversely, those who always listen to their should-selves ignore the potentially important signals being sent from their want-selves.

Our advice: it is critical for negotiators to anticipate and resolve the conflict between what they want to do versus what they think they should do in advance of an actual negotiation. You will find that your should-self and your want-self are in agreement both before and after the negotiation. The problem only arises during the negotiation; in the heat of the moment, you face strong emotional desires to satisfy your want-self in ways that are inconsistent with what you believe you should do.

Luckily, you can often predict the impulsive demands of your want-self and plan accordingly. For example, you might anticipate that the other side will make you angry, that you will want to say yes to an offer immediately, or that you will be tempted to behave shortsightedly. The better prepared you are for a negotiation, the less likely is it that you will act on emotional impulses in a way that scuttles your real interests. Thus, once again, we see that preparation is the key to negotiation success. Think back to the co-op building’s window-bars dispute. What could the disputants have done to resolve the conflict between their desire to “win” through litigation and their desire to minimize economic loss? One smart idea would have been for each disputant to decide, in advance, how much money and time each was willing to spend to try to win the case. If they reached the preset limit, they would end litigation and simply pay for the window bars on their own. It is unlikely that either side would have been willing to budget tens of thousands of dollars on this dispute before the conflict began to escalate. Thus, the pre-negotiation agreement between each side’s want-self and should-self would have likely saved thousands of dollars.

The parties could have also agreed to a one-day arbitration session without attorneys (and to the provision that both sides would give up their rights to appeal the decision). This way, each side could be heard, and each could receive a decision from a neutral party—but without the costs and complexity of the courts.

Yet another way to cope with conflicting internal preferences would be for each party to hand over control of the negotiation process to someone who is less emotionally involved. For example, the coop residents might have asked a relative to make key decisions regarding whether to hire lawyers, whether to appeal the decision, how much to spend on litigation, and so on. Similarly, the residents of the building would have been better served if non–board members (or board members who were not involved in the initial dispute) were asked to take control of the situation once it had spiraled out of control. This strategy is akin to that used by Ulysses: by giving up your ability to pursue what you want, you can ensure that you will do what you should. (This also explains why keeping little or no junk food in the house may be a good idea for some people who are trying to lose weight. Often, when temptation strikes, the only way to keep yourself from eating what you want is to make it unavailable.)

2: EGOCENTRISM 

Consider these results of a survey conducted by U.S. News & World Report:

• Question: “If someone sues you and you win the case, should he pay your legal costs?”
Percentage of respondents who answered yes: 85 percent

• Question: “If you sue someone and lose the case, should you pay his costs?”
Percentage of respondents who answered yes: 44 percent

What is going on here?
It is hard for any of us to escape egocentrism, or the tendency for our perceptions and expectations to be biased in our favor.

While many of us want to be fair, even well-intentioned people can act in seemingly unethical ways when we are motivated to claim more than we deserve. This doesn’t make us bad, but merely human —and humans make biased judgments. By understanding the egocentrism bias and trying to correct it in our own behavior, we can move from wanting to be fair to actually being fair, and in doing so, make it less likely that we will initiate or escalate disputes and disagreements.

How might we overcome our egocentrism? Negotiation geniuses do so by following the advice of the philosopher John Rawls, who recommends that when you are trying to assess what is fair (regarding allocations, contributions, claiming value, et cetera), try doing so under the “veil of ignorance.” That is, try to imagine what you would believe to be fair if you did not know your role in a given negotiation or dispute.11 In other words, what would you believe or decide to be fair if you did not yet know whom you represented in the dispute? By overcoming our own egocentrism in this way, we eliminate a source of conflict in our negotiations. And by understanding the potential for this bias in the behavior of others, we can make more sympathetic and accurate attributions of their intentions.

3: OVERCONFIDENCE, IRRATIONAL OPTIMISM, AND THE ILLUSION OF SUPERIORITY 

In her research, psychologist Shelley Taylor of UCLA has demonstrated that students have unrealistic expectations about their likelihood of graduating at the top of the class, getting a good job, obtaining a high salary, enjoying their first job, getting written up in the newspaper, and giving birth to a gifted child. They also assume that they are less likely than their classmates to become alcoholics, be fired, divorce, become depressed, or suffer physical problems. Confidence in our negotiation ability tends to be similarly inflated: Rod Kramer of the Stanford Business School found that 68 percent of the MBA students in his negotiation class predicted that their bargaining outcomes would fall in the upper 25 percent of the class. These MBA students also had positive, distorted expectations regarding their ability to learn more than their peers and add more to the class experience. More generally, overconfidence in our abilities and irrational optimism regarding our fate lead most of us to believe that our futures will be better and brighter than those of other people.

Why is this a problem? When a football team is running a play, it helps if the quarterback has as much confidence as possible. Similarly, when a salesperson is selling a product, it helps if she believes that the product is fantastic. Indeed, many social psychologists view positive illusions regarding our abilities and our future as evolutionarily adaptive. According to this view, these illusions contribute to our psychological and material well-being by protecting our self-esteem and helping us persevere when faced with difficult tasks. In addition, overconfidence and irrational optimism can help us cope with negative life events. Undoubtedly, they also help to motivate the kind of risk-taking that creates entrepreneurs. Psychologist Martin Seligman goes as far as to recommend that firms base their selection of salespeople on the magnitude of their positive illusions—what he calls learned optimism.

However, we take a contrarian position when it comes to negotiation. Overconfidence may help the quarterback execute a practiced play and the salesperson deliver a rehearsed pitch, but when you are making decisions, including decisions about your negotiation strategy, you need to take off the rose tinted glasses. Unrealistic optimism can lead you to turn down the best job offer that you are likely to receive, reject an offer on your house when no better offer is forthcoming, and to hold out for contract terms that your counterpart is unlikely to accept. Overoptimistic negotiators are also likely to enter into negotiations with only one strategy for reaching agreement or resolving the dispute; they assume that their negotiation plan will work, and they devote all of their energy to developing and executing this one strategy. A more realistic negotiator realizes that an initial strategy may not work and is ready with a contingency plan.

We can also see the effects of overconfidence and irrational optimism away from the negotiating table. Too many people invest their life savings in new businesses that have little chance of success. Too many employees assume that they are indispensable to their organization, and are caught off guard when they are laid off or fired. Others apply for too few jobs because they believe falsely—and contrary to all available objective evidence—that they are great potential hires. And far too many people take their disputes to court, believing falsely that they have an airtight case—or at least a “very strong” case—a belief that many lawyers are more than happy to help you maintain. Would the litigants in the co-op dispute over window bars have been so willing to go to court if they had accurate, objective assessments of their likelihood of prevailing, of the costs associated with litigation, and of the time it would take to complete the process? Not likely.

Why, then, are positive illusions useful for quarterbacks and salespeople? Because, unlike negotiators, they are not making decisions so much as they are implementing decisions that have already been made. Overconfidence and irrational optimism may well provide them with the motivation and inspiration they need to improve their performance—at relatively low cost. But such illusions are extremely costly for negotiators, who must make decisions constantly—before, during, and after the negotiation. Negotiators not only see their future prospects as better than they actually are, they also see themselves as better than a realistic assessment would suggest. This illusion of superiority leads people to view themselves as more flexible, competent, rational, honest, fair, and cooperative than their opponents.16 One unfortunate result of this illusion of superiority is that far too many mediocre negotiators do not recognize the need to improve their inferior negotiation skills. Interestingly, the illusion of superiority not only affects our self-judgments, but also our judgments regarding the groups to which we belong. We tend to view members of our group—whether our country, our firm, our department, or our family—as more honest, cooperative, trustworthy, diligent, and industrious than members of other groups. If we believe that our fellow group members are above average, then how do we view our adversaries and opponents? In independent studies, management researchers Kristina Diekmann and Ann Tenbrunsel found that while MBA students rate themselves above the mean of their class on a variety of positive attributes, they rate their negotiation opponents below the mean.

The tendency to denigrate our opponents and adversaries can be quite detrimental to negotiation success. If you view your opponent as uncooperative, unfair, or untrustworthy, you are less likely to share information with them—and hence less likely to create value. In addition, negotiators who think they are smarter, better prepared, or more honest than others often devalue or ignore the ideas and proposals of their counterparts. Doing so can decrease the likelihood of reaching efficient agreements and increase the likelihood of conflict.

4: SELF-SERVING ATTRIBUTIONS

Egocentrism, overconfidence, irrational optimism, and the illusion of superiority exist because we are motivated to see the world and ourselves in a positive light. But why do such biases persist? Why don’t we learn from our experience and adjust our beliefs about our contributions, our abilities, and our likelihood of success? The answer is that, even as we try to learn from our experiences, we tend to evaluate the past in self-protective ways: the stories we tell ourselves, and the attributions that we make about ourselves and others, are the kind that will keep us feeling good about ourselves.

John F. Kennedy once said, “Victory has a thousand fathers, but defeat is an orphan.” This is certainly true of negotiators: we are quick to take credit for success and deny responsibility for failures. When negotiators are asked to explain their successful results, they usually give personalized internal reasons—e.g., the skill, perseverance, or creativity with which they handled the situation. In contrast, when asked about a failure, most negotiators cite external reasons: the difficult context in which they were negotiating, the incompetence of the other side, or plain bad luck. One serious problem with this tendency is that external attributions for failure inhibit learning from experience. 

This self-serving attitude can also be triggered when our “in-group” negotiates with an “outgroup.” For example, when two firms meet to negotiate the terms of a deal, both sides will inevitably need to make concessions. When our firm (the in-group) makes a concession, it is because we are being generous or because we are smart enough to understand the need for logrolling. When the other side (the out-group) makes a concession, it is because they have seen the wisdom of our argument or because they have no other choice!

Why is this problematic? Because when we attribute the cooperation of others to the constraints of the situation (e.g., their legal obligations or the mandates of a contract), rather than to their goodwill or integrity, it becomes difficult to build trust. To build trust, negotiators need to see the cooperative actions of others as behaviors that they have chosen, not behaviors that they were unable to avoid. And, in the absence of trust, negotiators become reluctant to make concessions, share information, or take the risks inherent in building mutually rewarding relationships.

Negotiation geniuses understand the value of building trust with their negotiation partners, even in competitive or adversarial environments, and so seek to accurately gauge the reasons for others’ behavior. Negotiation geniuses understand that mistaking a kind gesture for weakness is no more helpful than mistaking miscommunication for malice. And so they take the time necessary to understand the behavior of others before they react.

5: REGRET AVERSION 

Imagine that you are an Olympic athlete. Which would you rather win: a silver medal or a bronze medal? Few people (if any) would prefer a bronze.

Now, which medal makes actual Olympic athletes happier, silver or bronze? As it turns out, Olympians are happier when they win bronze than when they win silver! Three clever psychologists, Vicki Medvec, Scott Madey, and Tom Gilovich demonstrated this phenomenon by having viewers watch video footage of various Olympic athletes as they received their medals. The viewers were then asked to rate the facial expressions of the athletes. Because sound was eliminated from the footage and the medals were not shown, viewers could not know which medal had been presented. The result? Bronze-medal winners appeared much happier to the viewers than did silver-medal winners. Why might this be?

Once again, we see the power of reference points, or the comparisons we make to other potential outcomes that are salient to us. And what could be more salient than the “what-might-have-been” scenario? It seems that bronze-medal winners—who were close to winning no medal at all—are thrilled simply to be medal winners. Meanwhile, silver-medal winners—who were close to winning the gold—are disappointed not to have come in first. Objectively, they have achieved more, but they experience greater regret.

Because regret is such a painful psychological state, people try to avoid situations that might cause it. If you got a B+ in class and you could not change your grade through negotiation, would you really want to know how many points you were shy of receiving an A? If you were on a game show and failed to win the grand prize, would you really want to know what that prize would have been? If you were bidding in a sealed-bid auction, would you rather find out that you were the second-highest bidder (and almost won) or that you were the fifth-highest bidder (and were not close to winning)? In negotiation, would you want to accept an offer that you might later find out was not the best one you could have received? In fact, research shows that negotiators often contort their decisions to avoid facing any clear evidence that would cause regret. Furthermore, we tend to feel greater regret about acts of commission (what we did do) than about acts of omission (what we did not do).

This desire to avoid regretful decisions can induce negotiators to hold out longer—and for more— than they reasonably should. Again, consider the litigants in the co-op dispute. After having spent thousands of dollars, they would almost certainly view the decision to end litigation (and pay for the window bars) with a high degree of regret. “What might have happened if I’d persevered just a little longer?” they are likely to wonder. If “what might have been” will actually be revealed in the future, our decisions often become even more geared toward avoiding regret. For example, the seller of a house may reject reasonable offers in the belief that prices in the area could go up after the sale. Likewise, an investor may hold on to a seemingly weak stock too long out of fear that the stock price will go up shortly after he places his “sell” order.

Too many negotiators place too much emphasis on what might have been. The fact is, uncertainty is a fact of life; in hindsight, we will often see results that we could not have predicted in advance. While such hindsight can drive us crazy, the solution is not to ignore it. The way to leverage hindsight —without overemphasizing it—is to focus on what can be learned from the past about how to make better negotiation decisions in the future. If thinking about "what might have been" helps us improve our future negotiation behaviors, we should analyze the past carefully. If our regrets could only have been avoided with a crystal ball, then we should remind ourselves that if we make good decisions most of the time, our net outcomes in life will be good as well.

CHAPTER 6: Negotiating Rationally in an Irrational World 

CONFRONTING YOUR OWN BIASES 
Three powerful strategies can help you confront and manage your own biases in negotiation: using “System 2” thinking, applying analogical reasoning, and adopting the “outsider” lens.

STRATEGY 1: USE “SYSTEM 2” THINKING 

What accounts for the difference between the times when we are susceptible to cognitive and motivational biases and the times when we think and behave rationally? One important answer lies in the distinction between “System 1” and “System 2” thinking, as proposed by researchers Keith Stanovich and R. F. West. System 1, which corresponds to intuition, is typically fast, automatic, effortless, implicit, and emotional; we make most decisions in life using System 1 thinking. The biases described in Chapters 4 and 5 are also much more common when we are using System 1. By contrast, System 2 corresponds to reasoned thought and is slower, conscious, effortful, explicit, and logical. When we are facing time pressures, we are more likely to use System 1. In other words, busy professionals are likely to rely on System 1 thinking most of the time—and more often than they should.

This does not mean that a full System 2 process is necessary for every decision that you make. If you are buying groceries in the supermarket, responding to unimportant e-mails, or driving to work, System 1 will suit you fine. Ideally, however, System 2 thinking should influence your most important decisions and negotiations. (Of course, in the early stages of practicing to become a negotiation genius, it might be useful to stay in System 2 for even more mundane negotiations.) As a negotiator, you need to learn to identify situations in which you should move from the intuitively compelling System 1 to the more logical System 2. How can you do this?

The following negotiation techniques can help facilitate System 2 thinking in an otherwise System 1 world:

1. Make a System 2 list. 
At the beginning of each month or year, make a list of all of the upcoming negotiations that you think should be subject to System 2 thinking. These might be negotiations in which you are dealing with high stakes, complex issues, multiple parties, high-priority clients, or high degrees of uncertainty. Having planned in advance to be more prepared for and engaged in these negotiations will help you to allocate your time more appropriately. It will also help you think more carefully about when you should schedule these negotiations and will remind you to actively participate in the pre-negotiation discussions that will set the agenda for substantive negotiations; there is nothing worse than having a negotiation thrust upon you when you are not ready for it.

2. Avoid negotiating under time pressure. 

System 1 thinking takes over when we have little time and are feeling rushed. Smart negotiators anticipate this problem and avoid negotiating under time pressure, or at least recognize when the pressure is real versus when it is artificially created as a negotiation tactic. To avoid time pressure, instead of negotiating during a one-hour lunch, set aside an entire afternoon. If someone initiates substantive discussions with an unexpected phone call or visit, and you are unprepared, politely ask to reschedule the conversation for a later time or date. Some negotiators are extremely fond of forcing others to negotiate, make commitments, or respond to requests under immense time pressure. Unfortunately, many people fall prey to this tactic because they are worried about losing the deal or offending the other party. How should you respond to such tactics? In the vast majority of cases, there is little reason not to postpone your negotiation or decision —at least for a little while. Unless the other party has given you specific, credible information that time truly is of the essence, you should avoid giving in to their pressure tactics. This comes back to the principle (discussed in Chapter 1) of separating information from influence. For example, if a potential employer extends you a job offer and tells you that “we will need your answer by Friday”— and this does not give you enough time to make a wise decision—it is okay to probe a bit and find out whether this is a serious ultimatum. After articulating your gratitude and enthusiasm for the opportunity to work for the company, you might add a query such as one of these:
• “Is this a firm deadline?”
• “If, for personal reasons, I needed more time to make this decision, what would be the process for doing so?”

3. Partition the negotiation across multiple sessions. 

You do not have to complete an entire negotiation in one session. No matter how prepared you are, in most complex negotiations you will encounter information, issues, and tactics that you did not anticipate. If you want to avoid falling back on System 1 thinking at such times, you will need to structure a process that allows you to rethink or re-strategize as needed. For example, you might schedule breaks every hour or two so that you can spend time evaluating and organizing everything that you heard that was unexpected. Or you might negotiate over multiple days, such that you exchange preliminary information over e-mail on Day 1, have an initial telephone discussion on Day 2, and set aside time on Days 3 and 4 for substantive negotiations. This will give you the time you need to apply System 2 thinking throughout the negotiation process.

STRATEGY 2: LEARN THROUGH THE USE OF ANALOGIES 

It is often said that we learn more from our mistakes and failures than we do from our successes. If this is true, then negotiators should be able to learn from the negative consequences of their decision biases and to adjust their subsequent behavior accordingly. However, it is often quite difficult for negotiators to learn from past mistakes; we tend to fall prey to the same biases time and time again.
Why? In the real world, where negotiation outcomes are determined by a host of factors, it can be difficult to assess whether a mistake was due to flawed strategy or to misfortune. Even if you acknowledge that your strategy was to blame, you may be uncertain which aspect of the strategy was flawed.
How, then, can negotiators maximize their learning from experience? People learn far more from an example, case study, exercise, or real-world experience when they are able to extract an abstract principle from it. In other words, it does negotiators little good if they are told in retrospect how they should have behaved in a specific situation they recently encountered, but it is very useful for them to discover what factors to consider when facing similar situations in the future. Because no two situations are identical, negotiators are better off extracting the correct principle from past experience rather than the correct answer. The key is to figure out how to draw principles out of experiences and examples.
One way to do this is to apply analogical reasoning—the conscious comparison of different situations on dimensions that are similar. Extensive research has shown the power of this approach.
In studies by psychologists Jeffrey Loewenstein, Leigh Thompson, and Dedre Gentner, participants were provided with summaries of two complex negotiation problems that had the same underlying lesson (i.e., the same type of solution to the negotiator’s problem). Half of the participants were asked to explain what lesson they had learned, one exercise at a time. The other half was asked how the two exercises were related and what lessons they had in common. Negotiators were much more able to draw out the critical lesson—and to overcome similar problems in their own subsequent negotiations—when they had been asked to compare the two exercises. In short, when we try to learn from one experience at a time, we too often focus on “surface” elements of the situation, whereas the process of comparing and contrasting different experiences helps us draw out similar “structural” elements.

How can you use analogical reasoning to your advantage in negotiation? Try the following techniques:

1. Debrief multiple negotiations simultaneously.  

Negotiation geniuses make it a habit to review important negotiations after they are completed. Better yet, you should review multiple negotiations at the same time. As you are doing this, ask yourself how the negotiations were similar and how they were different. Having other members of your team or organization help you to think critically about your experiences, strategies, and outcomes may be especially useful, because they will be able to weigh in with their own experiences as well.
When firms hire us to train their employees in negotiation, we often conduct a “group-debrief” exercise, in which we set up groups of four to six people. Each employee is asked to discuss a recent or current negotiation situation, then all members of the group try to extract important lessons and insights from the various experiences. This exercise is extremely effective at promoting learning because it encourages negotiators to make comparisons across negotiations and form analogies.

Focus on the principles, not particulars. 

When reviewing past negotiations, try to understand the structural and conceptual aspects of what occurred. Rather than focusing on the uniqueness of the specific negotiation situation, dissect your recent experience into elements that map onto the negotiation concepts described in this book. While all negotiations are unique, they all have BATNAs, reservation values, ZOPAs, underlying interests, information exchange, and so on.
Examining these concepts will help you better generalize learning from recently completed negotiations to the future.

STRATEGY 3: ADOPT THE OUTSIDER LENS 

Why are we so overconfident in our own judgments and abilities, but more accurate in our assessments of the likely success of others? Daniel Kahneman and Dan Lovallo explain this inconsistency by arguing that people make decisions using two different perspectives, or “lenses”: an insider lens and an outsider lens. A negotiator usually adopts the insider lens when making judgments while immersed in the context or situation. By contrast, we usually adopt the outsider lens when removed or detached from the situation. The outsider lens is the cleaner lens. Obviously, it is better to use the cleaner lens than the dirty one; unfortunately, the outsider lens is typically not the default option when we are engaged in negotiation or embroiled in conflict. Thus, a negotiator might well be aware that the time it takes to go from an initial sales pitch to a signed contract is six to twelve weeks, yet still believe that he can close the deal within three weeks. More dangerously, the negotiator is likely to continue being overconfident despite having been proven wrong in the past.
This is because the insider lens tends to focus on only the current situation, while the outsider lens is better at integrating information across multiple episodes.
Consider the case of homeowners negotiating with a contractor about building a new house. The homeowners know from their friends that such projects typically end up being 20–50 percent over budget and take much longer to complete than originally planned (the outsider view). Yet most homeowners believe that their experience will be different—that their home will be completed on time and close to the projected cost (the insider view). As a result of their poor planning, they end up needing to get last-minute financing for cost overruns, to give up features that they really wanted, and to scrounge for a place to live because the house is not yet ready for them to move in.

Nobel Laureate Kahneman tells his own story about the insider lens. Kahneman was working with a group of colleagues on defining a new curriculum and writing a book to encapsulate it. The curriculum team estimated that the project would take eighteen to thirty months to complete.
Kahneman approached a member of the team, a distinguished expert in curriculum design, and asked the following question: “We are surely not the only team to have tried to develop a curriculum for a new area of study. Please try to recall as many cases as you can. Think of them as they were in a stage comparable to ours at present. How long did it take them, from that point, to complete their project?”
Having adopted the outsider perspective, the curriculum design expert said that the minimum completion time was seven years and that 40 percent of the projects were never completed. In fact, it ended up taking Kahneman’s team eight years to finish the project! Surely, would-be entrepreneurs should decide whether to go into business using the outsider lens— with a realistic understanding of the risks involved—rather than using the more tempting insider lens.
Yet, in one study, more than 80 percent of entrepreneurs viewed their personal chances of success to be 70 percent or higher, and one-third of them described their success as certain. This is clearly the insider speaking. The outsider can easily find out that the five-year survival rate for new businesses is only about 33 percent! Why would smart and motivated individuals be willing to stake large sums of money, their reputations, and years of their lives on a decision made using the biased insider lens?
As we discussed in Chapter 5, people have a strong urge to see the world and themselves in a positive light, a tendency that can have powerful effects on decision-making.

The insider-outsider distinction leads us to another set of techniques that you can use to de-bias your judgment. Consider the following:

1. Bring in an outsider.  

When preparing for an important negotiation, bring an outsider to the preparation session. This may mean reaching out to experts within your firm, hiring a consultant with unique expertise, or talking to a friend. Remember that you are more likely to anticipate cost overruns when a friend is having her house built than when your own home is being built. When it comes to your own house, you anticipate that things will turn out better for you than a rational analysis would suggest. The same is true when you negotiate a deal. Others will see factors that you have ignored, weight negative information more appropriately than you do, and preserve an objective view of the situation in ways that are difficult for you to do.

2. Take the outsider perspective. 

It is often equally effective—and less costly—to ask yourself how you would assess a situation if you were not immersed in it. This might require you to think back to a time when someone else was faced with a similar situation or to collect data on what you can rationally expect in the current situation (e.g., data on industry averages). Or you might ask yourself this simple question: if someone I cared about asked me for advice in a negotiation such as this, what advice would I give?
Collectively, using System 2 thinking, applying analogical reasoning, and adopting the outsider lens are viable strategies for reducing the likelihood that decision biases will sabotage your next negotiation. If you are serious about becoming a negotiation genius, you must make the use of these strategies habitual. Too often, executives who attend negotiation courses (or read negotiation books) discover interesting ideas, but do not actually change their behavior. Gathering information is not enough. Real change requires you to “unfreeze” existing decision-making processes, understand the ideas and techniques that will help you make the desired change, and then “refreeze” the new ideas and techniques into your thoughts and behavior. In other words, you must become aware of biases, consider how to avoid or overcome them, and work hard to integrate new and more effective strategies into your habitual approach to negotiation.

CONFRONTING THE BIASES OF OTHERS

The biases that others bring to the table can have serious implications for your negotiated outcomes.
In the remainder of the chapter, we explore how to incorporate an understanding of the biases of others into your strategy, why and how to help others be less biased, why and how to adjust the information you receive from others, and how to respond to the other party’s decision biases through contracting.

STRATEGY 1: INCORPORATE THE CONSEQUENCES OF THEIR BIASES IN YOUR STRATEGY 

General managers of baseball teams spend a great deal of time deciding how to evaluate the talent they are considering acquiring and deciding with whom to negotiate a contract. Billy Beane, the general manager of the Oakland Athletics, found a way to do this better than anyone else—and succeeded in transforming his team from losers to winners. From 1999–2002, with a very limited budget, Beane led the Athletics to the second-best record in Major League Baseball (MLB). The team’s players earned, on average, less than a third of the amount earned by the New York Yankees.
Yet, during this four-year period, they still won more games than the Yankees.
How did Beane accomplish this amazing feat? By studying the mistakes of other baseball managers and, with the help of a recent Harvard economics graduate, Paul DePodesta, using this knowledge to develop wiser negotiation strategies. In his book Moneyball, Michael Lewis argues that other MLB managers were consistently guilty of three systematic mistakes that Beane and DePodesta were able to identify and exploit:

1) they overgeneralized from their personal experiences,
2) they were overly influenced by players’ recent performances, and
3) they were overly influenced by what they had personally seen, even though players’ multiyear records provided far better data.

In other words, most baseball managers were relying on System 1 thinking.

Beane and DePodesta decided instead to look at the hard data. They found that players drafted out of high school were much less likely to succeed than players drafted out of college. Yet baseball executives systematically overvalued high-school players and systematically undervalued college players. Armed with this knowledge, Beane stopped drafting players out of high school. In addition, Beane and DePodesta learned that certain players had a dramatically higher tendency than others to be “walked,” but that baseball professionals inappropriately undervalued this data.

At the simplest level, the success of Beane and DePodesta’s approach reveals that the use of systematic and rigorous analysis can be superior to the System 1 thinking on which many experienced negotiators rely. But much more was actually happening: Beane and DePodesta used their understanding of the decision biases of others to make trades with other teams. In doing so, they were able to get players who were more successful in exchange for players who would be less successful.

Thus, they combined their System 2 thinking with an understanding of the consequences of the other side’s System 1 thinking to make value-creating trades.

The lesson for negotiators? Use your System 2 thinking, but be ready to adapt to the other side’s System 1 mistakes. If someone is obsessed with selling his company at a certain price point (perhaps because a broker mentioned a high number, or because a sibling sold her company for that amount), recognize the vividness of that number to him. Then, rather than fight it, see if you can creatively meet this vivid need. How? Offer the desired number in exchange for concessions on other issues that you value highly. For example, you might have him throw in related real estate or accept better financing terms. Indeed, too many negotiators focus excessively on salient dollar figures. If the other side will accept “not a penny less than $40 million,” he may still accept $40 million paid to him over a very long period of time. When you start thinking about the decision biases of others, you can custom design negotiation strategies that adapt to their errors.

STRATEGY 2: HELP OTHERS BE LESS BIASED 

Our students often ask us, “Would you rather negotiate with a good negotiator or a bad negotiator?”
Our answer is simple: we’d rather negotiate with good negotiators; bad negotiators will usually just get in the way of good deals. Unfortunately, many people falsely assume that bargaining with an incompetent or irrational (i.e., biased) partner gives them a valuable competitive advantage. While this is sometimes true (as the Moneyball example shows), biased negotiators also have tremendous potential for entirely derailing the negotiation. For example, if your counterpart is overconfident, she might wait for deals that you can never give her. If he irrationally escalates commitment to a course of action, he may become overly competitive and unwilling to compromise. If she is afflicted with the fixed-pie bias, she may refuse to share information and thus eliminate opportunities to create value. In these cases, the other party’s biases hurt not only their own interests, but also yours.

For these reasons, it is often in your best interest to help your counterpart think more clearly. How can you promote careful, reasoned, and systematic thinking? Consider again that negotiators tend to be far more biased under time pressure than when they have time to think through a proposal or idea.
Thus, when you have provided the other side with an offer that you believe to be better than your competitor’s proposal, give him time to think it through rather than pushing for an immediate answer.
Under pressure, negotiators who are overconfident in their ability to get a better deal often say no when they should say yes. If you are confident that you are offering more than he can get elsewhere, you’d be wise to encourage him to explore alternatives and get back to you after comparing your offer with others.
Most of us also assume that we want the other side to be less prepared. However, ill-prepared negotiators typically want to bargain over one issue at a time and to withhold information. They are also less able than prepared negotiators to evaluate or propose multi-issue (package) deals. All of these behaviors inhibit value creation. When dealing with an ill-prepared negotiator, encourage her to think through the relative importance of each issue to her. In addition, take the lead in negotiating multiple issues simultaneously and in making package offers—and encourage her to do the same. It is also important that you clarify for her that you value some issues more than others and that you are happy to jointly explore mutually beneficial trade-offs.

Finally, the best thing you can do to help an ill-prepared negotiator (and to help yourself) is to encourage her to be more prepared. If the negotiation is not going smoothly, you might suggest that both parties would benefit from thinking more about the issues that have surfaced during the recent discussion. You might then create a time line with the other party that includes milestones that encourage preparation and the sharing of information. For example, you might agree that, after one week, each of you will send an e-mail that lists your top priorities and concerns; after three more days, one of you will be responsible for making an initial package proposal; then, after the other party has a few days to consider this proposal, both parties will meet for further substantive discussions.
While most people believe that giving the other party this much time to prepare is dangerous, a negotiation genius recognizes that your counterpart can only make wise trades, expand the pie, and accept your creative offers if she knows what she values—and that such knowledge requires preparation. So, the next time you run into a well-prepared negotiator, you should be encouraged about the potential to create an excellent agreement rather than nervous about being exploited or outperformed.

STRATEGY 3: CALIBRATE INFORMATION PROVIDED BY OTHERS 

Imagine that you are moving to a new city and that you have interviewed a number of real-estate agents about selling your current home. While you want your agent to be a good salesperson, you also want him or her to provide an accurate estimate of your house’s value. Unless you know how much your home will realistically sell for, you cannot be certain how expensive a home you can afford in your new location. Here is a dilemma that might arise. The agents know that you desire a high sales price and that providing you with a high estimate (within certain limits) will make you more likely to hire them. Unfortunately, the more inflated their estimates, the less accurate they could be, and the worse off you will be when assessing which new home to purchase.
How can you identify whether an agent is being overly optimistic and trying to pass on that optimism to you? Try this: instead of negotiating with one agent, ask four different agents for their opinions on the appropriate listing price. Then ask each agent to bring you computer printouts of the original listing prices of the last ten houses they sold as well as the final selling price of each of these ten homes. This is information that is readily available to them. (To verify the accuracy of the data they provide, you can even ask the agents to cross-check each other.) Armed with the agents’ recommendations for your home, and also the data on historic differences between their listing prices and sales prices, you are in a far better position to estimate the true worth of your own house. You also have the data you need to hire the best agent of the bunch—the one who is not only selling high, but also is more realistic (or more truthful).

The key lesson: thinking about the decision biases of others allows you to calibrate, quantitatively and qualitatively, the information, data, and arguments that you hear from them.

STRATEGY 4: USE CONTINGENCY CONTRACTS TO RESOLVE CONFLICTS STEMMING FROM BIASES 

“Curing” your negotiation counterpart’s biases is not always the answer. Your opponent may be extremely confident about his view of the future, while you are confident that he is wrong. Rather than arguing the point, it sometimes pays to leverage the other side’s biased expectations. How? Using a contingency contract. In Chapters 1 and 2, we discussed the use of contingency contracts, which allow both sides in a negotiation to bet on their beliefs about the future. When you know that the other side is biased, you can draft a contract that allows him to bet on the information that you believe to be inaccurate. In doing so, you make a bet that you expect to be favorable to you and costly to your counterpart.

PART III: NEGOTIATING IN THE REAL WORLD 
CHAPTER 7: Strategies of Influence 

Throughout the earlier chapters of this book, we have emphasized the need to understand the other side’s perspective. For example, the principles and strategies of investigative negotiation are critical because discovering the hidden interests, priorities, and constraints of the other side allows you to create and claim value more effectively. One of our fundamental messages is that negotiation success is typically more a function of how well we listen than how well we talk.

But that is not the whole story. When you are making a pitch, asking for concessions, or trying to amass support for your proposal, success also depends on your ability to “sell” your ideas, persuade reluctant opponents, and convince others regarding the merits of your case. These skills not only help you claim value for yourself, but also create value for both parties. One of the most common complaints of seasoned negotiators is that defensive, untrusting, or incompetent people can stymie even mutually beneficial ideas and proposals. Thus, would-be negotiation geniuses must find ways to overcome not only the reasonable objections of others, but also their close-mindedness.

In this chapter, we leverage some of the most fascinating current research on the psychology of influence and persuasion—including the pioneering work of renowned social psychologist Robert Cialdini —to develop strategies that will help you convince others to comply with your requests, proposals, and ideas. Note that these influence strategies are not designed to help you improve the merits of your proposal. Rather, they will increase the likelihood that others will say yes to your proposals without the need for you to improve them. Of course, you can also expect to be the target of influence tactics originating from the other side. This chapter provides numerous “defense strategies” for resisting their ploys, as well as a host of factors to consider before you say yes.

STRATEGY 1: HIGHLIGHT THEIR POTENTIAL LOSSES RATHER THAN THEIR POTENTIAL GAINS 

A representative from your local power company comes to your neighborhood offering free energy audits to homeowners. You agree to the audit, after which the representative advises you to invest in products and services that will help insulate your home and lower your energy costs. Will you say yes? As researchers at the University of Santa Cruz discovered, your answer probably depends on exactly how the pitch is made. In the Santa Cruz study, the representative told half of the homeowners the following: “If you insulate your home, you will save X cents per day.” (The value of X was determined by the audit.) For the other half of homeowners, the pitch was reversed: “If you fail to insulate your home, you will lose X cents per day.” Notice that the information content of these two statements is identical. However, those who were told how much they stood to lose by not complying with the recommendation were significantly more likely to purchase the insulation!

As this study illustrates, people are more motivated to avoid losses than they are to accrue gains, consistent with the principle of loss aversion.3 In other words, decision makers weigh information about potential losses more heavily than they do information about potential gains—even when the gains and losses are of equal magnitude. As a result, when you frame the exact same set of information as a loss, it will be more influential in negotiation than when you frame it as a gain.

Consider the following ways to leverage the power of loss aversion in negotiation:

• State your proposal in terms of what potential gains the other side stands to forgo if your idea or proposal is rejected, rather than on what he or she stands to gain by accepting.

• When holding an auction, tell bidders “you will miss out on the opportunity to have X if you do not increase your bid” rather than
“you will have the opportunity to get X if you increase your bid.”

• Point out that “the offer from our competitor does not give you X, Y, or Z,” instead of pointing out that “our offer gives you X, Y, and Z.”

In each of these cases, the information content of the proposal remains unchanged when you adopt a loss frame rather than a gain frame. The influence content, however, changes dramatically.

Once you are aware of the principle of loss aversion, you will start to notice how often the tactic crops up, not only in negotiations, but also in your life as a manager, consumer, and citizen. For example, when a consultant or a task-force representative tells you that “failure to implement these changes will result in a revenue loss of 1.5 percent,” you are at the receiving end of an influence strategy. Loss aversion is also one reason why negative political ads are so effective, even though everyone professes to hate them: when candidates warn you about the dangers associated with electing their opponent (rather than touting their own merits), they are leveraging this strategy.

Despite its power to motivate compliance with demands and proposals, we have one important caveat on the use of this strategy: an overreliance on loss frames can sour relationships. Those who focus only on risks, costs, losses, and downsides may be perceived as hostile, threatening, or simply unpleasant. These attributions can create barriers to negotiation if they induce the other party to retaliate in kind. Thus, your use of loss frames should be strategic and targeted, not pervasive. It may be best to reserve the use of loss frames for summarizing your argument, or making your “final pitch” statement, and to avoid negativity earlier in your presentation or discussion.

STRATEGY 2: DISAGGREGATE THEIR GAINS AND AGGREGATE THEIR LOSSES 

Which of these two situations would likely make you happier?

Scenario 1: You are walking down the street and find a $20 bill.
Scenario 2: You are walking down the street and find a $10 bill. The next day, as you are walking on a different street, you find another $10 bill.

Notice that the two scenarios have identical payoffs: both result in a $20 gain. However, the vast majority of people believe that they would be happier in Scenario 2. Why? Before we try to answer this, let’s consider another two scenarios.

Which of the following would make you unhappier?

Scenario X: You open your wallet and discover you have lost a $20 bill.
Scenario Y: You open your wallet and discover you have lost a $10 bill. The following day you lose another $10 bill.

Again, the scenarios are identical with regard to financial outcome. However, this time the vast majority of people claim that Scenario Y would make them unhappier.

As these two exercises demonstrate, people seem to prefer finding money in installments but losing money in one lump sum.7 In order to maximize pleasure, then, you should separate the total gain into lots of small wins (rather than one big win). Meanwhile, to minimize pain, you should put all of the losses together—this gives you only one loss to absorb.

Here are the implications of this finding for negotiators:

Disaggregate Their Gains:

• If you have the ability to make concessions, do not make them all at once. For example, if you can increase your offer by $100, break up this concession into smaller concessions that add up to $100 and distribute the smaller concessions individually. Your counterpart will evaluate this string of concessions more positively than one lump-sum concession.

• If you have good news to share, try to parcel the information into smaller “gems” that will give the other party more occasions to smile. For example, if you have completed a project under budget and also earlier than scheduled, do not share all of this good news with your client all at once. You will make your client happier if, one day, you tell her you have completed the project early, and on another day, you tell her you were also under budget.

• If you have benefits or rewards to offer, separate them into installments that you can make over time. For example, if you have been authorized to give an unsuspecting employee both a raise and a promotion, you will make the employee happier if you tell them about the raise today and about the promotion tomorrow.

Aggregate Their Losses:

• If you are requesting or demanding that the other side make concessions, make one comprehensive demand rather than several partial demands.
• If you have bad news to share, share it all at once.
• If you have costs or burdens to impose, combine them into one.

STRATEGY 3: EMPLOY THE “DOOR IN THE FACE” TECHNIQUE

Many salespeople swear by this old rule of thumb: “Keep them saying yes!” The theory behind this approach is that, as the seller in a negotiation, you should strive to keep the buyer in a positive, agreeable, and accommodating mood. After all, the longer she agrees with you, the more likely she is to believe that your interests are compatible with hers. There is also the issue of momentum to consider: you want to build momentum toward final acceptance of your demands—not ultimate rejection.

Like so many rules of thumb, this one is only partially true. In fact, one way to get the “yes” you want is to allow (or provoke) the other party to say “no” first. Consider some fascinating research conducted by Professor Robert Cialdini of Arizona State University. Cialdini’s research assistants went around the city posing as workers from the county juvenile detention center. They stopped people on the street at random and asked them for a favor: “Would you be willing to chaperone a group of juvenile delinquents on a day trip to the zoo?” As you might imagine, most people were taken aback by the extreme request, and only 17 percent said yes. The researchers then tried a different approach. This time when they stopped a person, they asked for an even greater favor:

“Would you be willing to serve as a counselor at the juvenile detention center? This will require two hours of your time each week for three years.” Not surprisingly, everyone turned down this request.

Without skipping a beat, the researchers then went on to ask: “Well, if you can’t do that, would you be willing to chaperone a group of juvenile delinquents on a day trip to the zoo?” The response was staggering. Now, 50 percent of those asked to chaperone agreed to comply! When the exact same proposal—a request to chaperone—was preceded by an extreme demand that was sure to be rejected, three times as many people said yes.

Why does compliance increase after an initial rejection? Because, according to Cialdini, when the person making the request moderates his demands (and asks for something less extreme), the other side views this as a concession that must be reciprocated.8 In other words, because the rejected party has “compromised” by asking for less, it is incumbent on the other side to “meet them halfway.”

Another factor is the contrast effect—our tendency to judge the size of something based on the context in which it is situated. Placed next to the request for a three-year investment of time, chaperoning a zoo trip does not seem like much to ask! Cialdini refers to this extreme-then-moderate approach as the “door in the face” (DITF) strategy, referring to the image of a salesperson having the door slammed in his face when he makes an outrageous request. Of course, in this case, the salesperson does not walk away after the door is slammed; instead, she makes a second, less outrageous request.

The negotiation implications of Cialdini’s study are obvious, and we’ve already covered some of them in our discussion of first offers and anchors in Chapter 1. Simply put, if you want something, ask for more than you want (or expect), and be prepared to make concessions. Unfortunately, negotiators often censor themselves, assuming that too aggressive an offer will be rejected—but as Cialdini’s research demonstrates, rejection is not necessarily a bad thing. There are, of course, some risks associated with making outrageous demands. Your counterpart might consider your request to be ignorant, crazy, or plain offensive (though the zoo-trip study suggests that you can sometimes get away with some fairly outrageous requests!). In Strategy 5, we will consider one powerful way to mitigate the possibility of offending the other party when you have made an extreme demand.


STRATEGY 4: EMPLOY THE “FOOT IN THE DOOR” TECHNIQUE

Consider the results of the following experiment. In a study conducted near a college campus, the bartender at a local bar identified a set of regular patrons and asked half of them to sign a petition against drunk driving. They all did so. The bartender did not approach the other half of the group with this request. Over the next six weeks, the bartender noted when any of the identified patrons became intoxicated. Then, as the inebriated patron prepared to leave the bar, the bartender made a second request: “May I call a taxi to take you home?” Among those who had not been asked to sign a petition, only 10 percent agreed to wait for the taxi. In contrast, 58 percent of those who had signed were willing to wait.

Why did more people agree to the more onerous request (wait for a taxi) after they had first complied with a less burdensome request (sign a petition)? Research suggests that once someone has agreed to an initial request, they are more psychologically committed to seeing the process through to its end. Thus, willingness to agree with one request leads to an increased commitment to agree with additional requests that naturally follow from the initial request. The critical factor here is the motivation that people have to justify past decisions and to preserve consistency between their statements and actions. Once someone has said yes to the bartender’s initial request, she is psychologically committed. She begins to see herself as someone who takes a stand against drunk driving. When confronted with the bartender’s second request, she may feel she has no choice but to comply; if she does not, it becomes difficult to justify her willingness to sign the petition in the first place.

This approach, which has been referred to as the “foot in the door” (FITD) strategy, may appear to contradict Cialdini’s “door in the face” strategy in which the more extreme request is made initially.

However, these strategies have different underlying mechanisms and objectives. DITF (aim for rejection, then moderate your demand) is appropriate (as in the zoo-trip study) when your goal is to make your key demand seem reasonable. The FITD (aim for compliance with a simple request, then increase your demands) is appropriate when you are in need of building commitment toward your key demand. 

For example, a car salesman may employ the DITF technique by showing a potential buyer a more expensive car first, even though he has already determined that the buyer is only considering the cheaper model. Because of the contrast effect, seeing the more expensive car first will make the price of the cheaper car seem reasonable. Later, during the same interaction, the salesman might also use the FITD technique. He can do this by asking the buyer to take the cheaper car for a test drive (a moderate request). Once the test drive is over, and the buyer has increased his commitment to the cheaper car, the salesman is in a better position to ask the buyer to purchase it (the more extreme request).

There is another important distinction between using the DITF and FITD strategies: When applying the DITF (extreme-then-moderate) strategy, try to make the moderate request very soon after the other side rejects your extreme request. Otherwise, the contrast effect diminishes and the moderate request is perceived not as a concession, but as an entirely different demand. The FITD (moderate-then-extreme) approach, in contrast, seems to work better when the extreme request is made after some time has passed since the moderate request was accepted (assuming the earlier agreement has not been forgotten). If the second demand is made too soon, there is less time for feelings of commitment to be processed; also, making a second demand right after the first may be seen as overly aggressive, pushy, or blatantly strategic.

STRATEGY 5: LEVERAGE THE POWER OF JUSTIFICATION

Harvard psychologist Ellen Langer and her colleagues set the stage for another fascinating study when they asked the university librarian to shut down all but one of the copy machines in the library.

As a result of this conspiracy, long lines began to form at the one remaining copy machine. The researchers were interested in finding out what would convince people who were in line to let others cut in front of them. In some instances, a researcher simply said, “Excuse me, I have five pages. May I use the Xerox machine?” Sixty percent of those approached this way allowed the researcher to cut in front of them. Other people were approached with a slightly different request: “Excuse me, I have five pages. May I use the Xerox machine because I have to make some copies?” As you can see, the second approach added an entirely inane justification (obviously, the reason for wanting to cut in line at a copy machine is to make copies!). What was the response this time? Ninety-three percent of those approached with this request allowed the researcher to cut in front of them!11

As these results suggest, even entirely frivolous justifications have the power to induce compliance. Why? Because human beings are “hardwired” to accommodate the (seemingly) legitimate demands and impositions of others because doing so allows us to build mutually rewarding relationships with them. In other words, we are willing to go the extra mile in order to help those who will become obligated to us, but not to help those who feel they can simply impose their will upon us and who may not ever reciprocate. And so, even though people tend to resist the demands you impose upon them, they are willing to lower their resistance and consider your demands if they feel that at least you think the demands are justified. To make these judgments, according to Langer and her colleagues, humans use heuristics, or simple “rules of thumb,” and even a simple signal such as the word “because” is often sufficient to win compliance. In the copy machine experiment, for example, the lack of substantive information following the “because” was less relevant than the word itself. How can negotiators use this insight? Here is one critical piece of advice, which we first shared in Chapter 1: refrain from making demands (especially aggressive offers) that will not fit into a sentence with approximately the following structure: “I am asking for X because…” In other words, if you can find some way to justify your position, that justification will probably increase the odds of compliance—or, at the very least, mitigate the risk that your demand will be perceived as illegitimate, unfounded, crazy, or offensive. Even if your goal is not to “sell” an extreme demand (as in the DITF technique), adding a justification can strengthen your case and make it less likely that the other side will simply walk away.

What are some potential justifications for your demands? Typically, many potential justifications exist, and negotiators must choose the one that best suits the desired outcome. The seller of a piece of real estate might try to maximize bids by citing the high sale prices of recent properties in the area, the above-average condition of the property being sold, or the optimistic projections of analysts regarding real-estate prices in the region. Meanwhile, a buyer might justify her low offer on the same piece of property based on the low recent valuation, the risk that current prices are inflated due to a nationwide real-estate bubble, or the low price of another property that she saw earlier that day.

As another example, consider the difference among the following three scripts that an employee might use in her attempt to negotiate a higher salary.

Offer A: “You had asked how much of a salary increase I feel that I deserve. I have thought about it, and I believe that a 10 percent raise would be fair.”

Offer B: “You had asked how much of a salary increase I feel that I deserve. I have thought about it, and I believe that a 10 percent raise would be fair because my performance over the last year has been exceptional.”

Offer C: “You had asked how much of a salary increase I feel that I deserve. I have thought about it, and I believe that a 10 percent raise would be fair because my performance over the last year has been exceptional. Here is some data on the revenues I have generated that support my claim.”

Offer B is clearly superior to Offer A because it provides a justification for the demand (a 10 percent increase in salary). However, Offer C represents the best approach: it provides a justification and follows that up with evidence to support this justification. There are potentially many ways to measure work performance, but by taking control of the discussion early on, you have an opportunity to define what is the appropriate measure. Offer C, then, includes a justification for the demand, but also frames the negotiation in a way that helps maximize the power of the justification. More generally, in negotiation, don’t let your offer “speak for itself” provide a justification for your demand and then tell a story that legitimizes your justification.

STRATEGY 6: LEVERAGE THE POWER OF SOCIAL PROOF
In recent years, “infomercials”—long advertisements that provide extensive information regarding the benefits, application, or celebrity use of a product—have become a hallmark of late-night television in the United States. At various points during the typical thirty-minute infomercial, the host will ask viewers to “call the number on the screen” to purchase the advertised product at discounted prices. Many of us have wondered what in the world would persuade someone to actually pick up the phone in the middle of the night to buy something like a self-cleaning oven mitt. Apparently, an infomercial writer named Colleen Szot spent a lot of time wondering the exact same thing. At one point, she decided to change the standard request that appeared in virtually all infomercials:
“Operators are standing by, please call now.” She simply changed three words in the statement: “If operators are busy, please call again.” What was the result? The number of calls skyrocketed!

Why? On the surface, both statements seem to convey identical information, and neither says anything about the product. But what message does each statement convey about the behavior of other viewers? The old message seems to suggest that very few (if any) people are calling and that the operators are simply waiting for the phone to ring. The second message, in contrast, suggests that the phones are ringing off the hook and that you may have to try calling multiple times because other people are buying this product. Psychologists refer to this phenomenon as the power of social proof.13 As every teenager knows, whenever there is uncertainty or ambiguity regarding the appropriate course of action, you should look to the behavior of similar others for guidance (“But, Mom, everybody’s doing it!”). As it turns out, teenagers are not the only ones who think this way. This is why bars and nightclubs maintain long lines outside the entrance even when the interior is almost empty (you would think they would prefer to sell alcohol to these people). It is also why television sitcoms use “laugh tracks”: we think a joke is funnier when we hear other people laughing at it.

How can the principle of social proof improve your negotiation outcomes? Consider the following tactics:
• The seller of a house limits the open-house viewing of the property to only one hour so that all potential buyers will be present at the same time.
• When a potential client asks her to provide a list of dates on which to schedule an initial meeting, the consultant (who is secretly desperate for work) provides very few available dates in the following week.
• A sales representative begins his pitch by listing his firm’s many other clients. (Or a business school fills its brochures with the names and photographs of famous alumni.)

STRATEGY 7: MAKE TOKEN UNILATERAL CONCESSIONS
Some years ago, a national trade association for construction subcontractors determined that it needed to survey its membership. They were aware, however, of one of the key barriers to such market research: target audiences are notoriously reluctant to respond to surveys and questionnaires.
In the hopes of learning how best to increase response rates, they decided to test the power of providing a financial incentive for filling out the survey. One randomly chosen subgroup of members was sent the questionnaire with no financial incentive. Of this subgroup, 20.7 percent returned a completed questionnaire. Another randomly chosen subgroup of members was promised a $50 payment for completing and returning the questionnaire. Unfortunately, the $50 incentive did not significantly change behavior; this time, 23.3 percent of members responded. Why such a weak effect? One plausible theory is that the incentive was not large enough; perhaps the association should have promised $100 or $200. However, consider what happened with a third group of members. This group was sent the questionnaire and, along with it, a single $1 bill. This time, 40.7 percent of members returned a completed questionnaire! Standard economic theories fail to explain the behavior of these survey respondents. Not only was the $1 incentive considerably smaller than the $50 incentive, but the $1 incentive was not really an “incentive” at all—it was guaranteed payment regardless of whether the member complied with the request. While economic theorists rush to create a model that explains this behavior, the rest of us might note that it is precisely because the $1 was not an incentive, but rather a unilateral concession—or gift—that the recipients felt obliged to reciprocate. What is striking, nonetheless, is the fact that such a small concession would be so effective. Research on trust and reciprocity suggests that recipients of gifts and concessions are often insensitive to the degree of cost incurred by the giver;15 thus, even a low-cost (i.e., “token”) concession may be sufficient to induce reciprocity, compliance, or agreement.

For example, consider some token concessions that you might make in your next negotiation:
• You agree to meet at a time—or at a location—that is more convenient for the other side than it is for you.
• On the way to the negotiation, you purchase doughnuts and coffee to share with your negotiation counterpart.
• You begin substantive discussions by agreeing to one of the smaller requests that the other side had made.
In each case, the more salient your concession is to the other side (e.g., the other side knows that you have agreed to the location despite its inconvenience for you), the more likely it is that they will be compelled to reciprocate in substantive ways.


STRATEGY 8: USE REFERENCE POINTS TO MAKE YOUR OFFERS AND DEMANDS SEEM REASONABLE

In a recent negotiation training session for executives, we presented the following scenario (adapted from the work of Daniel Kahneman and Amos Tversky) to half of the participants:

Scenario A: Imagine that you are about to purchase a calculator for $50. The calculator salesperson informs you that this calculator is on sale at the store’s other branch, located a twenty-minute drive away from where you are now. Assuming that you cannot negotiate the price at your current location, what is the minimum discount you would need at the other location to make it worth the twenty-minute trip?

Before you read further, take a moment to write down your own response to Scenario A. Then consider the next scenario, which was presented to the other half of the participants in the session.

Scenario B: Imagine that you are about to purchase a laptop computer for $2,000. The computer salesperson informs you that this computer is on sale at the store’s other branch, located a twenty-minute drive from where you are now. Assuming that you cannot negotiate the price at your current location, what is the minimum discount you would need at the other location to make it worth the twenty-minute trip?

If you look closely, you will notice that both scenarios are asking the same question: how much is twenty minutes of your time worth? But consider how differently executives valued twenty minutes of their time, depending on whether they read Scenario A or Scenario B. Those who read Scenario A said that they would need, on average, a discount of $20 for it to be worth driving across town. Those who read Scenario B said that they would need, on average, a discount of almost $200 for it to be worth the same trip!

As this experiment suggests, the way in which people value their own interests (in this case, their time) is open to influence. Going across town to save $20 may seem foolish when we are purchasing a big-ticket item (such as a computer or an automobile). But if there was a $20 discount on something relatively cheap (such as a calculator or a $60 sweater), we might feel compelled to make the trip. In other words, people do not objectively evaluate the cost of an item or an issue; rather, they evaluate costs in comparison with salient reference points (e.g., the total amount they are spending that day).

This is exactly why car salespeople get away with selling so many add-ons. When you are already paying $30,000 for the car, paying an additional $200–$500 for floor mats or scratch proofing does not seem like a big deal. On the other hand, if you already owned the car and someone came to your door selling floor mats or scratch proofing at the same prices, you would probably slam the door in their face!

There is another reason why the executives in our training session were willing to chase a $20 discount on a calculator but not on a computer: people care not only about the value of the item they are purchasing, but also about getting a “good deal.” The desire to get a good or “fair” deal makes negotiators susceptible to influence.17 For example, shoppers will be more likely to pay $500 for an item when they discover that it was originally priced at $750, regardless of how much the item is truly worth to them. Likewise, in a study conducted by economist Richard Thaler, people were willing to pay significantly more for a beer purchased from a “fancy resort hotel” than from a “rundown grocery store,” even though they would consume the beer at the beach in both cases. In other words, even when the value of the deal is identical, negotiators are likely to find it more or less attractive depending on how it is presented, what it is compared with, and how much of a “steal” it represents.

DEFENDING YOURSELF AGAINST STRATEGIES OF INFLUENCE 

All of the strategies we have described are grounded not only in scientific research, but also in the experience of practitioners who make their living by inducing you to concur, consent, or comply with their wishes and demands. As a negotiator, you will likely be confronted by many skilled wielders of influence. Unfortunately, simply learning about the strategies is unlikely to protect you from their powerful effects. To protect yourself, you must make a conscious effort to anticipate and mitigate them.18 Here, we review a number of defense strategies that you can employ in your own negotiations.

DEFENSE STRATEGY 1: PREPARE SYSTEMATICALLY
One of the best ways to defend against influence strategies is to prepare systematically and comprehensively for negotiations. This entails a rigorous BATNA analysis, a careful evaluation of the ZOPA, and a thorough investigation of all the issues. Negotiators who have carefully evaluated their interests and priorities prior to entering talks are unlikely to accept an unfavorable offer simply because of the way in which it is presented.

DEFENSE STRATEGY 2: CREATE A SCORING SYSTEM
As described in Chapter 2, a scoring system allows you to objectively evaluate the total value of a stated offer by comparing it with the total value of alternative offers, to the value of your BATNA, or to the degree of your aspirations. Influence strategies are less likely to persuade a negotiator who can objectively evaluate every proposal that is made.

DEFENSE STRATEGY 3: EXPLICITLY SEPARATE INFORMATION FROM INFLUENCE
As explained in Chapter 1, negotiation geniuses understand that everything that the other side says is part information and part influence. Your task is to explicitly separate the two before reacting or responding. When the other side makes a seemingly compelling statement, effective negotiators ask themselves questions such as these: “Did I learn something new here? If so, what did I learn? How should I evaluate what she said in the context of my interests and my priorities?” Here is another line of questioning that can help separate influence from information: “Would I be willing to do this for anyone else? Would I have been willing to do this yesterday—or even an hour ago? Can I defend my decision to critical others?”

DEFENSE STRATEGY 4: REPHRASE THEIR OFFER IN OTHER TERMS
You can also mitigate the impact of influence strategies by taking time to rephrase substantive statements that the other party makes. You might rephrase their loss-frame statement (to yourself) using a gain frame—and then see how tempting their proposal seems. For example, if the other side says, “If you do not increase your bid, you will lose the opportunity to win this deal,” you may be tempted to submit a higher bid. Before you do, take a moment and rephrase their statement as follows:
“If I want to have a chance at winning this deal, I will have to increase my bid.” Are you just as tempted to bid higher? The key is to identify whether your reaction to their proposal stems from its merits or from their presentation.

DEFENSE STRATEGY 5: APPOINT ADEVIL’S ADVOCATE 
As suggested in Chapter 4, a useful negotiation strategy is to appoint someone on your side to play the role of devil’s advocate. This person’s role is to question your beliefs regarding everything that is relevant to the negotiation. Your devil’s advocate need not be present during the negotiation; you might find it more appropriate to structure a process that allows you to “call in” every so often to confer with her.

DEFENSE STRATEGY 6: IF POSSIBLE, DO NOT NEGOTIATE UNDER TIME PRESSURE 
Influence tactics are more likely to have an effect when their target must respond quickly. This suggests that negotiators should try to set aside ample time to negotiate, be willing to wait a day or more before making important decisions, and be comfortable asking other parties to allow time for consideration of the offer or proposal. For example, it is likely that many of those approached in the zoo-trip study would have rejected the request to chaperone juvenile delinquents if given the chance to sleep on it. Of course, these defense strategies are not mutually exclusive. Negotiation geniuses rely simultaneously on many or all of them. Furthermore, these strategies are not simply useful for countering influence tactics; all of them are sound negotiation advice in any situation.

CHAPTER 8: Blind Spots in Negotiation 

According to a phenomenon that Max and his colleague Dolly Chugh call bounded awareness, negotiators tend to focus narrowly on the decisions they must make and thus often ignore information that is relevant but outside the scope of their narrow focus.

In this chapter, we will identify the systematic ways in which negotiators make this common decision-making mistake. Specifically, we will reveal how negotiators often overlook the following factors:

• the role of parties that are not at the bargaining table;
• the ways in which other parties are likely to make decisions;
• the role of information asymmetries;
• the strength of competitors;
• information that is not immediately relevant but that will be critical in the future.

WHEN PARTIES AWAY FROM THE TABLE ARE IN YOUR BLIND SPOT 
Consider this abstract problem:

Two companies, A and B, are the leading players in their industry. Company C, which falls in the next tier in the same industry, is
worth $1 billion as a stand-alone company, and its management has announced that it would be interested in being acquired at a
favorable price. Analysts have identified A and B as the obvious bidders, since the acquisition of C by either A or B would make
either company the dominant player in the industry. Both A and B have analyzed the possible acquisition of C and both have
concluded that C would be worth $1.2 billion if managed by A or B. This means that if A or B could acquire C for under $1.2 billion,
it would be a profitable acquisition, but anything above $1.2 billion would create a net loss and would lead to a drop in the acquirer’s
stock price. However, if A were to acquire C, B would be at a catastrophic disadvantage and would lose $0.5 billion. Similarly, if B
were to acquire C, A would also lose $0.5 billion. Finally, if either A or B makes an offer for C, the other company will learn of the
offer. So, as the CEO of Company A, what should you do?

When we present this problem in our executive education classrooms, our students often suggest that A should offer C $1.1 billion. This offer, if accepted, would create a $100 million net benefit for "A" and a $100 million net benefit for C. Clearly, the $1.1 billion offer is in the ZOPA.
But what about B? When you think about B’s position, it becomes clear that C will not have to accept A’s $1.1 billion offer. Once A has made this offer, B stands to lose $0.5 billion unless B outbids A. Rather than suffering a $0.5 billion loss, B is likely to offer $1.2 billion to break even.
But what about A? Unless A bids again, A will now lose $0.5 billion. Thus, A will offer $1.3 billion, and the problem reverts to B.
The pattern is now clear: each party is better off bidding again rather than losing $0.5 billion. As a result, we can easily predict that the auction will escalate until it reaches $1.7 billion, at which point it will end. One of the two competitors (A or B) will lose $0.5 billion because it has lost the deal, and the other will lose $0.5 billion because it has “won” the deal by overpaying by $0.5 billion for C. Unfortunately, as soon as the first bid is made, neither party can quit without suffering a $0.5 billion loss.
What is the key to winning in this auction? First, you must recognize that any bid for the target (C) will lead to dysfunctional competition. Second, you should develop a (legal) strategy to discourage your competitor from initiating the value-destroying escalation process.
Why do most of our executive students miss these solutions and instead propose that A make a bid for C? This strategy (A should bid $1.1 billion for C) results from an overly narrow definition of the scope of this negotiation. Specifically, the offer emerges when A views the negotiation as involving only A and C. If the world were that simple, A need only consider whether there is a ZOPA—i.e., whether C is worth more to A than as a stand-alone entity. But this analysis ignores two key elements:

1) the effect of A’s behavior on B’s outcomes, and 
2) the rules that allow C to bring B into the game after it gets an offer from A.

More broadly, the ABC story illustrates what happens when negotiators fail to consider the perspective of parties who are not at the bargaining table. Negotiation geniuses, in contrast, learn to broaden their focus to consider the impact of their actions on others and to think through the competitive dynamics that will result from their strategy.

Whenever two companies know that the loser of a bidding war will incur a loss of market value once the bidding begins, each has an incentive to continue bidding beyond the value of the target. In such battles, as in the $100 auction described in Chapter 4, it is easier to stay out of the bidding altogether than it is to get out safely once you have entered. From all appearances, even such market leaders as J&J and Boston Scientific are capable of falling into this trap.

WHEN THE OTHER SIDE’S DECISION RULES ARE IN YOUR BLIND SPOT

Imagine that your company, under your leadership, is considering making an offer to acquire a small firm that has invented a great new product that fits your company’s needs. You believe that your firm can uniquely add value to the smaller firm’s product. Your assessment is that the firm currently could be worth as little as $5 million or as much as $10 million in the marketplace, depending on valuation assumptions. But, due to the unique synergies that your firm could create, you value the smaller firm at roughly $14 million. You know that the other firm’s three founders own the entire firm in equal shares and they may have different opinions about the worth of their firm. How much will you offer to buy the company?
Wait a minute! Suppose you learn that the three founders have an agreement that they will only sell the firm if all three agree to accept an offer. Does this new information change your offer? If so, what is your new offer?
Now let’s try one more variation. Imagine instead that you learn that the founders have an agreement that, if they ever receive an offer, any one of the three can force the sale of the firm (unless the other two buy her shares at an equivalent price, which you are fairly certain the others cannot afford to do). Does this information change your offer? If so, what is your new offer?
Once you realize that each of the founders is likely to have a different reservation value (i.e., a different minimum price that they require before they will sell), it becomes obvious that you need to consider what type of arrangement the three founders have regarding how and when to sell. In other words, you need to focus on their decision rules. What may be your best strategy when any one founder can ratify a sale is probably not the best strategy when every founder must agree to the sale.
Imagine that each of the three founders has a different reservation value for selling the firm:

Founder A’s reservation value is $6 million, Founder B’s reservation value is $7 million, and Founder C’s reservation value is $9 million. Clearly, if one founder can force the sale, you can successfully offer a much lower price—just above $6 million—because Founder A will accept this price and force the sale. If, however, all three founders must be in agreement, Founder C is the critical player, and you will have to offer more than $9 million to secure the deal. (And if majority rule was the arrangement, you would have to satisfy Founders A and B and offer more than $7 million.)

Once we have analyzed this problem carefully, it becomes clear that we need to think through the decision rules, constraints, and politics of the other side. However, when we present this scenario to executives, they often fail to see the importance of considering the decision rights of the three founders. Moreover, they tell us that they do not typically focus on such issues in the real world.
Instead, in situations such as the one we just described, many executives will focus entirely on financial and accounting issues, such as calculating revenue multiples, projecting financial synergies, et cetera. These calculations are clearly necessary, as they provide an objective valuation for the company and help you to understand the highest you should be willing to pay for your acquisition. But focusing only on these issues and overlooking the other side’s decision-making dynamics can lead you to pay more than is necessary.

For most negotiators, the decision rules of other parties lie outside the bounds of awareness. In contrast, negotiation geniuses understand that they need to consider not only the interests of the other side, but also how the other side will evaluate and make their decisions.

WHEN THE OTHER SIDE’S INFORMATION ADVANTAGE IS IN YOUR BLIND SPOT

Read the following exercise and write down your response before reading further.

ACQUIRING A COMPANY
You represent Company A (the acquirer), and you are planning to make a tender offer, in cash, for 100 percent of Company T’s (the target) shares. The main complication is this: The value of Company T depends directly on the outcome of a major oil exploration project that it is currently undertaking. If the project fails, Company T under current management will be worth nothing (i.e., $0 per share). But if the project succeeds, the value of the company under current management could be as high as $100 per share. All share values between $0 and $100 are considered equally likely.

By all estimates, the company will be worth 50 percent more in the hands of Company A than under current management. If the project fails, the company is worth $0 per share under either management. If the exploration project generates a $50 per share value under current management, the value under Company A will be $75 per share. Similarly, a $100 per share value under Company T implies a $150 per share value under Company A, and so on.

One last detail: Your offer must be made now, before the outcome of the drilling project is known. Company T will accept your price per share if it is greater than the value under current management. However, Company T will delay its decision on your bid until the results of the project are known and then accept or reject your offer. Thus, you (Company A) will not know the results of the exploration project when submitting your offer, but Company T will know the results when deciding whether or not to accept your offer. No other firms are involved; the target will be acquired by you or by no one.

As the representative of Company A, you are deliberating over price offers ranging from $0 per share (which is tantamount to making no offer at all) to $150 per share. What price per share offer would you tender for Company T’s stock?

Your response: “My tender price is $_____ per share.”

What should you, as the acquirer, offer for the target? The problem appears simple and straightforward, but it is in fact analytically complex for many people. The range of responses from the thousands of auditing partners, investment bankers, CEOs, and other executives who have participated in our executive programs is typically between $50 and $75 per share. This common— but dangerously incorrect—response is based on the logic that “on average, the firm will be worth $50 to the target and $75 to the acquirer; consequently, a sale price in this range will, on average, be profitable to both parties.” Put another way, the ZOPA (on average) ranges from $50–$75; thus, an offer in this range makes strategic sense.
But let’s see what actually happens when we work through the logic of whether to make an offer in this range. Imagine, for instance, that you offer $60 per share:

The $60 offer will be accepted 60 percent of the time—that is, whenever the firm is worth between $0 and $60 to the target. Since all values between $0 and $60 are equally likely, the firm will, on average, be worth $30 per share to the target. This means, it will be worth (on average) $45 per share to the acquirer. Because the offer is for $60 per share, the acquirer will lose (on average) $15 per share. Consequently, a $60 per share offer is unwise.
If you work through the logic, a similar analysis applies to any positive offer. On average, for an offer to be accepted at all, the acquirer will get a company worth 25 percent less than the price paid.

This is because, for any offer that is accepted, the value of the company (after exploration) will fall anywhere between $0 and the amount offered, with all values equally likely. Thus, on average, the firm will be worth half of the offered value to the target and three-fourths of the offered value to theacquirer. As a result, all offers above $0 per share are more likely to lose money than to make money.

This means you should have offered $0 per share.

The key to this paradox is the target firm’s information advantage. Specifically, because the target will accept the acquirer’s offer only after the exploration project is complete, the target will sell the firm sometimes when it is profitable for the acquirer, but very often when it is of extremely low value — that is, when it is a “lemon.”

George Akerlof won the Nobel Prize in Economics for research demonstrating that the selective acceptance of offers can lead to market distortions. For instance, Akerlof noted, the average used car on the market is not an average-quality used car, since car owners tend to hold on to good cars or sell them to relatives or friends. The worse the car, the more likely it is to enter the general marketplace. Knowing this, buyers should reasonably become wary; the result is a lowering of the value that you can get for your used car, even when you are trying to sell a good product.
Akerlof’s analysis highlights the danger of being the less-informed party in a negotiation—a common situation for buyers. But why don’t smart people foresee this problem and avoid making an offer in the “Acquiring a Company” exercise? Because we have a tendency to systematically exclude critical information regarding what the other side knows in our analysis. Specifically, we fail to recognize that the benefit to us of making an offer depends on the offer being accepted by the other party, and that acceptance is most likely to occur when we have offered too much! This phenomenon is the embodiment of the winner’s curse problem.
The winner’s curse describes situations in which a bidder gets a prize, but only by paying more than the item is worth, due to his or her failure to consider the information advantage of the other party. The winner’s curse is a specific form of a blind spot in which the key is the informational advantage of the other side. Groucho Marx appeared to grasp the intuition behind the “winner’s curse” when he quipped that he didn’t want to belong to any club that would have him as a member. If a club’s standards were so low as to accept him, he didn’t want any part of it.
Many people believe that experience is the key to avoiding the winner’s curse. In this case, however, experience is not the solution. Max and his colleagues Sheryl Ball and John Carroll tested the ability of bright MBA students to learn to avoid the winner’s curse.13 These students played twenty trials of the Acquiring a Company exercise, where they earned real money based on the profitability of their decisions. Participants received full feedback immediately after each trial, based on a randomly selected value of the firm; in addition, we let them observe changes (which were overwhelmingly decreases) in their asset balance. Despite the mounting evidence that bidding above $0 was poor strategy, and despite the accumulation of financial losses, across the twenty trials, participants failed to learn the correct response; the mean bid continued to hover above $50 per share. In fact, only five out of seventy-two participants from a leading MBA program learned to make a bid of zero over the course of the trials. In more recent research, these errors were shown to persist even after one hundred trials.
How, then, can you avoid becoming a victim of the winner’s curse?

1. Imagine how you will feel if your offer is immediately accepted. Before making an offer, imagine that the other side will immediately accept the offer that you plan to make (for the car, the house, or the company). Now ask yourself, “Does her acceptance tell me anything about the value of the commodity? Does she know something that I don’t know, and does that reason explain her acceptance?” The winner’s curse results not from an inability to think about the decisions of other parties, but from our failure to consider the effect of their information advantage.

2. Seek out objective, expert advice. Another strategy for your most important negotiations is to obtain the help of an expert, such as a mechanic’s unbiased evaluation of a used car, a professional inspector’s assessment of a house, or a high-quality, independent valuation of a target firm.

3. Make your offer on a contingency basis. More generally, whenever you are dealing with a better-informed counterpart in the midst of an important transaction, you should seek to lessen the impact of the other side’s information advantage. Consider the following way in which an acquirer in the Acquiring a Company exercise could profitably offer a value above $0. Instead of offering a precise dollar value per share, the acquirer could agree to pay a fixed percentage above the firm’s value after exploration. For example, if the agreement was to pay 25 percent above value per share to Company T, both companies would stand to benefit from the eventual sale. Contingency clauses are in fact common features of acquisition agreements.

WHEN THE STRENGTH OF THE COMPETITION IS IN YOUR BLIND SPOT 

Imagine that your company is in a patent race against four other firms. The first company to complete the scientific research needed for the patent will earn an enormous market advantage, but the research is very expensive. The four firms that lose the patent race will lose their entire R&D investment.
You ask your chief scientist for an assessment of the likelihood that your company will win the patent race. “This is not a difficult engineering problem for us,” he tells you. “We have a 40 percent chance of winning.”

Should you trust that assessment? How could you get a more accurate estimate?

Here is another situation where recent psychological research can help you. Researcher Don Moore has shown that people are much more willing to bet on their likelihood of winning a competition against others when they are asked to perform a familiar or objectively easy task than when they are asked to perform an objectively difficult task. Of course, what people often fail to realize is that if the task is easy for you, it is likely to be easy for your competitor as well; the same is true for difficult tasks. In other words, if the challenge is adding up two-digit numbers, which you consider easy, you may be overconfident about winning. But if you’re hesitant about entering a juggling competition for amateurs, you may have lost sight of how hard it is for the other contestantsas well. The same principle can operate in a complex R&D decision.
Research on reference group neglect follows a similar pattern. Decision researchers Colin Camerer and Dan Lovallo show that companies tend to focus on their unique skills, products, distribution system, and so on, while the quality of their competition stays out of focus. For example, competitors often fail to assess the strength of their competition when deciding whether to enter a market—an extremely costly mistake.
The good news is that it is possible to fix this problem by explicitly focusing on the unique capabilities of the competition.17 When we focus on our competitors individually, we are able to more accurately assess the other side’s likelihood of success (and by extension, our own likelihood of failure).

Returning to the patent forecast, how should you interpret your chief scientist’s response? At the very least, you should ask yourself the following questions:

1) Has she considered the fact that this is an easy engineering problem for us but overlooked the fact that it may also be easy for our competitors?
2) Has she focused on our firm’s unique skills and overlooked the advantages and threats posed by our competitors?
3) Has she considered, individually, each competing firm’s likelihood of winning, or has she lumped all “others” into one combined threat?

Having considered these possibilities, you might discover that, while the 40 percent estimate may be a good indication of how well your R&D is developing (“Things are going great!”), it may not capture the threat posed by your competitors (things may be going great for them as well).

WHEN THE FUTURE IS IN YOUR BLIND SPOT

Max recently developed and taught (as part of a team) a course for the most senior executives of one of the twenty largest firms in the world. This firm often creates long-term contracts and makes significant investments in nations that are in flux and where business relations do not always follow
Western expectations. They wanted the very best corporate diplomacy training possible.
One negotiation case we presented was set in a country where many of the executives had negotiated or would soon be negotiating. The case itself was based on a recent episode involving the firm. We also invited high-level former diplomats to sit in on the classes. These diplomats had worked in the country where our case occurred, and we could call on them to provide insight into local customs, changing political circumstances, and business norms. They provided this knowledge, and also much more.
The key insight offered by these diplomats was that effective negotiators must begin to think more broadly about what it means to collect “relevant” information. Often, it is not obvious what is—ormight one day become—relevant, or perhaps even crucial. Because most negotiators are too focused on the “current” opportunity, problem, or crisis, they do a poor job of asking the questions and collecting the information that they will need in the future.
Here are some of the important questions that the diplomats posed:

• How will changing laws affect the wisdom of the transaction?
• What precedent are you creating for future deals?
• How can you gain information about the key personnel of an organization with which you plan to pursue a joint venture?
• How will the partner firm’s competitors react to the joint venture?
• How much power do these competitors have? What is the source of their power?
• What assumptions are you making when you estimate the long-term success of this strategy?

As the discussion continued, it became clear that the executives involved in the actual case had not asked the questions that the diplomats were now identifying; if they had done so, the corporation’s business development activities would have been more successful.
This “diplomat’s perspective” is shared by many negotiators and dealmakers who have had the experience of negotiating in contexts that are culturally distinct from their own or in dynamic environments. In 2002, the Program on Negotiation at the Harvard Law School presented United
Nations ambassador Lakhdar Brahimi with its annual “Great Negotiator” award. The award recognized Brahimi’s many diplomatic accomplishments, chief among them his role in mediating the political negotiations that followed the overthrow of the Taliban government as the UN secretary general’s special envoy to Afghanistan in 2002. Brahimi had also headed UN troubleshooting missions to Yemen, Liberia, Sudan, Nigeria, South Africa, and other nations in crisis. During a panel discussion, Brahimi was asked how he prepared for the difficult and complex negotiation in Afghanistan. Brahimi recalled the advice an “old British diplomat” had once given him: “You go somewhere and you try and understand that country because one day you may need to negotiate with that country.”
Negotiation geniuses—in business, in politics, and in everyday life—do not begin to focus on a situation only after it erupts into a crisis. Rather, they prepare for eventualities well in advance. They are able to do so because they understand the difference between focusing narrowly on information that seems relevant to the present concern and focusing globally on information that may one day make the difference between success and failure.

WHEN WHAT IS RIGHT IN FRONT OF YOUR EYES IS IN YOUR BLIND SPOT

In the 1970s, Ulric Neisser, a psychologist at Cornell University, created a now-famous video thatshowed two superimposed groups of students passing basketballs to each other.19 In the video, one group wore white shirts and passed a basketball to one another, and the other group wore dark shirts, and passed a different basketball to one another. We have often shown this video to our executive and MBA students and asked them to count the number of times the members of the white-shirt group pass the ball. Because the two groups were filmed separately and then superimposed, the pass-counting task is difficult; the viewers have to pay close attention to avoid confusing the two different basketballs.
Many of our students are able to accurately count the total number of passes: eleven. Yet most of them miss something. After the players in the white shirts make their fourth pass, a person holding an open umbrella walks from one end of the screen to the other, passing right in front of the two groups of students. Anyone watching this video who has not been asked to count passes immediately spots the person with the umbrella. However, among viewers who are busy counting passes, typically only between 5–20 percent see the person carrying an umbrella! Full disclosure: neither Deepak nor Max saw it the first time they saw the video. Neisser referred to this phenomenon as inattentional blindness. This blindness is not due to a flaw in our vision; rather, it is a natural consequence of the human mind’s limited ability to focus on multiple tasks simultaneously.

If it is this easy to miss an image that is (literally) right in front of your eyes, imagine how much easier it is to miss issues, interests, and perspectives that are important to the other party, but which are not in plain sight because they are less critical to you.

EXPANDING YOUR AWARENESS 

Certainly, the ability to focus narrowly on a problem is a critical skill that allows us to complete many tasks effectively and efficiently. But the research on bounded awareness should cause you to wonder what you may have missed during periods of intense focus in negotiation. When you are busy estimating the other side’s maximum willingness to pay, are you ignoring the effect that this deal will have on your competitors? When you are focusing on the potential for synergy with your acquisition target, are you overlooking the possibility that influential and self-interested decision makers could derail the negotiation? When you are busy explaining to the customer how many of their problems your product or service will solve, are you ignoring other interests and concerns that could push them toward your competitors? When, as a new player in the industry, you are doing everything possible to increase your firm’s revenue, are you ignoring future difficulties you could face when you want to transition into a high-margin business model?
If these problems sound familiar, you probably want to know how to have the best of both worlds in negotiation: focusing intently when necessary and expanding your awareness to include elements that are typically in your blind spot. How can you accomplish these seemingly contradictory tasks?
First, the content of this chapter should help you predict which factors will typically fall in your blind spot. You should be extra vigilant in seeking out such commonly “invisible” information.
Furthermore, the more important and complex the negotiation, the more necessary it is for you to seek out information that tends to fall in your blind spot.
Another strategy is to take time to reflect on your most important past negotiations. Did you missany important opportunities? Did you fail to explore information that may have helped you? How would you have found that information? The answers to these questions may provide hints as to how you can improve information gathering and strategy development in your current and upcoming negotiations.
Finally, you can simplify the task of gathering and synthesizing information from diverse sources by enlisting the help of others in your organization. For your most important negotiations, assemble a team whose purpose is to expose blind spots. Define the roles of your team members by putting each person in charge of a particular blind spot. For instance, one person could be in charge of assessing and monitoring parties that are not at the table, another person could be in charge of evaluating the strength of competitors, and so on. Then, set aside time (e.g., during your weekly meeting) for each person to update the group and for the team to revise its strategy accordingly. Just as “many hands make light work,” the many eyes of your team can lighten the task of expanding your awareness.

CHAPTER 9: Confronting Lies and Deception 

When we’ve asked groups of executives or MBA students whether they have ever lied in a negotiation, most of them admit that they have. When we’ve asked the same group whether they have ever been lied to in a negotiation, all of them claim that they have been. Indeed, many of our students and clients tell us that deception is simply part of negotiating in their industry. In other words, as much as we may wish otherwise, every negotiator has to deal with lies and deception. Fortunately, there is a lot you can do to prepare for this.
Consider the following three stories. How many of them ring true to you? How often have you found yourself in a similar situation?

STORY 1: THE OBVIOUS LIE 

Rafael, the founder and president of a small firm that manufactures lighting equipment, was negotiating the sale of a large order with a potential customer. After Rafael quoted his price, which he felt was in line with prevailing market rates, the customer asked for some time to consider the offer. Two days later, the customer called back and told Rafael that he had another offer that was 5 percent lower than the one Rafael had made. If Rafael could beat this other offer, the customer was ready to make the purchase.
Rafael was not sure what to do. On the one hand, he seriously doubted that another firm would have beaten his price by 5 percent.
On the other hand, he could not simply call the customer a liar. Furthermore, even if Rafael was sure that the customer did not have a better offer, if he refused to lower his price, the customer would have to walk away in order to save face—to accept Rafael’s price would make it obvious that there was no other offer and that the customer had been lying. Caught in this dilemma, and quite confident that he was being lied to, Rafael lowered his price and made the sale.

STORY 2: THE DECEPTION YOU DISCOVERED TOO LATE 

Stacy, who had twenty years of industry experience, was a highly successful executive at a Fortune 500 company. When she decided to switch jobs, she had a number of lucrative job offers from some of the most prestigious firms in the country. But Stacy was particularly attracted to an offer made by the CEO of a small start-up company to whom she was introduced through a mutual acquaintance. The compensation package was not particularly stellar—she would make much more money at a larger firm—but she would have the opportunity to try something different and to make a big impact in a fledgling niche of the industry. More than anything else, Stacy was sold on the breadth of decision-making authority she would have in shaping and growing the business.
Stacy accepted the job. Less than a year later, Stacy left the firm disappointed, disgruntled, and in disbelief. It turned out that the
CEO had not been straightforward with her regarding the role she would play and the authority she would have. Instead, he had simply wanted to hire a high-profile executive with contacts in the industry; once hired, Stacy had been relegated to the role of salesperson. Stacy felt that she had been lied to from the beginning.

STORY 3: THE DECEPTION YOU NEVER DISCOVERED 

Thomas, the purchasing agent for a manufacturing firm, was in negotiations with a supplier. Typically, when purchasing components from outside vendors, Thomas’s firm would hold an auction and buy from the lowest-price supplier. Because of the unique nature of this particular component, however, Thomas found himself in the uncomfortable position of having to negotiate with the one and only supplier that could meet the firm’s specifications by the required deadline. To make matters worse, the supplier knew that no other supplier could meet Thomas’s current needs. After much discussion, the supplier quoted Thomas a price. It was higher than Thomas had expected, and higher than his firm had budgeted for the component. Hoping to get at least a slight concession from the supplier, Thomas asked, “My firm is making a big purchase, and we are likely to make purchases from you in the future. Is this really the lowest price at which you can sell this component to us?” The supplier looked Thomas straight in the eye and responded, “I appreciate your business now, and I would appreciate it in the future, but this is the lowest price at which we have ever sold this component.” Still somewhat disappointed with the price, but satisfied with the supplier’s response, Thomas accepted the deal. He had no idea that the supplier could have lowered the price by another 20–25 percent.

While no one can ever be entirely safe from the lies and deceptions of others, negotiation geniuses understand what it takes to tackle and diffuse a wide variety of nefarious tactics. In this chapter, we will confront the darker side of negotiation head-on and present the following strategies:

• how to make it less likely that people will lie to you;
• how to detect when someone is lying to you;
• what to do when you catch someone in a lie;
• how to eliminate your own desire—and need—to lie.

PRE-EMPTING LIES AND DECEPTION 

The best defense against lies and deception is to eliminate your counterpart’s temptation to lie.
Typically, the other side has certain motivations to lie—for example, they may get a better deal by lying. But the other side also has certain motivations not to lie—if the lie is discovered, they risk losing the deal or damaging their reputation. To eliminate their motivations to lie, you need to make salient to them the reasons they should not lie to you. This can be done in a number of ways.

DEFENSE STRATEGY 1: LOOK PREPARED 

Throughout this book, we have exalted the merits of preparation—the more prepared you are, the better you will negotiate. But that is not the whole story. It not only pays to be more prepared, it also pays to look more prepared! Put simply, the more prepared you seem, the less people will want to lie to you. Why? Because if you look prepared, it makes them think that you might be able to detect when they are lying—thus making it risky for them to lie to you.
Consider Story 1, in which the customer came to Rafael with “a better offer” from a competitor.
Imagine what would have happened if, in their earlier discussions, Rafael had (truthfully) mentioned to the customer that he knows, on a personal level, most of his competitors, or that his firm keeps an eye on the rates competitors are charging. Either of those statements would have made the customer reconsider the strategy of coming to Rafael with a fake offer from an alleged competitor.
It is easy to see why it helps to look prepared when it comes to issues related to price. But negotiators often overlook the value of appearing prepared more generally. Consider these other ways in which Rafael—or you—could signal to the other side that you have done your homework and are prepared:

• Arriving on time for all meetings and negotiations.
• Being well prepared to discuss details regarding the myriad of issues that are involved.
• Being well organized and efficient.
• Speaking intelligently on issues related to their business and the industry—including issues that are not directly relevant to the current negotiation.
• Remembering the finer details of prior discussions with the other side and/or referring explicitly to notes you made during an earlier meeting.
• Responding expeditiously to requests for information or to the other side’s offers.

All of these tactics will not only help you to negotiate more effectively, but also make it less likely that others will lie to you. If you present yourself as someone who is always prepared and who is systematic in her approach to negotiations, you will garner respect and discourage deception at the same time.

DEFENSE STRATEGY 2: SIGNAL YOUR ABILITY TO OBTAIN INFORMATION 

Imagine that you have no idea whether the other side is lying—and he knows that you are clueless.
Does this mean that you are in serious jeopardy? Not necessarily. You may not know whether he is lying right now, but what if you could discover his deception tomorrow? If you can signal that you have the ability to discover (in the future) whether someone lied to you, you may dissuade him from lying in the first place.
How might this work? Think about Thomas (from Story 3), to whom the supplier suggested that it was impossible to obtain a lower price on the component. How would the supplier have responded if Thomas had stated his request for a concession differently? Consider these two variations:

Original script: “My firm is making a big purchase, and we are likely to make purchases from you in the future. Is this really the lo west price at which you can sell this component to us?”

Revised script: “My firm is making a big purchase, and we are likely to make purchases in the future. As you know, we need the supplies quickly this time around, which puts you in a unique position to fill the order. But, as you also know, other vendors have the resources to fulfill our need for future orders. As such, I will be meeting with them to discuss how low a price they will charge for these components in the future. Perhaps they will not be able to beat your price. But I would like to know from you before I talk to them: Is this really the lowest price at which you can sell this component to us? Can you find a way to lower the price, or should I assume that if the other vendors can beat this price we should go with them in the future?”

DEFENSE STRATEGY 3: ASK LESS THREATENING, INDIRECT QUESTIONS 

What do you suppose will happen if you ask someone to reveal her reservation value? Unless considerable trust exists between you and her, she will either refuse to tell you her reservation value —or she will lie about it. This should come as no surprise, yet negotiators often ask questions that are almost guaranteed to motivate the other side to lie. There is a better way to get essentially the same information: ask less threatening, indirect questions.
Imagine that you are interested in finding out the production costs of a vendor with whom you are dealing. If you ask her directly to reveal her company’s costs, you are inviting her to lie to you because she knows that as soon as you know these costs, you are in a position to make an offer just above cost. Here are some alternative questions she would be more likely to answer truthfully:
• Can you please give me some information regarding your production process?
• Can you explain to me how your supply chain operates?
• Do you purchase your materials domestically?
• Who are your primary suppliers?
• What are the characteristics of your typical buyer?
• Can you provide me with a list of some of your other customers?
• How much would I need to increase the size of my order to qualify for a price concession?
While no one of these questions gives you all of the information you need to calculate their costs, if you know your industry well, the combined responses should help you make a very accurate estimate.

DEFENSE STRATEGY 4: DON’T LIE 

If we asked you to never again lie to anyone during a negotiation, would you agree to be truthful forevermore? If not, why not? If you’re like most people we’ve asked, one reason is that you do not want to be the only sucker at the bargaining table. You’d love to be entirely honest, you might say, but, unfortunately, you live in a world where other people lie. Being the only truthful person would put you at a disadvantage. Sounds reasonable.

But there’s a problem with this perspective: what if everyone else is justifying their own lies using the same logic? What if most people would love to live in a world without deception, but each is stuck telling lies in self-defense? Unfortunately, many of us face this vicious cycle in negotiation. We are face-to-face with other negotiators who might prefer to be honest, but who do not trust us enough to risk it. In response, we, too, become more willing to lie.

Fortunately, this logic also yields a potential solution: we can make it easier for others to be truthful if we make it a point not to lie. This strategy will not dissuade those who want to exploit your honesty, but it will dissuade those who are lying out of self-defense. As time goes on, and your counterpart discovers that you have been honest with him, he will find it easier to be more honest with you.

How can you signal your desire for this kind of relationship? By revealing information that makes you somewhat vulnerable. In other words, reveal something that the other side recognizes is somewhat costly to you. What kind of message would this move send? It is possible that your counterpart will view you as naive or unprepared, but it is also highly likely that she will appreciate the trusting gesture and reciprocate in kind. You can help your cause by making your intentions explicit: “I know that there is a lot at stake in this relationship and that this is likely to make everyone more guarded and skeptical. But I also know that the more open and honest we are with each other from the start, the easier it will be for us to develop a mutually rewarding long-term relationship.
With that in mind, I would like to share with you some information related to our cost structure.”
Someone must take the first step, and it may as well be the one who is aspiring to become a negotiation genius.

LIE DETECTION 

Do you think you can tell when someone is lying to you? Many people believe they can. Unfortunately, most of these people are wrong. Too many of us trust our intuition when our intuition is not trustworthy. To make matters worse, many “experts” tell us that we should trust our intuition (for example, Malcolm Gladwell in his popular book Blink), when the evidence suggests serious limitations in our intuitive judgments. Psychologist Paul Ekman, who has spent decades measuringthe ability of people to distinguish truth from lies, has concluded that the average person is actually a very bad lie detector. Ekman has also developed expert techniques for lie detection; his research suggests that negotiators should focus on telltale signs such as pupil dilation, changes in voice pitch, and facial “micro-expressions.”
We take a different approach. Unlike participants in Ekman’s laboratory experiments, negotiators find themselves in complex, dynamic environments where it is difficult to focus on the subtle telltale signs of lying. You would not be well advised to ask your negotiation counterpart to repeat what he just said so that you can lean forward and peer into his eye sockets in hopes of seeing his pupils dilate. Instead, we recommend the following tactics:

DETECTION STRATEGY 1: GATHER INFORMATION FROM MULTIPLE SOURCES 

The first thing to remember is that deception depends upon information asymmetry. Inevitably in negotiation, there will be some facts and data that the other side knows that you don’t—and can’t— know. This information asymmetry makes you vulnerable to deception. But there are also many facts and pieces of data that you don’t know, but which you can learn about—from your counterpart, or from others. To reduce your vulnerability, you must rely on your preparation.
Negotiation geniuses exhaust all sources of information prior to, during, and after negotiation. The more information you have, the easier it will be for you to detect lies. For example, Stacy (from Story 2) did not know that the CEO who hired her was planning to sideline her on issues of substance and to use her only for the purposes of networking. It may have been possible for her to learn this, however. For starters, she could have spoken with the last person who held her position in the firm.

She could also have tried to gather information about the CEO’s management style from other employees of the firm. Finally, she could have asked the person who introduced her to the CEO what he knew about the CEO’s interests in hiring her. None of these conversations would guarantee that Stacy would detect the CEO’s deception, but each would increase her odds of diagnosing the CEO’s dishonesty.

DETECTION STRATEGY 2: SET A TRAP 

Some seasoned negotiators tell us that they have a very simple way of testing the honesty of the other party: they ask a question to which they already know the answer, and then evaluate the response. Of course, for the trap to work, the question must concern an issue about which the other side has an incentive to lie.
For example, a student of ours who worked as a buyer in the textile industry once asked a seller whether the price he had quoted was the lowest price at which the particular material could be sold.
The seller, who was aware that the buyer was new to the industry, swore that he had never sold the material to anyone for a lower price. Unfortunately for the seller, the buyer had come prepared; she had spoken with a friend in the industry who had recently purchased the material for a lower price from the same seller. As a result of that initial interaction, the buyer decided never to work with that seller again.

DETECTION STRATEGY 3: TRIANGULATE ON THE TRUTH 

Centuries ago, when ships were the primary means of travel, navigators had to rely on star charts and basic trigonometry to determine their position on the open seas. By considering their ship to be the third point in a triangle whose other two points were stars that maintained a constant distance, the navigators were able to “triangulate” their way to discovering the ship’s location.
What does this have to do with lie detection in negotiation? The point is that you may never discover a lie if you ask only one question (especially if you don’t know the answer to it). Instead, you need to ask many questions and “triangulate” on the truth. The more questions you ask, the more difficult it becomes for the other party to come up with consistent answers—unless they are telling the truth. To find out whether his customer truly had another offer from a competitor, Rafael (in Story 1) could have triangulated on the truth by asking questions such as these:

• When did you receive this offer?
• What exactly did my competitor offer?
• Did he provide you with specific product information?
• What was that information?
• Did my competitor give this offer to you in writing?
• If not, why do you think that is? Did you ask for it in writing?
• If you did get it in writing, may I see it?

What if your customer is unwilling to answer any such questions? This should make you at least a little suspicious. He may not wish to reveal his reservation value to you, but if he is completely tightlipped about the most straightforward questions regarding his alternatives—and if he has no reasonable explanation for his secrecy—then you should proceed as if he has been bluffing.

DETECTION STRATEGY 4: LOOK OUT FOR RESPONSES THAT DO NOT ANSWER THE QUESTION YOU ASKED 

Our most useful advice regarding lie detection stems from this critical insight: most people do not like to lie, but they are usually very comfortable with you being deceived. In other words, people will often go to great lengths to avoid saying something that is technically untrue (i.e., a lie), but they will be happy to mislead you indirectly with their response. Let’s consider a classic example.

Recall the dialogue (from Story 3) between Thomas and the supplier:

Thomas: “My firm is making a big purchase, and we are likely to make purchases from you in the future. Is this really the lowest price at which you can sell this component to us?
”Supplier: “I appreciate your business now, and I would appreciate it in the future, but this is the lowest price at which we have ever sold this component.”

If you read carefully, you will realize that the supplier never answered Thomas’s question! He had asked whether this was the lowest price at which the supplier could sell. The supplier responded that he had never before sold the component at a lower price. That sounds like an answer to Thomas’s question (it implies that “we can’t sell any cheaper”), but it clearly is not. It is quite possible that the supplier has never sold the specific component to someone else at a lower price—technically, the supplier may have told the truth—but that is quite irrelevant.

If Thomas had been more perceptive, he would have spotted the nonresponse and questioned the relevance of prior sale prices in the current situation. He could reiterate, for example, that he is making a large purchase (perhaps the largest that the supplier has ever received for this component) and that he will be a repeat customer. Furthermore, it is possible that even though the supplier has not sold the exact same component at a lower price, he may have sold similar components more cheaply.

Facing this more intense scrutiny, the supplier would have found it much more difficult to justify his position.

As it is, the supplier is unlikely to feel any guilt about this transaction. In addition to the host of self-serving justifications he could give for his behavior, he could also remind himself that he “never lied.” That’s the key. Instead of lying outright, people tend to make sure that they have technically told the truth—while at the same time trying to mislead you. This maneuver is a boon to would-be lie detectors. Negotiation geniuses ask clear, focused questions that make it incumbent upon the other party to respond transparently. Since people are more likely to deceive indirectly than to explicitly lie, negotiation geniuses who listen carefully to the answers provided (and to the answers that are not provided) are in a great position to catch “nonlying deceivers” in the act.

DETECTION STRATEGY 5: USE CONTINGENCY CONTRACTS 

One of the authors has a large consulting client in the retail business. When the retailer buys goods overseas, it often purchases in very large quantities. For one key agreement that we heard about, the contract was so specific that it included the name of the ship that would bring the goods to the United States. After the contract was signed, but before the boat was loaded in the foreign country, the retailer learned that the United States government had created an embargo against this particular group of goods that was to go into effect at approximately the same date the goods would reach the United States. The ship might arrive by the embargo deadline, or it might not.

The U.S. retailer told the foreign manufacturer about the embargo, asked for the goods to be sent by air, and asked the manufacturer to pay for the greatly increased costs of shipping by air. The manufacturer told the retailer to relax, assured them that the ship would arrive before the embargo, and suggested that the Americans were being unnecessarily nervous. The retailer responded that if the goods were not sent by air, there would be no deal. The manufacturer pointed out that they would have been happy to accommodate the retailer if there was some actual risk that the goods would notreach the United States in time; however, as things stood, there was no risk—but there was a signed contract—and they would be happy to fax the retailer a copy of it. The negotiation was becoming quite heated, and the time pressure was mounting.

Then the retailer had a stroke of (negotiation) genius. He proposed to the manufacturer that the goods be sent by air and that the extra shipping costs be borne by the party whose claim turned out to be wrong. Although the ship would be carrying no goods of interest to either party (because the goods would be shipped by air), both parties would track when it actually reached the United States. If the ship beat the embargo, the retailer would pay the entire excess shipping costs of sending the goods by air; if the ship was late, the manufacturer would bear the costs. The retailer thought this was a wonderful contingency contract. Both sides could stand by their assessments, the goods would get to the United States on time, and, given current technology, both sides could check the Web daily to see how they were doing on the “bet.” The arrangement seemed perfect—until the manufacturer’s representative called to say that they would not accept the contingency contract. “This is getting way too complicated,” the manufacturer’s rep said. “Why don’t we just split the extra costs 50–50?”

What did the retailer learn from this response? That the manufacturer never believed its claims! If it had, it would have jumped at the opportunity to accept a clause that allowed it to avoid additional shipping costs. As we discussed in Chapters 1 and 2, when the other side makes a dubious claim regarding some future prospect, you do not have to take their word for it, nor do you have to argue about who is right. Instead, ask them to “put their money where their mouth is” by proposing a contingency contract. Contingency contracts are an excellent device for allowing honest people to stake financial outcomes on their differences in expectations (see Chapter 2). They are also an excellent device for diagnosing when the other side is lying about their beliefs and expectations. If they are unwilling to agree to a contingency contract, you can be more certain that they do not believe their own claims.

You may be curious about what happened next in our client’s negotiation with the manufacturer:
The retailer needed the goods badly and agreed to the 50–50 split. The boat arrived one day late!

YOU CAUGHT THEM IN A LIE... NOW WHAT? 

It’s hard to detect lies. It’s not much easier to know what to do after you have detected a lie. For one thing, you are likely to experience a range of emotions: anger, anxiety, disappointment, and surprise.
In addition, you likely will have multiple conflicting motivations: Should you take revenge or try to salvage the relationship? Should you walk away from the deal or try to maximize your value from it?
Should you tell the other party to stop lying or wait to see what they will say next? Should you call him a liar and stay true to your principles or hide your outrage and focus on your profits?
While there is no single right answer to any of these questions, there are systematic ways to think about how to resolve these conflicts. The first thing to do in such a situation is to stay calm and treat the deception like any other negotiation problem—something that needs to be better understood and carefully resolved. Then, answer the following three questions, which will help you make the best decision for you.

QUESTION 1: WAS IT REALLY A LIE? 

Is it possible that your counterpart does not even know that what she said was untrue? In other words, she may not have intended to lie, but was simply uninformed. In most negotiations, it is best to give the other side the benefit of the doubt—but to also be more careful as you move forward. If you think you were lied to, but aren’t sure, investigate using the strategies outlined above. But unless you are certain that the other side lied, you will likely gain little by calling her a liar. Almost certainly, she will deny the allegation, and you will find yourself in an escalating conflict.

In addition, keep in mind that what sounds like a lie to you may not sound like a lie to your counterpart. In Story 3, Thomas and the supplier are likely to characterize the supplier’s remarks very differently. If Thomas discovers that a lower price was possible, he will think that the supplier lied.
The supplier will certainly think otherwise. Similarly, when our executive and MBA students engage in negotiation simulations, it is common for one student to claim that her counterpart lied during the negotiation, and for the counterpart to strongly deny the accusation. Typically, the “liar” never actually uttered an untrue statement, but did allow the other side to be deceived. What should you do in such a situation? Don’t call your counterpart a liar, but explain that you feel you were misled or deceived, then discuss whether the deception was intentional or not.

Finally, note that not all lies are considered “unethical” in all contexts and cultures. If you are haggling for a piece of art with a street vendor in India, you can be certain that you will hear lots of prices, justifications, and stories that are based in fiction. Few people would consider these claims unethical; rather, that is the “language” in which the vendor’s business is conducted. Similar behavior in other contexts would be highly unethical, however. Before labeling your negotiation counterpart dishonest, audit your cultural assumptions. Was it a lie? Or are you negotiating in a context where you do not understand the norms?

QUESTION 2: DO I WANT TO CONTINUE WITH THIS NEGOTIATION? 

If and when you are certain that someone has deliberately lied, you must decide whether to simply walk away from the negotiation or whether you have too much to lose by doing so. If you are willing to walk away on principle, your task is easy. You will decide whether or not to confront the liar and give voice to your emotions; then you will revert to your BATNA. Often, however, it is not easy to walk away.

QUESTION 3: DO I NEED TO WARN THEM OR CONFRONT THEM? 

If you would like to continue the negotiation, you probably should not scream “Liar!” Instead, you need a strategy that allows you to signal that you are aware of the lie, while also giving the other side the opportunity to save face. There are two ways of doing so; the strategy you choose depends on what you are trying to accomplish. If you are not particularly upset about the lie, but want to discourage your counterpart from lying in the future, you should use a “warn” script. If the lie was more egregious, and you want to extract an apology or concession in exchange for your willingness to continue negotiations, you should use a “confront” script. Here is how each of these strategies sounds:

Warn Script: “You mentioned that the cost of these materials is $1.05 per unit. I think that you may need to check your data. We have strong ties with a number of suppliers and are certain that the cost is $0.90. Perhaps you are working with old data or weremisinformed along the way. In any case, let’s try to be more careful about facts and figures as we go forward with this deal.”

Confront Script: “You mentioned that the cost of these materials is $1.05 per unit. I feel the need to point out to you that, unlike some of your other customers, we have strong ties with a number of suppliers. Because of this, we know when someone is inflating costs.
For example, the cost of the materials in question is actually $0.90. We have been negotiating in good faith with you and are taking part in this negotiation to create value for both sides. But we are now a little uneasy about the way in which you have negotiated with us. Perhaps there is a simple explanation for the discrepancy in our numbers; perhaps you were misinformed. But I would just like to make you aware that we are disappointed with this exchange. Can you help us understand your perspective and suggest some way for us to overcome the anxiety we are now feeling?”

As you will notice, the second script contains much stronger language and also implies the need for an apology or concession. In some instances, it may even be appropriate for you to ask for a specific concession as reparation. You will also notice that both scripts provide an opportunity for the other side to save face. This is critical if you have already decided that you wish to continue the negotiation or the relationship.

It is often tempting—but not always judicious—to retaliate quickly when you feel you have been deceived. Negotiation geniuses take the time to evaluate whether the other side might have been misinformed or had considered their behavior to be appropriate to the context. They also keep an eye on their own interests, which may require a response that is powerful enough to fix the problem but controlled enough to allow the other side some room to navigate.

SMART ALTERNATIVES TO LYING 

Lies and deception do not simply emanate from those sitting on the other side of the table. How often do we say things in negotiations (and in everyday life) that we know are not the most precise versions of the truth? How often do we say things that are ambiguous, and that we hope will conceal the truth to our benefit? Obviously, ethical questions surround this issue—and most people we know wish that they were more honest and ethical. If you are one of these people, the strategies that follow will help you. But even if you have no interest in being more ethical, there are reasons for you to heed this advice. For lies are not only potentially unethical; they are also, very often, poor strategy.
Most negotiators have at some point felt the pain of being trapped by their own lies. Consider what happens if you are willing to pay up to $15,000 for a purchase, but during the negotiation, you strenuously argue that you “cannot pay a dollar more than $13,000.” As negotiations continue, you eventually discover that the other side will accept nothing less than $14,000. In other words, your “final offer” does not fall in the ZOPA. What will you do now? Unfortunately, you must either walk away from the deal (which could have been consummated at a price between $14,000 and $15,000) or admit that you were lying about your reservation value. Or consider what happens when, during a negotiation, you pretend that you value an issue greatly, when in fact you place very little value on it.

Your hope is that by overstating its value to you, you will be able to extract greater concessions in return for giving it up. But what if the other side gives in to you on that issue? You may end up with something you do not really value, while the other side waits for you to reciprocate on other issues. Whether your motivation is to improve your own character or to reduce the costs associated with ill-conceived lies, the strategies that follow will help you negotiate more honestly without putting you at a disadvantage against others who are dishonest, corrupt, or—more likely—complex individuals with virtues and vices just like you.

STRATEGY 1: INCORPORATE REPUTATION AND RELATIONSHIP COSTS IN YOUR CALCULUS 

When we ask our MBA students whether it is acceptable to lie in negotiations to get what you want, a disappointingly large minority says that it is. When we ask our executive students the same question, very few (if any) say that lying is acceptable. In large part, this difference in perspective is attributable to the fact that our executive students have many more years of negotiation experience than our MBA students. They have witnessed and experienced the consequences of negotiating in bad faith. Whether they have learned from their own experiences or those of others in their organizations and industry, they have discovered how easy it is to destroy a relationship or a reputation—and how hard it is to build these up again.
Unfortunately, most negotiators are myopic; they do not see past the current deal or the current relationship. Those who do adopt a more long-term perspective find it much easier to be truthful and honest—even if this costs money in the short run—because the long-term payoff is worth it.

STRATEGY 2: PREPARE TO ANSWER DIFFICULT QUESTIONS 
One of the biggest reasons people lie in negotiation is that they do not know how to answer tough questions. Caught off guard, and worried that they will say something that puts them at a disadvantage, they opt to lie. You can learn to avoid this reaction. Those who anticipate the tough, probing questions the other side will ask can prepare truthful responses that will not hurt them. Consider these two responses to the question that a potential employer might ask a candidate who has no other job offers:

“Do you have any other job offers?”

Unprepared Response: “Yes, I do. I have a few other offers that I am considering.”

Prepared Response: “No, this is the only offer that I currently have. But I only recently sent out my resumes, and I have many interviews scheduled.”

A job candidate is more likely to resort to the first response (a lie) when he or she is unprepared.
When someone asks you about your other job offers, your likely immediate reaction is to worry that having none makes you seem desperate; the most obvious way to avoid this perception is to lie. But such lies are very risky. If the employer probes further about these other offers, your lie may be discovered. The prepared response not only avoids the lie, but also mitigates the perception that you are desperate.

STRATEGY 3: TRY NOT TO NEGOTIATE OR RESPOND TO QUESTIONS WHILE UNDER TIME PRESSURE 

Regardless of how prepared you are, there will be times when a question catches you off guard.
What to do? To the extent possible, avoid answering the question until you have had an opportunity to think more carefully about your response. This is not as difficult or awkward as it sounds. There is usually nothing wrong with making one of the following statements:

• “I don’t have that information with me, but I’m sure I can get it for you later today.”
• “That’s an interesting question. I’ll have to think about the answer and get back to you.”
• “I’ve never been asked that before. I could try to give you a partial answer right now. But if it’s okay with you, I’d like to take some time to find out our company’s stance on that issue and give you a more complete response later.”

Another way to avoid answering tough questions under time pressure is to structure your negotiation differently. For example, you may have some preliminary discussions aimed at raising difficult questions over e-mail; this will give you the opportunity to respond at your own pace.
Similarly, instead of negotiating by phone (which may make you feel compelled to answer questions immediately), you could set up an informal lunch meeting where you would feel less pressure to answer every question as soon as it is “your turn” to speak.

STRATEGY 4: REFUSE TO ANSWER CERTAIN QUESTIONS 

You do not need to answer every question that your counterpart asks. If he asks you to reveal your reservation value, for example, you should not feel compelled to answer. Suppose that the other party asks, “What’s the lowest price you will accept for this shipment?” One way to respond, and to defuse the awkward moment with humor, is to say: “I think you already know the answer—it happens to be the most you are willing to pay for it!” More generally, it is often acceptable to respond to a question that you do not wish to answer with one of the following remarks:

• “This is a discussion that we can have later on, once we have both committed to the deal. I don’t feel comfortable divulging this in formation at the moment.”
• “As you undoubtedly understand, we cannot share that information for strategic reasons.”
• “The answer to your question depends on many other factors that we need to discuss.”

STRATEGY 5: OFFER TO ANSWER A DIFFERENT QUESTION 

If you feel uncomfortable about refusing to answer a direct question, you can mitigate your unease by offering to answer a different, related question. Here, the idea is to be up front about your inability or unwillingness to respond to the specific question, then to offer a concession by providing other useful information. For example, if someone asks you to tell them the production cost of the goods you are selling, and you are tempted to lie in order to secure a higher margin, you can instead say the following: “Unfortunately, I’m not at liberty to divulge specific cost information, but I can appreciate why you’re asking for it. You want to make sure that you’re getting a high-value product for the price you’re paying. Well, let me provide you with some information that will give you that confidence. I can share a lot of specific information regarding our production process and some information regarding our pricing model.”

By providing information that the other side values, and which does not put you at a disadvantage, you serve multiple purposes simultaneously: you avoid lying, you give them information that is of value to them, you appear reasonable and forthcoming, and you make it more likely that a deal will be consummated.

STRATEGY 6: CHANGE REALITY TO MAKE THE TRUTH MORE BEARABLE 

Why, fundamentally, are human beings tempted to lie? We often lie because reality is not what we want it to be. Returning to our job interview story, the candidate is tempted to lie because reality (having no offers) differs from what he desires (having multiple offers). We earlier resolved this dilemma with the following “prepared response”:

Prepared Response: “No, this is the only offer that I currently have. But I only recently sent out my resumes, and I have many interviews scheduled.”

But what if the candidate does not even have any interviews scheduled? Worse yet, what if all of the resumes he sent out have already been rejected? Must he now reveal his desperation by telling the truth? Is “No, this is the only offer that I currently have” the only truthful response?

Not quite. If the candidate can change the reality of the situation before he is asked the tough question, he has another option. For example, the day before his one-and-only interview, the candidate might send out another dozen resumes to another set of companies. Then, during his interview, he can truthfully respond to the employer’s question as follows:

Changed-Reality Response: “No, this is the only offer that I currently have. But I only recently sent out a dozen resumes and am looking forward to hearing back from those companies in the next few weeks.”

With this response, the candidate is able to be truthful because he has made lying unnecessary.
More generally, when you are tempted to lie or to deceive, take some time to think about why you feel the need to portray a false reality. Is it because you are embarrassed or ashamed of your situation? If so, can you do something to change your reality instead of lying about it?

STRATEGY 7: ELIMINATE CONSTRAINTS THAT TEMPT YOU TO LIE 

Dan, a manager at a large consumer-products firm, was asked by his VP to submit a detailed annual budget request for his department. Unfortunately, Dan had an incentive to overstate anticipated costs;in the event of cost overruns, it would be useful to have a little surplus to fall back on. His department’s projected costs for the coming year were close to $14 million, but Dan instead submitted a report with cost estimates totaling $16 million. Of course, the managers of other departments in the firm had similar incentives to lie about (or “inflate”) their cost estimates. As a result, the company’s total budget exceeded the amount earmarked for departmental budgets. Without an accurate understanding of who needed how much money, the VP did his best to apportion the funds efficiently. Not surprisingly, some departments received less than they needed and others ended up with much more. Those that got the most (including Dan’s department) felt compelled to spend the surplus money frivolously in order to justify their initial demands.
Consider a possible solution to this problem. Dan’s least predictable costs each year were related to the hiring of subcontractors. The budget request was due in February, but many of the subcontractors could not be hired until March. If Dan had asked the VP to be allowed to submit a second, revised budget a month later, and if the VP had agreed, he would not have had to lie in the first place. Instead, Dan could have used the extra time to gather more precise cost estimates, thereby eliminating the need to inflate his figures.

Often, our own honesty (and that of others whom we label unethical) is constrained by rules, policies, time pressures, and incentive systems. It is fine to argue that a “truly” ethical person would be honest despite these constraints. Nonetheless, it behooves us—and our organizations—to try to create the kinds of environments that encourage rather than discourage truthful and honest behavior.

DO NEGOTIATION GENIUSES EVER LIE? 

We have both been asked (often!) whether it is okay to lie in negotiation—or, in a variant of the same question, when is it okay to lie in negotiation? Our answer is very simple. Don’t do it. Don’t ever lie.
Lying is not worth the costs. Instead, spend your time and energy honing your skills as an effective negotiator. It is our belief that negotiation geniuses do not feel the need to lie. Of course, a philosophical question remains: is it okay to lie if the lie would help others, save lives, or make someone feel good? In our experience, you do not need help answering this question. If your motives are genuinely benevolent—and are not in the least self-serving—your answer to the question will be at least as good as ours.

CHAPTER 10: Recognizing and Resolving Ethical Dilemmas 

THE PROBLEM OF BOUNDED ETHICALITY 

Many (and perhaps most) of the unethical behaviors in which people engage during negotiations result from ordinary, unintentional psychological processes, not from deliberate —or even conscious— deception. In Chapter 8, we used the term “bounded awareness” to refer to the systematic failure of negotiators to see readily available and important information in their environment. In his work with Mahzarin Banaji and Dolly Chugh, Max also uses the term “bounded ethicality” to refer to the systematic and predictable psychological processes that lead people, including negotiators, to engage in ethically questionable behaviors that are inconsistent with even their own preferred ethics.
Bounded ethicality comes into play when a negotiator acts in a manner that harms others and that clashes with his or her own conscious beliefs about right and wrong.
The first step in understanding the power of bounded ethicality is to discard the common assumption that the seemingly unethical behavior you observe suggests that the other party lacks your high ethical standards, or that they have consciously chosen self-rewarding behavior over what they believe to be right. In recent years, research in social psychology has thoroughly debunked the notion that all human behavior is intentional and has underscored the powerful impact of the unconscious mind on our actions.

The second critical step is to understand that the problem of bounded ethicality does not only affect others. You, too, are vulnerable. If behaving ethically is genuinely one of your objectives, you need to understand the ways in which an honest person such as yourself might act unethically without conscious awareness. You may think that you are doing nothing wrong, while at the same time acting in ways that fall short of your own ethical standards. Because your morality isn’t the problem, your moral compass will not help you at such times. Rather, the solution is to increase your awareness of the psychological pitfalls that bedevil even the most well-intentioned and ethical negotiators. In this chapter, we will show you how various factors can lead you and your negotiating partners to behave unethically—without conscious awareness—and how you can correct such behavior.

CONFLICTS OF INTEREST 

When people talk about conflicts of interest, they usually assume that professionals consciously consider these opposing forces (what’s good for them versus their professional obligations). Take, for example, the old lawyer joke, “It’s not whether you win or lose, it’s how long you play the game,” which implies that attorneys are primarily motivated to maximize their billable hours. However, when lawyers are paid by the hour, they may truly come to believe that their clients are best served by a thorough, time-intensive process, whereas lawyers whose clients pay them a percentage of a settlement may be more likely to believe that their clients are best served by a quick agreement. These beliefs are not conscious or deliberately unethical, but they are biased by circumstance. Or as Upton Sinclair once stated, “It is difficult to get a man to understand something when his salary depends upon his not understanding it.”

In buyer-seller negotiations, it is common for the seller to believe that she is selling a higherquality product than the buyer thinks he is buying. In fact, buyers often believe that the goods offered by different sellers are indistinguishable from each other, while the sellers view their own products as significantly better than those of other providers. Thus, when a salesperson says, “Sure, I will benefit if you buy our product, but I wouldn’t try to sell it to you if I didn’t believe it was the best product for you and your company,” she may well believe this statement. Yet substantial research tells us that the seller’s conflict of interest (being honest versus making the sale) can lead her to unconsciously view the world through a biased lens and to believe that her product is the very best option for you—even when that is not the case. When a seller claims that his products are the best on the market, and a prospective buyer believes that the products are indistinguishable from those of the competition, the buyer is likely to make sinister attributions about the seller’s ethics. When the discussion is over, the buyer assumes that the seller’s statements were indicative of unethical behavior when, in fact, the seller was falling prey to the psychological trap that Sinclair predicted.

THE PROBLEM OF AGENTS 

Conflicts of interest often become most problematic when agents are involved—whether the agents are investment bankers, lawyers, literary agents, real-estate agents, or some other type of third party with a stake in the negotiation’s outcome. Consider what happens when a real-estate agent advisesyou, the buyer, to raise your bid on a house even though your current bid is consistent with a rational assessment of the property’s value. Is the agent thinking only of her own commission? We would argue that she is probably not intentionally corrupt, but simply human, and therefore implicitly motivated to see the world in a way that maximizes her own returns from the deal. The agent can quickly think of past situations in which a buyer preferred to overpay rather than risk losing a house, or bitterly regretted not heeding the agent’s advice to overpay. On the other hand, it will be much harder for her to recall times when this was the wrong advice, even though this happened more frequently.

When you are planning to buy or sell a house, your agent will undoubtedly tell you that she is working in your best interest. But when we look at the situation objectively, it becomes clear that the agent is a third party in the transaction, one whose interests do not perfectly match those of her principal (the buyer or seller). The buyer who wishes to pay as little as possible and who is in no hurry to buy may have to deal with a well-intentioned agent who is paid more when the selling price is high and who would love to close the deal as soon as possible. Similarly, a seller may be in no rush to sell, yet her agent devotes considerable energy to persuading her that it is best to make a sale before the market cools down. What can be done about this problem?

Due to the failure of agents to act professionally in many domains, including auditing, investment banking, and real estate, both federal and state governments have stepped in to remedy the situation.

The most popular solution has been to implement rules mandating disclosure. The reasoning is that, if consumers understand that their advisers and agents have a conflict of interest, they can take the steps necessary to protect themselves. Are such remedies effective? Perhaps not. Consider that, in most states, real-estate agents for buyers and sellers are required to have their customers sign a disclosure statement clarifying that the agent will earn a percentage of any sales transaction. Most people sign the disclosure form and then never again consider the actual conflict of interest between buyer and agent. Instead, they truly believe that their agent is providing objective advice.

Furthermore, research suggests that disclosure could actually increase the problems that result from conflicts of interest. In a study conducted by decision researchers Daylian Cain, Don Moore, and George Loewenstein, participants playing the role of “adviser” were (in some cases) required to tell a participant playing the role of “client” that he had a vested stake in having the client believe that a commodity had a high value. As it turns out, this disclosure led “advisers” to feel more comfortable exaggerating their estimates; after all, “I already told them I was biased.” At the same time, the “clients” often believed that their advisers were more trustworthy if they had disclosed their conflict of interest. In other words, advisers would have been more honest, and clients would have been more cautious, if there had been no disclosure!

If disclosure will not help resolve this ethical dilemma, what are we to do? First, to the extent possible, try to solicit advice and expertise from people who do not have a stake in the outcome and who do not profit from manipulating your behavior or decisions. When this is not possible, try to collect additional information from outside sources that can serve as a reality check on the advice you have been given. For example, if the real-estate agent tells you that a particular property or region is worth investing in, solicit an outsider’s opinion by asking a different real-estate agent (a friend, an acquaintance, or a stranger whom you have not hired) whether this advice seems sound. Finally, bewilling to ask your agent to justify her analysis. Instead of taking her “expert opinion” at face value, try to discover what objective criteria or procedure she employed before making her claims. She may trust her “intuition,” but there is no reason that you should.

A final note: most of us view conflicts of interest as a genuine societal problem that must be remedied. We understand that conflicts of interest can contort people’s judgments. Yet we have trouble believing that they affect our own judgments. The truth is that none of us is immune. There is no good reason to believe that you will behave any differently from the agent, the auditor, the buyer, or the seller when you have conflicting motivations and interests. To avoid such unintended unethical behaviors, the first step is to recognize your own fallibility.

IMPLICIT ASSOCIATIONS AND STEREOTYPES 

Steve Barrett, the purchasing agent for his firm, had to choose between two landscaping companies to maintain the grounds of five different buildings. Company A had a long history in the area and offered fairly traditional services. Company B was newer and offered many more contemporary and innovative ideas. Company A was owned and represented in meetings by a white male; Company B was owned and represented by a Hispanic female. Barrett weighed the proven reliability of Company A against the contemporary image that his firm wished to convey. Almost every discussion and analysis led Barrett to believe that he should move into final negotiations with Company B. In the end, however, Barrett decided to go with his gut. He hired the older, more traditional firm.

A month later, Barrett was filling out some paperwork that asked him to report on diversity in the firm’s supplier relationships. Barrett didn’t mind filling out the forms, as he was a strong supporter of his firm’s view that women-and minority-owned companies should be seriously considered as contractors. As he checked the “Caucasian” and “male” boxes to indicate the ethnicity and gender of the owner of Company A, Barrett scanned the race and ethnicity of the finalists for his past dozen supply contracts. He noticed that women-and minority-owned companies were often finalists in his searches, but rarely got the contract. As he thought back, Barrett began to feel a bit guilty. In the end, however, he concluded that these suppliers were not yet fully competitive, though he hoped they would be in the near future. Barrett remained proud of his continued (and often vocal) support of equity and fairness in society and of his company’s aggressive affirmative-action policies.

Soon after the landscaping contract was signed, Barrett watched a segment of the TV show Dateline on NBC featuring Harvard psychologist Mahzarin Banaji that disturbed him. The segment was about the Implicit Association Test (IAT) on Harvard University’s website (http://implicit.harvard.edu). (We encourage readers to visit the website before reading further and to try one or two of the “tests.”) This website provides a set of exercises designed to identify unconscious racial and gender biases. With the landscaping episode on his mind, Barrett decided to take one of the tests to prove to himself that his decision had been unbiased.

The first set of items on the test that Barrett selected asked him to categorize photographs of Hispanics and European-Americans as quickly as possible. Using computer keys as described on the site, Barrett identified faces as either “Hispanic” or “white.” In the next test, he was asked to identify words that appeared on the screen as positive (i.e., “good”) or negative (i.e., “bad”). Barrett had notrouble classifying words such as “nice,” “love,” and “peace” as “good” and classifying words such as “death,” “devil,” and “bomb” as “bad.”

In the next stage, these two tests were merged. Now Barrett was asked to hit one key if a Hispanic face or a “good” word appeared on the screen. He was to hit a different key if a white face or a “bad” word appeared. This task proved to be more complicated; Barrett found himself making a few errors and responding considerably slower than he had in previous tasks.

After thirty words or photos had appeared, the task changed. Now Barrett was asked to use one key to identify either a Hispanic face or a “bad” word and to hit a different key to identify either a white face or a “good” word. Barrett was pleased that he was able to complete this task very accurately and quickly.

As he had expected, the computer confirmed that Barrett’s responses for the second combined set of words and faces were much faster than his responses for the first combined set. It appears that Barrett processed information and completed tasks more quickly when white faces were associated with “good” and Hispanic faces were associated with “bad” than when Hispanic was associated with “good” and white with “bad.” As a result, the computer suggested to Barrett that he showed an implicit association between “Hispanic” and “bad” and between “white” and “good.” Although he didn’t consciously endorse such a preference, Barrett’s implicit attitudes seemed to favor whites over Hispanics. Were these implicit associations connected to his landscaping decision? If the company owned by the white male had been the one that was newer but more innovative, would Barrett have concluded that innovation was a more critical factor than experience? Would he have found a way to justify hiring the white male anyway? Barrett was unsettled by the results of the study and what they might imply.

Most of us, including those who perceive ourselves to be liberal and non-discriminating on the basis of race and gender, may be unaware of our implicit associations. Typically, people are not only unaware of their implicit processes, but are also reluctant to believe that there can exist thought processes (which affect behavior!) that are inaccessible to them. So, consider what it could mean when a potential employer says in a negotiation, “When you work for us, you know you’re working for a company that treats all employees equally, regardless of race or gender.” One likely possibility is that the employer believes her statement, but that she and other members of her firm nonetheless discriminate through their implicit thought processes.

Humans tend to stereotype people from groups other than our own, often without conscious awareness. Stereotyping consists of identifying a key feature that is perceived to describe some members of a group, applying these descriptions to all members of the group, and failing to notice the uniqueness of specific group members. Clearly, a major drawback of stereotyping is that it can lead people to become prejudiced and to behave unkindly toward members of other groups. It can also lead us to overlook important information about the individual, causing us to behave in ways that are inappropriate, uninformed, or irrational given what the other person is really like. One result of stereotyping is that our own negotiated outcomes tend to suffer. Dolly Chugh, of the Stern School of Business at NYU, refers to this as the stereotype tax, the price we pay for not overcoming our stereotypes of others. In other words, our stereotypes not only hurt other people, they can also hurt us.

Unfortunately, many negotiation texts encourage you to stereotype your negotiation opponent. Such books promote stereotypic and overly simplistic advice on how to negotiate with the Chinese, the Japanese, South Americans, Israelis, and so on. While it is critically important that you learn as much as possible about cultural norms before you enter into cross-cultural negotiations, it is dangerous to negotiate with “them” as if they are all the same. We readily identify variation in the way that people from our own culture behave, but we too easily accept stereotypes about people from other countries and cultures. Too often, these stereotypes lead negotiators to act as if they already know a great deal about the other side, when they could learn much more by entering the negotiation with an open mind and searching for individuating information—or, better yet, by preparing in advance, by asking questions, and by trying to learn about the perspective, personality, and diverse interests of the other party.

We most commonly think about stereotyping based on obvious differences such as race, gender, nationality, and so on. Yet it’s also possible to form stereotypes about specific companies and their negotiating styles that lead us to snap judgments about how a particular company “thinks.” Of course, companies don’t think; people do, and individuals within a specific company differ. When negotiating with different members of the same organization, we, too, often treat these individuals as a single actor—even as we recognize the diversity of thought and opinion within our own organization. Have you ever started a conversation with a representative of a phone company—or an airline—in a heated manner because you had a previous conversation with a representative of that company who was unhelpful and rude? How did that work out for you? Probably not well.

So, when Steve Barrett chose to hire a traditional landscaping company owned by a white male rather than an innovative firm owned by a Hispanic female, was he aware of his implicit attitudes and the degree to which he was showing a preference for those who were a lot like him? Probably not.

Becoming a more ethical, effective negotiator requires that we not only confront our intentional biases, but also seek to understand our implicit preferences. Negotiation geniuses are not unbiased people. Rather, they are people who confront their biases and do as much as they can to overcome or offset them.

PARASITIC VALUE CREATION 

Pharmaceutical Firm X manufactures a beneficial drug and is selling 100 million pills per year at a price of $4.05 per pill. The manufacturing cost is $0.05 per pill, so the drug is earning Firm X $400 million per year. After a period of time, Pharmaceutical Firm Y introduces a drug that treats the same ailment. Best estimates suggest that this competition from Y will lead X to reduce the price of its drug by about $1, to $3.05. Furthermore, Y is expected to capture 40 percent of the market by charging an even lower price of $2.55 per pill. In other words, X is expected to sell 60 million pills for a $180 million profit per year, and Y is expected to sell 40 million pills for a $100 million profit per year.

After Y’s entry into the market, X’s and Y’s combined profitability ($280 million) will be significantly less than the $400 million that X was earning as a monopolist.

Fortunately, the chief negotiator for Firm X has taken a course on negotiation and value creation and has mastered the ideas presented in Chapters 2 and 3 of this book. He approaches Y’s chiefnegotiator with the following offer: What if X were to pay Y $125 million annually to stay out of the market? Because $125 million is more than the $100 million that Y expects to earn, Y would be better off financially if it did not compete with X in this market. X would also be better off, since its current $400 million profit minus a $125 million payment to Y would exceed the $180 million profit it expects if Y enters the marketplace.

This solution seems perfect, doesn’t it? By working together, X and Y have expanded the pie and created $120 million in value. Let the celebrations begin!

But wait a minute. Where did that “created” value come from? Unfortunately, it came from the ailing consumers who must now continue paying $4.05 per pill rather than $2.55 or $3.05, the approximate amounts they would pay if Y brought its product to market. In other words, the $120 million was not really created; it was just transferred from consumers to producers. Because such agreements restrain competition, the U.S. Federal Trade Commission (FTC)—along with similar entities in other countries—considers them illegal. If such agreements were allowed, X and Y could collude to create value at the expense of consumers. James Gillespie and Max Bazerman use the term parasitic value creation to describe what occurs when negotiators create value by taking value away from parties who are not at the bargaining table.6 We think that the word “parasitic” is appropriate because the benefits that the negotiators achieve come at the expense of others.

Since this type of agreement is clearly illegal, and Firm X could not have approached Firm Y with the kind of offer we described, let’s consider how parasitic value creation might actually play out in the real world. What might it look like? In a variation of the scenario described above, the FTC sued pharmaceutical companies Schering-Plough and Upsher-Smith, accusing them of reaching an agreement that restricted trade. Before the FTC lawsuit was filed, Upsher-Smith was planning to introduce a generic pharmaceutical product that would threaten Schering-Plough’s dominant product (K-Dur 20, a potassium supplement). Schering-Plough tried to stop Upsher-Smith’s entrance into the marketplace by filing a lawsuit that accused Upsher-Smith of violating Schering-Plough’s patent. The two pharmaceutical firms reached an out-of-court settlement that specified that Upsher-Smith would delay its entry into the market and that Schering-Plough would pay Upsher-Smith $60 million for five unrelated products.

The FTC lawsuit against the pharmaceutical firms argued that the $60 million was a sham payment for the market delay, intended not as fair compensation for the five products but rather to keep Upsher-Smith’s generic product off the market. The pharmaceutical firms’ lawyers argued that negotiating multiple issues simultaneously (combining the settlement of the pending litigation with the transaction involving five other products) helped create value and was beneficial to society. They even hired a well-known negotiation expert to testify that value creation was good for society.

We know this case well because Max was on the other side, serving as an expert witness for the FTC. Max’s view, then and now, was that parasitic value creation had occurred: the companies created value for themselves, with no apparent concern for the harmful effects of their actions on consumers and, more broadly, on society. In Max’s opinion, the five patents simply provided a cover story. Sadly, many of the negotiation exercises conducted in training seminars implicitly encourage students to engage in parasitic value creation. In one common simulation, students represent firms in an industry that has few players. Across a number of rounds, each firm must decide whether to charge a high or low price. When one firm charges a high price and the other firm charges a low price, the low-price firm picks up market share and wins at the expense of the high-price firm. Yet the game is set up so that both parties would be better off if they both charged high prices. Such exercises are based on the well-known prisoners’ dilemma problem, in which players are individually better off playing a noncooperative strategy (setting a low price), but collectively better off playing a cooperative strategy (setting a high price). In such simulations, instructors praise the students who figure out how to develop a pattern of mutually high prices that lead to successful value creation for both firms. Given what we know about parasitic value creation, it is troubling that much of this training occurs without any consideration of where the extra profit comes from—the consumer!

When we use the term “parasitic value creation,” we do not mean to insult most value-creating agreements, nor are we objecting to companies charging whatever prices the market will bear. Most of the time, value creation should be allowed even when it will impose costs on parties who are away from the table. For example, we view the U.S. pharmaceutical industry as one of the great success stories of the past century. If these firms hadn’t achieved healthy profits, many drugs that save lives, reduce the need for surgery, and relieve pain would not exist.
On the other hand, any analysis that focuses only on the profits of coordinating pharmaceutical firms and ignores the harm done to consumers would be incomplete—and possibly unethical. We believe that these companies (and their negotiators) should consider, in much the same way antitrust laws ask firms to consider, whether they are creating societal value or simply helping each other extract as much money as possible at the expense of the consumer or other stakeholders. When your negotiations will affect people who are not seated at the table, such as consumers or future generations, make sure that your ethicality is not bounded by the unintentional exclusion of these parties’ concerns.
How can you judge whether the value you create in your negotiation benefits society? One criterion would be to call value creation socially beneficial when the value created for the parties at the table exceeds the costs imposed on outsiders; in such cases, while some of the value created may result from parasitic value creation, the overall result is still a net benefit to society. More generally, to remain alert to the potentially parasitic aspects of your value creation, we recommend that you ask the following questions:

• Who are all of the parties affected by this agreement?
• How is each party affected?
• Should I be concerned about any of these parties?
• How do the effects of the agreement on parties not at the table compare with the effects on the parties involved in the agreement?

We close this section with a political note. One legal, yet disturbing, example of parasitic value creation concerns the role of special-interest groups in elections. In the United States, special-interest groups, including corporations and nonprofit organizations, contribute large sums of money to political campaigns. Politicians, in turn, provide special-interest groups with access to the federal government and influence over policy. Politicians benefit, as the funds keep their campaign coffers full. And the vast sums that special-interest groups spend year after year on lobbying suggest that they are receiving a fine return on their investment. From a simple value-creation perspective, this negotiation achieves gain for all parties—unless you happen to be an average citizen without a powerful lobby! Ideally, elected officials would implement wise policy for everyone, rather than enacting distorted policies that benefit special-interest groups at the expense of the broader public.

Then again, for the many reasons we have already covered in this chapter on bounded ethicality, we fear that few, if any, politicians or lobbyists are having a hard time sleeping at night. They have lots of ways to justify their behaviors and little incentive to question their profitable strategies.

OVERCLAIMING CREDIT 
After twelve years of marriage, Jim and Karen have decided to divorce. Fortunately, they are both nice people, and have agreed to divide their assets fairly and to avoid conflict that could negatively affect their two children. They hire a divorce mediator, who asks both Jim and Karen to tell her privately how the financial assets should be divided.

“I think I deserve 60 percent of the assets,” Jim tells the mediator. “In the first year of our marriage, I received a very large inheritance from an uncle that helped us out a lot. We wouldn’t have been able to afford the down payment on our house if it wasn’t for that money. So, I think I deserve a bit more than Karen.”

Next, the mediator meets privately with Karen, who also believes that 60–40 is the correct division of assets, but not in favor of Jim. “I think I should get 60 percent and Jim should get 40 percent. After all, I’ve earned almost twice as much as Jim over the past twelve years.”

Is Jim being greedy? Is Karen? Are they both arguing for more than they honestly believe that they deserve? Has the divorce affected their ethics for the worse? More likely, as a result of egocentrism (described in Chapter 5), they genuinely believe that they have contributed more to the marriage than is actually the case.

Overclaiming credit can hinder the implementation and progress of a variety of joint ventures, from start-up companies to marriages. Because we tend to make self-serving attributions regarding our behaviors, even honest, well-meaning people are likely to believe that they contributed more to an enterprise than they actually did and then to make moral judgments about those who disagree with them. This serves to fuel the conflict. So, when your colleague argues, “My sales team deserves 70 percent of the credit for the corporation’s success over the last two years,” accept the fact that she probably believes this statement is true even if you are sure it is not. If pushed, she can probably find some data or logic (however frivolous it may seem to you) that supports her claim.Even at a societal level, overclaiming can inflict great harm. Across the globe, overharvesting has devastated once-thriving fisheries. Many fisheries have collapsed, and considerable uncertainty surrounds the question of when and how they will be brought back to a sustainable level. A significant part of the problem can be traced to the fact that different fishing groups all believe they are only taking their “fair share” of the resource.

How can you control your own natural psychological tendency to overclaim? Max and his colleagues Nick Epley and Eugene Caruso recently asked one group of MBA students from a prestigious program to estimate the percentage of work they personally completed in their study groups. On average, the claims made by members of each group, when added together, totaled 139 percent. Of course, there is only 100 percent to go around. However, the researchers found that the tendency to overclaim diminished when they asked group members to “unpack” the contributions of others—that is, when they asked group members to think about the contribution of each other member, not just their own contribution. Overclaiming did not disappear entirely, but it did drop by about half; consciously and explicitly thinking about the contributions that each person had made reduced the magnitude of the bias. If you want to diminish the tendency of your group or team members to overclaim credit or contribution, one way to do so is to get them to focus not only on what they have done, but on what each individual, considered one at a time, has done as well.

PUTTING IT TO PRACTICE 

Most discussions of ethics in negotiation focus on your intentional choices—whether or not it is okay to lie, to hide information, and so on. In this chapter, we have stressed that negotiators are often not even aware that they are engaging in ethically questionable behavior. Furthermore, the busier people are, the more they will rely on automatic thought processes, and the more likely it is that they will engage in ordinary unethical behaviors. Unfortunately, most negotiators are busy people for whom negotiating is just one of the many tasks that they must accomplish each day. To make matters worse, there is already a lot to think about when negotiating: how to create and claim value, how to be a good investigative negotiator, how to defend against strategies of influence, et cetera. How can a negotiator do all of this and still avoid falling back on the kinds of automatic processes that lead to ordinary unethical behaviors?

Our perspective on bounded ethicality yields specific advice for managing your own ethical behavior and for understanding and managing the behavior of others. In terms of your own behavior, some important steps include:

1. If you are in a situation where you have a conflict of interest, become extra vigilant. To the extent possible, try to eliminate the source of the conflict (e.g., by recusing yourself from decisions in which you have a conflict of interest).

2. Be aware of the possibility that you may be discriminating against others unconsciously. Taking the IAT tests (mentioned earlier) may help you appreciate this natural tendency. Then, be proactive and take steps to offset your proclivity for selectively rewarding those whom you implicitly favor.

3. Whenever you feel that you have created value, try to analyze where exactly that value is coming from. Is anyone being made worse off? Is this trade-off acceptable to you?

4. When allocating credit, be careful not to give yourself too much credit—or to give too much credit to those whom you like.

Specifically, be wary of the tendency to overweight those factors and inputs on which you perform strongly and that make you look good.
You can also use your understanding of bounded ethicality to better understand your negotiation counterparts and to develop better relationships with them. Here, we offer three guidelines for leveraging your knowledge to this end:

1. Audit the claims of your counterparts and look for unintentional biases.

2. Accept the fact that they may be unaware of their bounded ethicality. They may not notice that they are biased or that they are being parasitic in their efforts to create value. Avoid sinister attributions. When someone makes a statement that you do not believe, or “creates” value at the expense of others, avoid labeling him a liar or a thief. Instead, help him see the causes and consequences of his judgments and behaviors.

3. Finally, if you are unable to help your counterpart revise his biased perspective, follow the advice in Chapters 6 and 9 to craft a response that takes his misperceptions into account. For example, when you believe a salesperson is overstating the quality of his product, rather than withdrawing from the discussion or accusing him of exaggeration, deal with this ordinary unethical behavior through the use of a contingency contract. Ask how the superior quality of his product can be measured, and attach payment to performance. If the salesperson was being intentionally deceptive, he will back off the claim. But if he is engaging in ordinary unethical behavior—and believes his exaggerated claim—he will accept the contingency clause (to your benefit).

CHAPTER 11: Negotiating from a Position of Weakness 

One of the questions that we hear most often from our students and clients—many of whom are seasoned dealmakers—sounds something like this: “The framework and strategies you have presented are great. They have helped us a lot. But what can you do when you have no power in the negotiation?
Can you get a great deal when the other side is holding all the cards?” When we ask our students and clients to explain their situation, we hear many versions of the same basic stories. Here are the most common:

STORY 1:
“In our business, potential customers constantly tell us that we have to lower our price, and that if we don’t lower it, they will go to our competitors. They do not seem to want to talk about anything other than price. And the fact of the matter is, they can go to our competitors and get what they want. How can we possibly negotiate a good deal in such situations?”

STORY 2:
“I recently received a job offer from a company that I would like to work for. The one big problem is that the compensation is not as good as I would like it to be. The other big problem is that my BATNA stinks. I have no other job offers, and I’m pretty desperate.
How can I negotiate a better deal for myself?”

STORY 3:
“I am involved in a dispute and the other side is threatening to sue. Their lawsuit is entirely frivolous, but if we go to court, they can continue to litigate until I go bankrupt. They have a lot of money and can easily afford a long court battle. What can I do?”

STORY 4:
“My country is a small player on the world stage. When it comes to negotiating economic or political international agreements, we are constantly being pushed around. More powerful countries overlook our interests, and we practically have to plead for what we most desperately need. Is there some way to improve our position?”

As these stories demonstrate, weakness in negotiation results when the other side’s BATNA is relatively strong and your BATNA is relatively weak. Have you ever felt trapped in suchpredicaments? How did you respond? In our experience, most people in such situations either panic or quickly accept the futility of trying to negotiate away their misfortune. Few actually do what it takes to negotiate effectively and to improve their outcomes. We have also noticed that those who do think carefully and systematically about such situations, and who do not abandon the negotiation framework developed in this book, are often able to achieve outstanding results in the face of seemingly impossible odds.
In this chapter, we will help you to understand the secrets of these negotiation geniuses. We will first present strategies that you can leverage even when you have little power. We will then share with you strategies for upsetting the balance of power—that is, how you can move from being weak to being strong in the negotiation.

NEGOTIATING WITHOUT POWER 

There is perhaps nothing that creates more anxiety for negotiators than the feeling of desperation that comes from having no good alternatives. The situation only worsens when you realize that the other side is not as anxious as you are to do the deal. Whether you are negotiating the specifics of your only job offer or a contract with the only vendor who can provide what you desperately need, knowing that “no deal” would be disastrous can place a lot of pressure on you. Unfortunately, this anxiety can cause you to give up the hope of creating or claiming value and to lose sight of the need to prepare and execute negotiations carefully and systematically. Instead, you begin to focus on getting a deal done at any cost. While it would be unfair for us to suggest that there is no reason to be concerned in such situations, it would also be unfair—and wildly inaccurate—to suggest that there is little you can do to improve your prospects. Consider the following strategies:

STRATEGY 1: DON’T REVEAL THAT YOU ARE WEAK 

Think back to the story we presented in Chapter 1, in which President Roosevelt’s campaign manager was negotiating with a photographer over how much to pay for the use of three million copies of a photograph. The problem was that the campaign had already printed the three million copies, and the photographer (who owned the copyright to the photograph) had the legal right to charge $1 per copy. The campaign manager’s BATNA was very weak: if an agreeable price could not be negotiated, they would have to throw away the pamphlets or face litigation. Neither of these eventualities came to fruition. Not only did the campaign manager secure the right to use the photograph, but the photographer even offered to pay $250 to consummate the deal.
The key to the campaign manager’s success: the campaign manager’s position was weak, but the photographer did not know that it was weak. Had the photographer known that three million copies of the photograph had already been printed, he would have known that he was in the position of power and could negotiate a more profitable deal.
The obvious lesson: having a weak BATNA is not terribly problematic if the other side does not know that your BATNA is weak. If you have a weak BATNA, don’t advertise it!
Surprisingly enough, many people do not heed this advice; in fact, they often make their bad situation worse by unwittingly revealing the weakness of their BATNA. You do this whenever you tell your customer that “time is of the essence” or that “we can meet with you whenever you have the time.” Often, it is important to convey that you are facing time constraints or that you have a flexible schedule. But you can send the same messages without making your desperation transparent. For example, you might say that “one of our preferences is to move ahead quickly” or that “we have some flexibility with regards to meeting with you.” When you are under pressure and focused on the weakness of your BATNA you may need to remind yourself to use this less revealing language.

STRATEGY 2: OVERCOME YOUR WEAKNESS BY LEVERAGING THEIR WEAKNESS 

Recently, an executive student came to Deepak for help with a negotiation. He was attempting to sell his 50 percent stake in a company to his business partner, who controlled the other 50 percent.
The seller (Deepak’s student) was focused on the desperation of his situation: he needed liquidity very soon, and his partner was the only viable buyer of his shares. The first thing the seller wanted to discuss was the degree to which he should be willing to devalue his shares in order to make the deal happen. “How low should I be willing to go?” he asked.
Nowhere in his analysis was there a consideration of how much the shares might be worth to the business partner—that is, how high a price the buyer might be willing to pay. When Deepak began to probe in this direction, it became clear that the business partner had much to gain by buying out the seller: the buyer had a lot of money, he had long desired to take the company in new directions that the seller had resisted, and purchasing the shares would give the buyer full control over the company’s future. As the discussion continued, the student began to realize that he was not the only one who was “weak” the buyer was also weak, albeit for very different reasons. Focusing on these factors helped the seller to increase his target and change the trajectory of the negotiation. In his discussions with the buyer, he outlined the many benefits to the buyer of making this purchase, downplayed his own desperation, and anchored aggressively in his opening offer. What was the eventual outcome? The two sides agreed to a deal in which the student sold only 40 percent of the company back to his partner—at a total price that was higher than he had originally hoped to receive for his entire 50 percent.
This story highlights the distinction between negotiators who focus only on their own BATNA and those who evaluate the other side’s BATNA. If their BATNA is weak, that means that you bring a lot of value to the deal—and you should be able to claim some (or much) of that value. In other words, having a weak BATNA is not particularly problematic if the other side’s BATNA is weak as well.
Consider again the success of Roosevelt’s campaign manager. Imagine that the photographer had discovered that the campaign manager’s BATNA was very weak. Would that guarantee a good outcome for the photographer and a poor outcome for the campaign manager? Not necessarily— because the photographer’s BATNA was also weak! If there were “no deal,” the campaign would suffer the costs of reprinting three million pamphlets, but the photographer would also lose a huge (“once in a lifetime”) opportunity to get tremendous public exposure for his artistic work.

What typically happens when both sides are in a position of weakness? If you think back to the fundamental framework developed in Chapter 1, you will recognize that when both parties have a weak BATNA, it means that the ZOPA is large. In other words, a lot of value is created when the two sides reach an agreement. Who claims more of this value? Usually it is the one who understands thefundamentals and leverages the strategies we discussed in Chapter 1. In this case, the one who fares better is the one who makes the other side’s weakness more salient throughout the negotiation. By focusing on the photographer’s opportunity for publicity, the campaign manager was able to secure a great outcome for his side. Meanwhile, the photographer was so focused on the prospect of losing a great opportunity that he failed to consider the value that he could bring to the Roosevelt campaign.

STRATEGY 3: IDENTIFY AND LEVERAGE YOUR DISTINCT VALUE PROPOSITION 

Firms that bid for business (such as consulting firms, offshore services firms, quasi-commodity suppliers, construction and landscaping professionals, et cetera) often find themselves in a position of weakness. Here is a common complaint: “In our industry, our customers hold an auction for every deal. They solicit bids, and then accept the lowest one. There is no opportunity to create value by introducing multiple issues. Our customers tell us that we must lower our price further, otherwise they will go to our competitors.”

These negotiators are stuck bargaining over only one issue (usually price) in an arena where their competitors can compete effectively on the issue being discussed. Though these situations represent a very specific example of “weakness,” we devote special attention to them here because these are among the most common problems our students and clients face.

How can you create and claim value when your counterpart (typically, your customer) is only interested in discussing price? In many such situations, you can improve your prospects by changing the game you are being forced to play. Consider that, in negotiation, your ability to legitimately claim value is a function of your ability to create value. If you bring nothing to the other side that they cannot get elsewhere, then your offer is no better for them than their BATNA. In other words, the ZOPA is small or nonexistent. Why would they want to make a deal with you?

The good news is that, very often, you do bring something to the table that distinguishes you from your competitors. This is your distinct value proposition (DVP), and it need not be a lower price.

You may have a better product, a higher-quality service, a good reputation, a strong brand, or a host of other assets that your customer values and that you can provide more effectively or cheaply than your competitors. Keep in mind that your DVP is not just something you think your customer should value, but something they actually value. If you bring such value-adding elements to the deal, you have the possibility of using them to get what you want (for example, a higher margin, repeat business, et cetera). The key is to figure out how to make your DVP a factor in the negotiation. This can be difficult when you are stuck in a price-only auction, when the other side seems uninterested in discussing any issue other than price, or when the other side is not familiar with the principle of creating value by negotiating multiple issues. Fortunately, all of these obstacles are surmountable. The following four strategies can help you make your DVP a factor the next time you take part in a negotiation or auction:

Submit multiple proposals. It is not always possible to adequately gauge, prior to making an offer, whether the customer has any interests other than a low price. For this reason, bidders often wonder whether they should bid the lowest possible price or a slightly higher price that includesadditional features (such as a higher-quality product or additional services). Next time, try doing both! Instead of submitting one bid, consider making two or more bids simultaneously, a strategy that we initially described in Chapter 3. For example, one bid might be low on price and on service, while the other is somewhat higher on both. If the customer values service, they will appreciate knowing that they can get extra attention from your firm at an additional cost. This strategy will also increase your chances of submitting the winning bid: if they only value price, your low bid will be competitive; if they value other features, your higher bid will be competitive.

Lower your bid just enough to get into the second round. One reason why many companies use price-only auctions is that there are too many potential vendors from which to choose.
But not all auctions end with a signed contract. Often, the auction is designed simply to “narrow the field.” For example, a customer might invite ten or more firms to bid for a project, and then winnow the list down to the two or three firms with the lowest price bids. These candidates are then invited to engage in one-on-one negotiations. Our Harvard colleagues Guhan Subramanian and Richard Zeckhauser have coined the term negotiauction to describe this two-stage process.1 In such situations, you need not submit the lowest bid; rather, you should submit a bid that is low enough to pass the initial hurdle, and then try to create value when negotiating multiple issues with the customer.
Keep in mind that your customers may not necessarily “announce” a formal negotiauction (most will not have heard the term) or explain the rules ahead of time. But they may still proceed as though that is the process they are following. Moreover, many customers will be willing to discuss your multi-issue proposal even after the auction is over if you were a “low enough” bidder. As such, it is often a good idea to reach out to your customers after you have “lost” the auction to see if you are in a position to offer a package deal that they value.
One of our students recently described to us how his firm ended up on the losing end of this strategy. His firm was competing against five other firms who were all vying for the same prized customer. The customer held an auction and announced that two of the five firms would advance to the final round of negotiations. The student’s firm was one of the two to advance. “We were pretty excited,” recalled the student. “We knew how to position our firm in relation to this [one remaining] competitor, and we were confident that the deal was ours. But we lost the deal—to a competitor who had not even made it past the initial auction!” While our student and his colleagues were celebrating, the sales team of the third firm had gone back to the customer and made the case that they could provide the best package deal, despite how the auction had turned out.
Take the agent out of the game. A common complaint among negotiators who are forced to compete solely on price sounds something like this: “We are a high-value partner for our customer.
Unfortunately, the customer uses a purchasing agent to negotiate its deals, and this agent is compensated entirely based on how low a price she negotiates. The next thing we know, we’re stuck in an auction where the only thing that matters is who can provide the cheapest product. We lose—and the customer loses, too. The only winner is the purchasing agent!”Intermediaries such as purchasing agents—whose incentives are not always aligned with those who have hired them to negotiate on their behalf—constitute one of the biggest barriers to efficient dealmaking. But there are ways to keep such intermediaries from derailing your negotiation. Here are two strategies for doing so, based on the successful experience of our executive students and clients:

• Send a copy of your proposals to the customer. 

Some months ago, one of our students decided to try the strategy of submitting multiple proposals to the purchasing agent, and so he submitted a high-price/high-value offer and a low-price/low-value offer. His lo w-price offer was accepted. Some weeks later he discovered (in a conversation with the customer) that the customer had never even seen the high-price proposal! In other words, the agent had conveniently eliminated it from the “short list” that was submitted to the customer. Having learned from that experience, our student now makes a habit of sending to his customers (“as a courtesy”) a copy of any proposal he submits to the purchasing agent. “Even if the customer chooses not to look at the in formation I send,” explains our student, “the very fact that it’s sitting on the boss’s desk makes the purchasing agent think twice before he tries to disregard my high-value proposal.”

• Negotiate a post-settlement settlement with the customer. 

When our clients and executive students tell us that pressure from the agent is forcing them to sideline their distinct value proposition in an effort to lower the price, we often tell them not to worry.
Typically, purchasing agents exit the scene once they have served their purpose (albeit self-servingly) of choosing a vendor. If you really have the ability to create additional value for the customer (beyond cutting price), you will be in a strong position to pitch your proposition once you are dealing with the party that stands to benefit from “hearing you out.” In other words, don’t assume you are stuck with an inefficient agreement; if both sides can be made better off, you can always revise the agreement after you have won the deal.

• Educate your customers between deals. 

How often do you communicate with your customers (or potential customers) when there is no potential deal on the table? You might send your customers a holiday card once a year, but how often do you reach out to educate them about your ability to provide them with new sources of value? If you are like the vast majority of negotiators, you spend little (if any) time doing so. But if your customers do not understand your distinct value proposition, then that is exactly what you should be doing. It should come as no surprise that customers will value your input and insights most when they have the time to listen to you, when they are least concerned about cutting costs, and when they are under no pressure to commit to anything. These conditions are most often in place when there is no deal on the table—that is, when they are not likely to disregard your comments as an attempt to manipulate them. In the middle of an auction, time pressure, cost concerns, and pressure to make a final decision all work against you. But those who reach out to their customers (and potential customers) in between auctions have the possibility of building relationships, learning about their customers’ interests and, most important, making their DVP a factor in the next negotiation or auction. Most customers are willing to discuss these matters openly and will appreciate your desire to understand their needs. In at least a few cases that we know of, vendors were able to pre-empt their customers’ next auctions entirely; by signaling an interest in understanding and meeting the customers’ needs and negotiating multiple issues simultaneously, they were able to sign deals before they ever went to auction! This should not be too surprising: both sides stand to benefit by engaging in negotiations that extend beyond discussions of price. Sometimes all the customer needs is a little bit of encouragement—or education—to push him in the direction of his own self-interest.

STRATEGY 4: IF YOUR POSITION IS VERY WEAK, CONSIDER RELINQUISHING WHAT LITTLE POWER YOU DO HAVE 

Many years ago, when Deepak was a senior in college, he received a job offer from a consulting firm. Deepak loved the offer, with one exception: the salary was lower than he had hoped it would be. Deepak called the HR manager and asked whether salaries were negotiable. The HR manager told him that salaries were not negotiable, but offered to set up a lunch with the managing partner so that Deepak could discuss any issues that concerned him. At lunch, after an hour of pleasant conversation, the managing partner explained that the firm calculated starting salaries using a very simple formula in which only three factors mattered: the college the new hire had attended, his or her academic major, and prior work experience. Since they had already considered these factors, they could not increase Deepak’s salary.

Deepak knew that he had very little power in the negotiation: he had no better offer to use as leverage, and he estimated that “holding out for more” would result in little, if any, increase in salary.

He decided to try a different kind of strategy altogether.

Deepak responded by saying that he understood the partner’s perspective, that he really loved the firm, and that he would definitely accept the offer. Having said that, Deepak continued, would the partner be willing to continue the discussion regarding his salary? With the partner’s consent, Deepak made an extensive argument that boiled down to the following: he would bring more value to the firm than the simple formula suggested. He concluded by emphasizing that salary was not the most important issue to him—he had already accepted the offer because he was very excited about the opportunity to work at this firm—but that salary was nonetheless an issue, as it would be for any young person starting out in life. If there were any help that the firm could give him, it would be greatly appreciated.

The partner liked what he heard, and promised Deepak that he would at least give this perspective some thought. The following day, the partner called Deepak to tell him that the firm would give him a 10 percent increase in salary because they had “taken another look at his [summer] work experience and decided that it probably should have been given more weight in the first place.”

Was that really the reason for the raise? Deepak thinks that is unlikely. The more likely reason is a simple but significant insight regarding power: if you have very little power, you may be better off giving it up entirely. Put another way, if you can’t outmuscle the other side in a negotiation, you may want to stop flexing your muscles and, instead, simply ask them to help you. When negotiators try to leverage their power, others reciprocate. This pattern can be disastrous when you are the weaker party. But when you make it clear that you have no intention of fighting or negotiating aggressively, others may also soften their stance. Once the managing partner decided that he wanted to help Deepak, he simply needed to find a way to justify this decision. Once he found a way, Deepak got what he wanted.

STRATEGY 5: STRATEGIZE ON THE BASIS OF YOUR ENTIRE NEGOTIATION PORTFOLIO 

Max recently consulted with a firm in an industry where profit margins have fallen from about 20 percent to less than 5 percent over the last decade. This decline in margins has been due to an increase in new market entrants and to a growing perception among customers that the competitors inthe industry are interchangeable. In an attempt to learn about the firm and industry, Max asked the firm’s executives how often they simply refused to reduce their margins below 10 percent. In other words, how often did they risk losing the deal in hopes of earning a higher profit margin? The executives responded that the days were long gone when they could try to be so tough—they needed every dollar of revenue that they could get. Max then asked them to estimate what percentage of their business they would lose if they held out for 10 percent margins. Their estimate: at least 25 percent.

At that point, Max simply recommended doing some arithmetic: “If you double your margins [from 5 percent to 10 percent],” Max noted, “and you lose even 49 percent of your business, you are still better off in terms of overall profit.”
The results of this simple analysis came as a surprise to the executives. But their surprise is not, in fact, surprising. Too often, when negotiators are myopically focused on the current negotiation, the strategy they adopt is not an effective one for their portfolio of negotiations. If you had only one deal to negotiate, it would make sense for you to reduce your margins as much as necessary to win the deal; after all, any amount of money is preferable to no money at all (assuming that no money is what you will get by pursuing your BATNA). But because there are almost always multiple negotiations to consider, you need a strategy that makes sense for your entire portfolio of negotiations. If you are going to negotiate many deals with many different customers, you may be willing to lose some money in one negotiation (because you held out for a higher margin and lost the deal) in order to win even more money in another negotiation (because you held out for a higher margin and they accepted).
Better yet, if you can distinguish between those negotiators who will accept a higher margin and those who will not—and if you can justify charging different prices to different customers—you may be in a position to increase profits even further by charging higher margins only to those who can stomach it.
The key is to audit the implicit assumptions you make when formulating your negotiation strategy.
You may perceive yourself as being “weak” if you measure strength only as the ability to push hard in any given negotiation without losing the deal. But you may discover that you are actually quite “strong” once you begin to think about your ability to withstand losing some deals because you are maximizing the value of your entire negotiation portfolio. When you consider your entire portfolio, it is far easier to imagine taking bigger risks, keeping the clients for whom you can add the most value, and becoming more profitable.

UPSETTING THE BALANCE OF POWER 

Weakness is always frustrating, but perhaps never more so than when the other side acknowledges the value you create, but still pushes you around—simply because they are bigger and stronger and can do whatever they want. Maybe your largest customer thinks it has the right to make onerous lastminute demands or to ignore some of its contractual responsibilities. Or perhaps your competitor has decided to sue you for infringing on their patent—a case that has little merit, but that they can litigate to the hilt thanks to their deep pockets. If you want to stay in business, such bullies implicitly say, you will have to play by their rules. In some cases, small business owners are held hostage by their employees; their top salesperson might be rude, unprofessional, and overpaid, but if he leaves the firm and joins the competition, they will lose half of their business.
In each of these situations, your prospects seem bleak for two reasons. First, you are in a positionof weakness. Second, you are dealing with a person or an organization that is inconsiderate of your needs and entirely cavalier in the pursuit of their own self-interest. How might you negotiate in such instances? Begin by considering the various strategies we have outlined above for negotiating without power. If these are not sufficient, consider exercising a different, potentially powerful option: shifting the balance of power in your favor. As we will demonstrate, some negotiations require us not to improve our ability to play the game as it has been defined, but to change the nature of the game itself.
The following strategies will help you turn the tables on would-be bullies and achieve outcomes far superior to those you might otherwise expect.

STRATEGY 1: INCREASE YOUR STRENGTH BY BUILDING COALITIONS WITH OTHER WEAK PARTIES 

In their book Negotiating Rationally, Max Bazerman and Margaret Neale tell the story of how Lee Iacocca, then CEO of Chrysler, found a way to mitigate his company’s weakness by building a coalition with other weak parties: his U.S. competitors. In 1986, the three U.S. auto companies (General Motors, Ford, and Chrysler) were engaged in extremely unhealthy competition, as each tried to gain market share through the use of rebates. Each time one company announced a rebate, the other two rushed to raise their own rebate offer. Before long, the auto companies were losing money, on average, on every car they sold! Iacocca recognized that, because of this escalation problem, the automakers were in a very weak position vis-à-vis the consumer. He decided to put an end to this by announcing to the press that Chrysler would discontinue its rebate program—but that if either of the other two companies continued to offer rebates, Chrysler would match those rebates. This action by Chrysler helped to end the rebate war, stopped profit erosion in the industry, and returned all three U.S. automakers to profitability.
Why was Iacocca’s strategy effective? Because it shifted power away from buyers and toward sellers. When a company offers to match its competitors’ offers, this can turn out to be a very bad deal for consumers; such initiatives eliminate the incentive that competitors have to lower their prices (or offer rebates) to attract customers. As a result, the three U.S. automakers, which could no longer be pitted one against another on price alone, gained bargaining power.
You can use the same strategy—building coalitions with other weak parties—in your own negotiations. Consider that, when your customer has many other companies from whom he can purchase, you are in a weak position, but so is each of your competitors. When your boss has the option of hiring or firing you, you are in a weak position, but so is each of your coworkers. And when your country is small and has little voice in international negotiations, your country is in a weak position, but so are many other small countries. Fortunately for those who have little power in their negotiations, it is sometimes possible to shift the balance of power by aligning with these other weak entities.
For example, when bargaining with management, individual employees have often banded together to form unions. If a company were to negotiate with employees one at a time, it could credibly threaten to hire someone else if the employee’s demands were perceived as excessive. When employees bargain collectively, however, they avoid competing against one another. The result is typically an above-market wage for all employees. This process effectively shifts power and money from shareholders to employees. A similar rationale has led many small businesses in the United States to negotiate collectively with insurance companies in order to lower the cost of healthinsurance, and has led many small farmers in developing countries to form “cooperatives” that allow them to negotiate higher prices for the produce they take to market.
In the realm of international relations, a vivid example of the power of coalitions surfaced during the 2003 World Trade Organization negotiations in Cancún, Mexico. Disgruntled by the continued lack of attention paid to the issues of concern to developing nations (such as reducing agricultural tariffs and farm subsidies), twenty-one “weak” countries banded together to create the Group of 21.
This group is now in a much stronger position to negotiate for the interests of its members than any member nation would have been on its own.
In each of these examples, coalition building among weaker parties led to a weakening of the previously more powerful side’s BATNA. When you build—and are able to sustain—a coalition with other weak parties, you make it difficult for the other side to pit one weak party against another, or to credibly threaten to walk away from the deal.

STRATEGY 2: LEVERAGE THE POWER OF YOUR EXTREME WEAKNESS—THEY MAY NEED YOU TO SURVIVE 

In 1919, after the end of World War I, the leaders of the victorious Allied forces (most notably, the United States, Great Britain, and France) met in Paris to conduct many months of negotiations that would determine the fate of Europe and much of the rest of the world. Many of the countries affected by the war were invited to make appeals and arguments to the Allies regarding their fate. Most of these arguments pertained to the reshaping of geographic boundaries. The negotiations led to the birth of some new nations, as well as to the reshaping of existing boundaries that helped some countries while hurting others. Most nations that gained territory had been strong allies of the victors and could thus justify a claim to the “spoils” of war. But among those that profited from these talks was a weak country that had contributed relatively little to the Allied war effort: Romania. When the negotiations ended, Romania had roughly doubled in size. How was this possible? Why was Romania able to claim so much value when it had done little, if anything, to create value?

Romania’s power lay not in its strength but in its weakness. Here’s why: When the war ended, the greatest perceived threat to the Allied nations (in particular, to Great Britain and the United States) was not a resurgence of the defeated enemy. Rather, it was communism, the recently empowered political philosophy that had made its debut with Russia’s 1917 October Revolution. Because of the great fear of communism’s potential to spread westward, Romania, which lay immediately to the west of Russia, suddenly became an important consideration. If Romania fell, communism would gain another large foothold in Europe. The leaders of Romania did not want this to happen; more important, they knew that the Allied forces did not want this to happen—and that is how they were able to extract more value from the postwar negotiations than they might have otherwise “deserved.”
Romania’s argument can be simplified thus: give us what we ask for, or else we will remain weak; then we will be destroyed, and you will suffer as a consequence.

Similar dynamics play out in business contexts as well. In one case, two companies that had signed a joint-venture (JV) agreement found themselves enmeshed in a bitter dispute when one of the companies, anxious about the other’s growing presence in a market in which they competed, threatened to sue for patent infringement. The defendant knew that the case was frivolous, but also knew that the plaintiff, a much larger company, could afford to litigate until the defendant went intobankruptcy. Despite its seemingly precarious situation, the defendant managed to convince its JV partner to drop the lawsuit and to reach a mutually agreeable settlement. The defendant’s argument was essentially the following: “If you take us to court, you have the power to push us into bankruptcy.

Clearly, we do not want this. But let’s also think about what this would mean for you: you would lose a valuable partner. It would be best for both of us if we could set aside the threat of patent litigation and see whether we can work out an agreement that allows us to continue using the disputed technology, for you to feel more secure about your market position, and for us to continue a value creating relationship that capitalizes on our synergies.”

What is the underlying principle of this strategy? If you create value for others, you gain at least some power to claim value for yourself—regardless of whether the other side wishes to reward you for what you bring to the table. In extreme cases, when they push too hard, they potentially hurt themselves. They may not recognize this, however, which is why it is worth reminding them that strength is not simply measured by “what you can force others to do” or “how easily you can make someone’s life miserable” rather, it may be better measured by “what value you can create for others.” As a result, it is often useful to tell the negotiation “bully” that an overly strong show of force can be counterproductive: “If you push me too hard, you’ll destroy me—and lose a value-creating partner.”

STRATEGY 3: UNDERSTAND—AND ATTACK—THE SOURCE OF THEIR POWER 

For many years now, Planned Parenthood medical clinics across the United States have faced a recurring problem. Every so often, antiabortion protestors picket outside the clinics in the hope of discouraging women from entering them. The strategy seems to work quite well; many women who might otherwise visit the clinics are daunted by the prospect of passing through a large crowd that is waving signs and hurling verbal abuse. Setting aside the moral and political elements of this conflict, how might the clinics deal with the strategic problem of reducing the number of intimidating protestors?

A number of Planned Parenthood clinics around the country have adopted a particularly creative strategy for fighting back, usually referred to as the “Pledge-a-Picket” program. Here’s how it works:

The clinic asks its supporters to pledge donations to the clinic on a per protestor basis. The more protestors that show up to picket the clinic, the more money the clinic raises in donations! For example, if someone pledges 50 cents per protestor, and one hundred protestors show up at the clinic, that supporter will donate $50 to the clinic. Many clinics have used this strategy to effectively reduce the incentive of protestors to show up to picket, and some have raised tens of thousands of dollars in pledges. The Planned Parenthood of Central Texas (PPCT) in Waco has even posted a sign outside its clinic that reads: “Even Our Protesters Support Planned Parenthood.”
As the Pledge-a-Picket story reveals, it is not enough that you recognize the strengths and weaknesses of each side. It is also critical that you understand the source of each side’s strengths and weaknesses. Once the Planned Parenthood clinics understood that the source of their opponents’ power was the ability to draw large numbers of protestors outside the clinic, they were able to think of a novel way of diminishing the benefits of doing so.
A student of Deepak’s who owns a highly successful real-estate development company recentlyused this strategy to deal with a problem that will seem strange to many Americans. His company is located in a country where blatant political corruption is much more common than in the United States. In this particular case, the developer was awaiting governmental approval for a very lucrative construction project that he had signed. Everything was ready to go when, suddenly, the approval process was stopped dead in its tracks. The reason became clear days later when the developer received a phone call from the son of the powerful elected official who was in charge of signing off on the approval. The son wanted a stake in the project, and he made it clear that if the partnership were accepted, the approval would be granted quickly. The developer knew that it was possible to circumvent the son (and his father) by going through the court system and by contacting other officials with more seniority, but that process would take a long time. Unfortunately, time was of the essence; his company was about to go public, with an initial public offering (IPO) scheduled in three months.

If potential investors were to discover that the project might not be approved, the company would be valued somewhat less. More problematic would be the timing of such a rumor. If the politician’s son was rebuffed, he could decide to publicize the approval problems just when the company was about to go public. What to do?
Deepak advised the following strategy, which the developer executed with much success: go public immediately with the information regarding potential delays in approval. In other words, reveal to the media that the project is under way, but that its approval will probably not be finalized until some months after the company goes public. At the same time, the developer should release all of the documents related to the merits of the project, as well as the letters that the politician sent earlier in support of the project’s approval. That way, investor confidence will remain high.

This strategy has at least three obvious merits. First, by getting ahead of the story, the developer controls how the news is reported and interpreted. Second, by making this information public two months before the IPO, the news itself is made less salient to investors by the time the company goes public. Third, and perhaps most important, with the news already in the press, the politician’s son loses his only source of leverage. Because the son’s power lies primarily in his ability to damage the developer when he is most vulnerable (during the IPO), that is the element to be targeted. As with the Pledge-a-Picket strategy, this strategy identifies and destroys the primary source of an opponent’s power.

The same principle applies to negotiations of all sorts. If you are afraid to confront your powerful salesperson, or are wary of denying his request for yet another exorbitant raise, consider the source of the salesperson’s power. In this case, it may be that the salesperson has stronger relationships with your customers than you do. Knowing this, how might you strategize? In the weeks and months ahead, begin building relationships with each of your key customers. You might even lock them in with attractive multiyear contracts. Then, when you stand up to your salesperson’s demands, there is little with which he can threaten you. He may choose to leave the firm and go to a competitor, but his ability to take your customers with him will be significantly weakened.

THE POWER OF GENIUS 

All of the strategies and insights discussed in this chapter stem from one crucial insight: while being in a position of weakness is sometimes unavoidable, you will negotiate most effectively when youleverage the fundamentals—systematic preparation and careful strategy formulation. Unfortunately, many negotiators compound the problem of weakness by becoming obsessed by the factors that make them weak. This does not mean that you should ignore your weaknesses. But, as dangerous as it is to ignore your weaknesses, it can be equally devastating to overlook your strengths or to assume you have none.

Those who “think weak” inevitably also “act weak.” If you are obsessed by your weaknesses, you will be less likely to set reasonably high aspirations, to feel confident asking for more information, to demand that your concessions be reciprocated, or to push the other side to consider the value proposition you are offering. You will also be more susceptible to influence tactics and threats.

Negotiation geniuses recognize their weaknesses and try to mitigate them. Once they have done so, they know they must also focus on their strengths, prepare systematically, and negotiate with an eye toward improving their negotiating position. Doing so will not guarantee “victory,” but it will ensure that you have done as well as possible given the situation. Indeed, the power of negotiation genius may be most valuable to you in precisely those situations where the alternative is to despair—or to rely on gut instinct.

CHAPTER 12: When Negotiations Get Ugly: Dealing with Irrationality, Distrust, Anger, Threats, and Ego 

By most expert accounts, the Cuban Missile Crisis brought the world closer to nuclear annihilation than it has ever been—before or since. The crisis entailed an escalation of conflict between the United States and the Soviet Union that took place between October 16, 1962, and October 28, 1962.

What drove two civilized nations to the brink of mutual destruction? More important, how did they manage to negotiate their way to a safe, mutually acceptable peace?

In his book Thirteen Days, Robert Kennedy described the events leading up to the crisis, arguably the most dangerous two weeks in all of human history. The conflict was instigated when United States spy planes revealed that the Soviet Union had begun placing missiles in Cuba that would be capable of delivering nuclear weapons to the United States. Due to the close proximity of Cuba, the U.S. government became very anxious. Making matters worse, just weeks earlier, Soviet ambassador Anatoly Dobrynin had explicitly promised the Americans that no such missiles would be placed in Cuba.

In the days that followed the Americans’ discovery of the missiles, the two enemies exchanged threats and counterthreats. As the conflict escalated, emotions mounted and distrust heightened. Both sides were aware that an attack by either country would lead to retaliation, and so it would be entirely irrational for either side to take any steps that could lead to war. But both sides were also aware that irrationality might prevail. As Soviet chairman Nikita Khrushchev wrote in a letter to President John F. Kennedy during the crisis, “If indeed war should break out, then it would not be in our power to stop it, for such is the logic of war.”

Acutely aware that both sides were armed and ready to launch nuclear weapons, President Kennedy reflected on the growing sentiment among many of his advisers that a tough military response against Cuba was the best option. Kennedy instead chose the less aggressive option of instituting a naval blockade of Cuba, explaining to his advisers that “the great danger and risk in all of this is a miscalculation—a mistake in judgment.” More belligerent actions, Kennedy argued, would likely drive the conflict to a point of no return: “It isn’t the first step that concerns me, but both sides escalating to the fourth and fifth step—and we don’t go to the sixth because there is no one around to do so.” According to Robert Kennedy, “the President believed from the start that the Soviet Chairman was a rational, intelligent man who, if given sufficient time and shown our determination, would alter his position. But there was always the chance of error, of mistake, miscalculation, or misunderstanding, and President Kennedy was committed to doing everything possible to lessen that chance on our side.” 

But clear communication and rigorous analysis would not be sufficient to resolve the crisis. There was also the matter of personal egos and national pride. The entire world was watching, and neitherKennedy nor Khrushchev could afford to be seen as weak by his citizens, political opponents, media analysts, or the international community at large. Robert Kennedy recalled a discussion that took place between the president and his advisers one evening: “Neither side wanted war over Cuba, we agreed, but it was possible that either side could take a step that—for reasons of ‘security’ or ‘pride’ or ‘face’—would require a response by the other side, which, in turn, for the same reasons of security, pride, or face, would bring about a counter-response and eventually an escalation into armed conflict.”

There was every reason for the situation to spiral entirely out of control. How, then, were the two sides able to negotiate a peaceful settlement? According to Robert Kennedy, it was the negotiation genius of his brother, President John F. Kennedy, that saved the world from nuclear war: President Kennedy made it his top priority to understand as well as possible the interests, needs, constraints, and perspective of the other side. “The final lesson of the Cuban missile crisis,” wrote Robert Kennedy, “is the importance of placing ourselves in the other country’s shoes. During the crisis, President Kennedy spent more time trying to determine the effect of a particular course of action on Khrushchev or the Russians than on any other phase of what he was doing. What guided all of his deliberations was an effort not to disgrace Khrushchev, not to humiliate the Soviet Union, not to have them feel they would have to escalate their response because their national security or national interests so committed them.”

The final deal, negotiated heavily through back channels in an effort to help the parties save face, was this: the Soviet Union would remove the missiles from Cuba; in return, the United States would pledge not to invade Cuba and to remove American missiles from Turkey (which were seen as a threat by the Soviet Union). Out of a concern for how this latter concession would be judged by the public, Robert Kennedy insisted to Soviet ambassador Dobrynin that the removal of missiles from Turkey could not be seen as a quid-pro-quo concession for the removal of missiles from Cuba. As a result, this element of the deal was not made public for years.

In retrospect, the outcome of this crisis seems unremarkable: both parties removed their offending missiles and the conflict deescalated. But it is worth asking: what would have happened if President Kennedy, instead of focusing so intently on Khrushchev’s needs and interests, had instead listened to his military advisers, most of whom strongly supported air strikes against Cuba rather than the less aggressive blockade option? Consider the following. During the Cuban Missile Crisis, U.S. intelligence reports concluded that while Cuba had missiles capable of carrying nuclear warheads, it had no actual nuclear warheads. It was only years later that the truth—previously known only to the Cubans and the Soviet Union—was made public: at the time of the crisis, Cuba had enough nuclear warheads to obliterate the eastern seaboard of the United States—and they had the authority and intent to use these warheads if they were attacked. In other words, the unremarkable outcome of the Cuban Missile Crisis was by no means assured. If, instead of negotiating with his enemy, President Kennedy had chosen to act tough, flex U.S. military muscle, and follow the advice of his top brass, his decisions would have resulted in the deaths of tens of millions of Americans.

Throughout this book, we have encouraged you to try to understand the interests, needs, constraints, and concerns of the other side and to work with your counterparts to create value. But what happens when this seems virtually impossible? What happens when your counterpart is your “enemy,”unwilling or unable to work with you to reach a mutually agreeable outcome? It is worth remembering at such moments that President Kennedy confronted, simultaneously, the very worst of what is possible when negotiations turn ugly—irrationality, distrust, anger, threats, and ego—and succeeded nonetheless. Here we will consider each of these five factors and, in doing so, provide you with a set of principles and strategies that you can leverage when your own negotiations turn ugly.

DEALING WITH IRRATIONALITY 

“All of the strategies you have described work when you’re dealing with people who will listen to reason,” an exasperated executive student remarked recently. “But the people I deal with are completely irrational. How can you possibly negotiate with someone who is irrational?” As the executive’s question reveals, negotiators often struggle with the task of trying to negotiate with those who behave recklessly, strategize poorly, and act in ways that seem to contradict their own selfinterest; any would-be negotiation genius needs to understand how to deal with these obstacles.
Our advice is this: be very careful before labeling someone “irrational.” Whenever our students or clients tell us about their “irrational” or “crazy” counterparts, we work with them to carefully consider whether the other side is truly irrational. Almost always, the answer is no. In most cases, behavior that appears to be irrational has a rational—albeit hidden—cause. Here, we will share the three most common reasons that negotiators erroneously judge others as irrational. We will also describe the dangers of doing so and explain how to avoid making such mistakes.

MISTAKE 1: THEY ARE NOT IRRATIONAL; THEY ARE UNINFORMED 

An executive (who is one of Deepak’s students) was recently involved in a dispute with an exemployee. The employee claimed that he was owed $130,000 in sales commissions for the work he had done prior to being fired from the firm a few months earlier. The executive, on the other hand, claimed the employee was owed nothing—in fact, he insisted the employee had been overpaid by $25,000.

What was the reason for this discrepancy? At the time the employee was fired, the company’s accounts were a mess; records had been kept poorly. Since then, the firm had hired a new accountant and updated all of the records. These records now clearly revealed that the employee’s claim was entirely illegitimate; if anyone had a claim to make, it was the firm. The executive was uninterested in going to court to recoup the $25,000 that the firm was owed and wanted to drop the matter entirely.
The executive called the employee and told him what the accounting records revealed; he also offered to send a copy of the records. He then made it clear that his case was airtight, but offered to forgive the $25,000 overpayment if the employee agreed to forgo his groundless suit as well. The employee’s response: “No way. I don’t need to see the records. I’ll see you in court!”
The CEO was very confused. There was no way for the employee to win in court. Why was he behaving so irrationally?
Deepak suggested to the executive that the problem was probably not that the employee was irrational, but that he lacked credible information. The executive was convinced that the employeewould lose the court battle, but it was possible that the employee was still confident that he would win the case because he did not trust the executive or the firm’s record keeping. How could the executive educate the employee regarding his prospects for winning in court? Deepak advised him to have an objective third party, specifically a professional accounting firm, conduct an audit of the records pertinent to this dispute and to mail the results to the employee. (This would be far less expensive than going to court.) Having this information would diminish the employee’s perceived likelihood of winning in court and make litigation a less attractive option. What was the result? The employee dropped the suit.
When Deepak was in graduate school, an economics professor began the first day of class with the following statement: “I want you all to remember something—you are not stupid, you are just ignorant. If you were stupid, we could not do much about it. But ignorance we can fix.” This insight is as relevant to negotiators as it is to graduate students. Often, when the other side appears irrational, they are in fact uninformed. If you can help educate or inform them—about their true interests, the consequences of their actions, the strength of your BATNA, and so on—there is a strong likelihood they will make better decisions. For example, if someone says no to an offer that you know is in her best interest, do not assume she is irrational. Instead, work to ensure that she understands why the offer is in her best interest. She may simply have misunderstood or ignored a crucial piece of information.

MISTAKE 2: THEY ARE NOT IRRATIONAL; THEY HAVE HIDDEN CONSTRAINTS 

In 2005, the U.S. government passed legislation to increase food aid to countries that were in dire need of such assistance. There was much support among politicians and activists for this initiative.

Not surprisingly, however, there were also certain special-interest groups that opposed this legislation. Here’s what was surprising: one of the groups that voiced opposition was a consortium of nonprofit organizations whose mission it was to lobby for an increase in food aid to disadvantaged countries! What explains such seemingly irrational and self-defeating behavior? Why would this group oppose legislation that achieves precisely what it purports to want?

The answer lies not in understanding the group’s interests, but in understanding its constraints. In order to increase the amount of food sent to disadvantaged countries, the consortium had in the past partnered with American farmers to lobby the U.S. government jointly for greater aid. Why did the farmers join in this campaign? Because when the U.S. government increased food aid, it bought more food from American farmers. As a result, both the farmers and the nonprofits got what they wanted.

This case, however, was different. Mindful of escalating budget deficits, Congress had decided that the only way to increase foreign food aid was to purchase the food more cheaply—not from American farmers, but from developing countries. What would appear to be a double win for the nonprofits (increased food aid and increased support for poor farmers in developing countries) instead created a predicament. If the nonprofits supported the legislation, they would be severing ties with their longstanding coalition partner, the American farmer. Instead, the nonprofits decided that their longterm interests were best served by opposing the legislation. This may still seem like a questionable decision on moral, ethical, or other grounds, but it seems irrational only when we overlook the hidden constraints facing the nonprofits.The problem of hidden constraints is present in many negotiations. When a firm loses a star employee because it refuses to raise her salary to match a competitor’s higher offer, the firm is not necessarily behaving irrationally; it may instead be constrained by an HR policy that restricts it from creating huge pay differentials in the firm.

Similarly, when your counterpart seems unwilling to make even small, reasonable concessions that could seal the deal, you might tell yourself he’s a fool, or you might try to discover how much authority he has to negotiate a comprehensive, value-maximizing deal. If he is heavily constrained, you might try to negotiate with someone who has greater dealmaking authority.

In negotiation, a wide variety of possible constraints exists. The other side may be constrained by advice from her lawyers, by the fear of setting a dangerous precedent, by promises she has made to other parties, by time pressure, and so on. Negotiation geniuses try to discover these constraints—and to help other parties overcome them—rather than dismissing others as irrational.

MISTAKE 3: THEY ARE NOT IRRATIONAL; THEY HAVE HIDDEN INTERESTS 

Some years ago, a group of managers decided to promote Leslie, one of the firm’s administrative assistants. Leslie had worked for the firm for thirty years and was only two years away from retirement. She had performed well throughout her career and had received salary increases commensurate with her performance. Because she was already at the top of her salary bracket, it was not possible for the managers to pay her more money; nor was she scheduled for a formal performance appraisal. Rather, the managers simply wanted to do something nice for Leslie, so they decided to surprise her with a promotion. Her job responsibilities would not change, but the new title would give her greater status and prestige.

When she heard of the promotion, Leslie was delighted. She understood that her salary or job responsibilities would not increase, but that was fine with her.

Soon after receiving the promotion, however, Leslie learned that she was now among the lowestpaid employees with her job title. She also began to feel uneasy about having a “fake” job promotion — she was doing no more work and receiving no more pay than she used to, and this made her feel self-conscious with her coworkers. She asked for a raise and voiced her willingness to accept more responsibilities, but was quickly denied.

Within a few weeks of her promotion, Leslie decided that she would rather quit her job than be treated this poorly. By doing so, she lost two years of compensation and also took a hit in her retirement benefits. The managers, who had only the best of intentions, were left asking themselves, “Why did she behave so irrationally?”

What the managers failed to appreciate was that money and status were not the only issues of interest to Leslie. She also cared about perceptions of fairness and equity. The managers felt they had given her more than she even deserved. But in failing to see how their decision would play out in the future, they created a situation in which Leslie felt undervalued, phony, and embarrassed.

More generally, people will sometimes reject your offer because they think it is unfair, becausethey don’t like you, or for other reasons that have nothing to do with the obvious merits of your proposal. These people are not irrational; they are simply fulfilling needs and interests that you may not fully appreciate. When others appear irrational, negotiation geniuses do not write them off as crazy. Instead, they investigate: “What might be motivating her to act this way? What are all of her interests?”

BUT WHAT IF THEY REALLY ARE IRRATIONAL? 

If your counterpart truly is irrational—in other words, he is determined to work against what is in his best interest—then your options will be fewer. You can try to push through an agreement despite his irrationality, you can try to “go around him” by negotiating with someone else with authority who seems more willing to listen to reason (such as his boss or colleague), or you may decide to pursue your BATNA because his irrationality has eliminated all hope of creating value. You might also leverage the various strategies for confronting your counterpart’s biases that we have outlined in Chapters 4–6.

But we suggest—again—that you reconsider your assessment. Negotiators who are quick to label the other party “irrational” do so at great potential cost to themselves. When you use the “irrational” label, you limit your options, because there is not much you can say to someone who you truly believe is unable to reason, uninterested in fulfilling her own interests, and incapable of negotiating effectively. Your options greatly increase when you recognize that the other party is not irrational, but simply uninformed, constrained, or focused on interests that you did not anticipate. And as you know, the more options you have, the more effectively you will negotiate.

DEALING WITH DISTRUST 

Some years ago, a dispute arose between a U.S. manufacturer of electronic equipment and one of its foreign distributors. Each side felt that the other had reneged on its responsibilities, and both were ready to go to court to settle the matter. Not surprisingly, the two sides had very different perspectives regarding what had gone wrong.

The manufacturer claimed that the distributor had failed to meet its minimum purchase-order requirement for a key product and that the distributor did not have enough distribution channels in place to fulfill its contractual responsibilities. The manufacturer simply wanted to be paid for the equipment it had already delivered and to terminate its agreement with the distributor. The manufacturer claimed that it could no longer trust the distributor and wanted nothing more than to end their relationship.

Meanwhile, the distributor claimed that, within months of signing their agreement, the manufacturer had introduced a new and improved model of the same product and had refused to offer the distributor rights to sell it. By all indications, the distributor claimed, the entire agreement had been a scheme to dump old, obsolete models in the distributor’s region. In doing so, the manufacturer had defrauded the distributor. The distributor was demanding millions of dollars in reparation. It, too, felt that the breach of trust was so severe that there was no way to revive the relationship.
As it turns out, the story has a happy ending. The two sides opted for mediation rather thanlitigation. With the mediator’s assistance, they were able to reach an agreement that pleased both sides and that avoided a lengthy court battle.

What was the agreement? Instead of ending their relationship and deciding which party would pay the other for a breach of contract, the two sides agreed to continue their relationship with a restructuring of their existing agreement. The manufacturer agreed to give the distributor the right to distribute the new equipment (including the exclusive right to distribute in some parts of the region), and both sides dropped their financial claims.

When we present this case to our executive students, many of them are surprised that either of the two parties would be willing to agree to such a deal. The most important element of any relationship is trust, these executives argue; because the two sides had lost trust in each other, it was unwise to negotiate a continuance of the relationship. When we ask the executives to elaborate on this perspective, they often make one or more of the following statements:

• “If there is no trust, you will get nothing done.”
• “Why do a deal with someone you don’t trust? It’s not worth the risk.”
• “If they’ve exploited your trust before, they will do it again.”

We agree with the sentiment captured in each of these statements: indeed, trust is essential in relationships; hence, it is a critical ingredient in negotiation. But we disagree with the belief that trust cannot be regained. More fundamentally, we disagree with the belief that you should end a negotiation (or terminate a relationship) the moment you think that the other side is untrustworthy. Negotiation geniuses consider distrust to be a major obstacle to negotiation. But before they abandon hope of regaining the trust that has been lost, they work to rebuild it.

The first step in rebuilding trust is to diagnose the distrust that exists. Negotiators often think of trust as one-dimensional: either your counterpart is “trustworthy” or she is not. But consider that there are many different kinds of trust.3 For example, you will trust your surgeon primarily on the basis of whether he or she has the competence to perform a surgery on you, but you will trust your spouse more on the basis of whether he or she is honest with you. Similarly, there are many dimensions along which we might trust our business partners, lawyers, employees, children, friends, and so on. It is also the case that we can trust someone on one dimension (“my lawyer is very competent”) but not on another (“my lawyer is sometimes dishonest”). When this happens, you must decide which dimension of trust is most critical to the relationship. If someone cannot be trusted on the critical dimension, you must either fix the trust problem or consider your alternatives to dealing with her.

Two broad categories of distrust are relevant to many negotiations: distrust of another’s character and distrust of another’s competence.4 Consider that, in the manufacturer-distributor dispute, both sides distrusted each other—but for different reasons. The manufacturer believed that the distributor was incompetent: it did not have the infrastructure or know-how to sell the equipment it was licensedto distribute. Meanwhile, the distributor’s distrust was more an issue of character: only a dishonest and unethical company would dump outdated equipment in his region and hide information regarding newer models during the initial negotiation.

Once you have diagnosed the source of distrust, you can identify the steps needed to regain it. How might the distributor and the manufacturer regain trust in each other? Because each side is dealing with a different type of distrust, the process will be different for each of them. In the case of the distributor, its management must demonstrate to the manufacturer that their company is in fact competent. How might they do this? They might invite the manufacturer to visit their region to see the distribution channels firsthand, they might show purchase-order data that confirm their ability to achieve high sales, or they might provide reasonable justifications as to why their initial order did not meet the minimum purchasing agreement.

Meanwhile, to gain the trust of the distributor, the manufacturer’s management must demonstrate that they are honest and ethical. They might do this by explaining to the distributor that it is common practice in the United States not to reveal information regarding products in development—though they now understand that this practice may be viewed negatively in some other countries. The manufacturer might also offer to extend a peace offering (in the form of financial or other considerations) as an apology for unintended wrongdoing. Finally, the manufacturer’s decision to allow the distributor to sell the new product may in itself help overcome the perception that the manufacturer intended to exploit the distributor all along.
If the two sides in this negotiation—or in any negotiation—are able to identify and eliminate the source of distrust, trust can clearly be rebuilt. Unfortunately, negotiators are often dismissive of this possibility. Instead, once they have labeled the other party “untrustworthy,” they look only for information that confirms this belief. Moreover, when they are themselves distrusted, they often become defensive or angry rather than focused on trying to systematically eliminate this perception.
Negotiation geniuses understand that when the other side says (or implies) that you are untrustworthy, it is time to investigate: “Why does he think so? What would it take to overcome this perception?”

DEALING WITH ANGER 

A few years ago, Deepak was shooting pool at a bar with a friend and two strangers. Suddenly, a group of about eight college students stormed into the room. They threw a pool stick onto the table, disrupting the game, and started to scream and curse. Needless to say, Deepak and his friend were taken aback. The two strangers who were playing with them immediately charged at the leader of the gang of students. In a matter of seconds, the friendly game of eight ball had become a shoving match.
A fight was about to break out—and it was not at all clear why.
Trying to stop the fight, Deepak and his friend wedged themselves between the two main combatants. It soon became obvious that the college students were upset because they believed that, moments earlier, someone at Deepak’s table had disrupted their game in the adjacent room. Deepak knew this was not true, but the accusation only fueled the rage on both sides. Deepak and his friend wanted to clear up the misunderstanding, but the situation was getting more physical by the moment. It would have been quite easy for Deepak and his friend to simply walk away—by now, the fight was entirely between the college students and the two strangers—but that did not seem like the right thingto do.
Once it became clear that the provocateurs were unwilling to consider the situation a misunderstanding, Deepak tried a different approach. “Okay,” he said to the leader of the college students. “We understand that you think someone ‘messed with you.’ But what do you think needs to happen now to avoid a fight?”
The leader looked at Deepak just long enough to answer. “I don’t know, but you guys messed up our game, so it’s a bit late to apologize,” he said before rejoining the fray.
Deepak decided to try again: “Okay, but now you’ve messed up our game as well—so aren’t we even?”
“No, we’re not even,” the student shouted. “You started it!”

“I see. Well, let’s say someone in this room did start something,” Deepak said. “Can you imagine something that could happen now that would make you prefer not to fight? What would that look like? What would you rather be doing?”

The leader was in disbelief, but took a moment to consider the question. “Well, I’d rather be playing pool,” he answered, “but we’re going to have to start a whole new game.”

“And how much will that cost?” asked Deepak.
“One dollar,” the student responded.
Deepak took a dollar bill out of his wallet and handed it to the leader. “How about it? Your next game is on me.”
The leader smiled as he slowly reached for the dollar. “You know, that’s very cool,” he said.
“That’s really very nice of you.” He spent the next few minutes calming down his friends, and then escorted them out of the room. The fight was avoided, no blood was spilled, and no bones were broken. All it took was one dollar.
As this story shows, negotiators often confront counterparts who are angry or upset. And while we may think that these emotions are entirely unjustified, this does not change the fact that the angry party thinks that his or her anger is warranted.
How do you typically handle such situations? While another person’s anger may evoke your own, many of us recognize that this is not the most effective response to someone’s emotional outburst.
Instead, there is obvious merit in trying to defuse the other side’s anger and refocus attention on the substantive issues at hand. But defusing someone’s anger is often easier said than done. Most negotiators do not have a systematic way to deal with the anger of those with whom they are negotiating. Furthermore, seemingly unjustified anger often erupts when you least expect it. What should you do when this happens? The following strategies will enhance your ability to handle angry negotiators in ways that salvage the deal and the relationship.

STRATEGY 1: SEEK TO UNDERSTAND WHY THEY ARE ANGRY 

When your negotiation counterpart is angry, you must first find out why. The answer will point you toward an appropriate strategy for handling the situation. For example, if the other party is angry because she is misinformed, the solution is to inform her; if she is angry because she feels disrespected, the solution is to respect her; if she is angry because she misheard what you said, the solution is to clarify your intentions, and so on. Just because you know that your counterpart has no reason to be upset does not mean that she knows this. In the pool hall dispute, for example, the students’ anger was explicable (although it was still an overreaction) once they made clear that they thought they had been attacked first. Consistent with the approach we have underscored throughout this book, the best way to deal with emotions you do not fully understand is to investigate their source.

STRATEGY 2: GIVE VOICE TO THEIR ANGER 

Most negotiators recognize that anger is usually counterproductive. As a result, when dealing with someone who has lost his temper, most negotiators are likely to do whatever they can to suppress his expression of anger. “Getting angry will get us nowhere,” you might be tempted to say, or, “We’re not going to sit here and listen to you shout,” or, “It’s in everyone’s best interest if you calm down.”
These are all reasonable statements, but they overlook an important fact. If you do not give an angry negotiator the opportunity to voice his frustration, he will likely become even more angry—or, at the very least, resentful. A much better approach is to encourage people to voice their anger and to help you understand its source. You might say, for example, “I can see that you’re angry, and I want to understand why that is. Tell me what’s on your mind.” The key is to give legitimacy to the other person’s feelings. You can (and should) question the legitimacy of what he believes, but you should not waste time questioning the legitimacy of a person’s anger given what he believes to be true.

STRATEGY 3: SIDESTEP THE EMOTION 

Some years ago, Deepak’s martial arts instructor gave him some important advice regarding how to block a kick or a punch: “The best block is don’t be there.” In other words, when you try to stop someone’s physical attack with your own physical maneuver (a block), you are pitting power against power—and the stronger party will have an advantage. But if you can sidestep the attack, you will avoid the hit, retain your balance, and remain in control of the situation.
The same is true when it comes to emotion in negotiation. When the other side is angry, do not allow yourself to be the target by taking it personally. Instead, understand that her anger is a natural consequence of her beliefs. If she believed differently, she would not be angry. The best thing for you to do, then, is to keep your composure and help her change her beliefs. Sidestepping emotions is certainly not easy—especially when the other side is launching personal attacks and seems intent on provoking a response. To aid in sidestepping the emotion, ask yourself the following questions:

• If I were in her position, would I be acting the same way?
• Is this genuine emotion, or is it a tactic aimed at intimidating me?
• Is this how she behaves with everybody?

If you can conclude that their anger is natural given where they stand, or that they are simply acting tough to manipulate you, or that this is how they treat everyone, you will find it easier to sidestep the attack and maintain control of your own emotions.

STRATEGY 4: HELP THEM FOCUS ON THEIR TRUE UNDERLYING INTERESTS 

The most difficult part of Deepak’s pool hall negotiation was not figuring out the other party’s underlying interests (which were to play pool and not lose face). Rather, it was making the other party’s underlying interests salient to them. Anger prevents people from staying focused on the substantive issues about which they care deeply. Your task is to help the angry negotiator shift attention away from those elements that fueled his anger and toward those elements that would fulfill his interests. Try asking questions such as these:

• “What would you like to see happen now?”
• “What would you rather be doing?”
• “What would help us put this behind us?”
• “Is there anything else you would like to discuss or clarify before we return to the substantive issues you highlighted earlier?”

All of these questions facilitate a transition away from anger and toward interests.

DEALING WITH THREATS AND ULTIMATUMS 

Deepak has a client, the CEO of a large agricultural firm, who was recently negotiating with a large commercial bank for a multimillion-dollar line of credit. Because the CEO had personal connections with a director at the bank, he did not bother to procure competing bids from other banks. After months of negotiations, the deal was structured and both sides were ready to sign the agreement.
Before this could happen, however, the CEO discovered during a conversation with an industry expert that the bank was charging his company a risk-adjusted rate that was significantly higher than what other banks would have charged. The CEO was both surprised and upset. Had his “friend” at the bank taken advantage of him? Even if this was the case, it was not clear whether the CEO could threaten to go to the bank’s competitors; this option had been viable some months ago, but now the company needed the line of credit very soon. Restarting the entire negotiation process with another bank could be extremely costly.
The CEO called the bank director, shared what he had learned, and proposed a revision of theterms of the agreement. Upon hearing the CEO’s proposed revision, the director became very angry.

In particular, he was “very turned off” by the suggestion that the CEO wanted to “renege” on their verbal agreement. In a long e-mail that followed the conversation, the director began by writing: “My flexibility on pricing is none.” If this was unacceptable to the CEO, he continued, then they “should have serious discussions” regarding the types of proprietary information the CEO was barred from sharing with the bank’s competitors. The threat was implicit, but clear: “We cannot move on this issue. You are welcome to go to our competitors.”

The CEO approached Deepak for advice on how to respond to the director’s e-mail. He had a variety of questions: Was this a “true ultimatum” or simply a negotiation “tactic”? Should he continue to push for a better pricing structure, or should he instead ask for smaller concessions on other, less thorny issues? Should he be forceful or pleasant? Should he continue to appear upset, or should he appear calm and in control? Deepak’s advice, described below, leveraged three strategies for dealing with threats and ultimatums in negotiation.

STRATEGY 1: IGNORE THE THREAT 

Deepak began by advising the CEO to completely ignore the ultimatum (“My flexibility on pricing is none”)—to pretend that this statement had never been made. Instead, the CEO should respond to the less harshly written, more substantive elements of the e-mail, which referred to “reliance on market rates,” “competitive pricing,” and “structuring fees that reflect the market standard.” Specifically, he told the CEO to thank the director for agreeing to think about the deal from the perspective of what is consistent with prevailing market rates—and to make no mention of the director’s alleged inflexibility on pricing. Why? If the director issued the ultimatum out of frustration, ignorance, or the desire to save face, the worst thing for the CEO to do would be to draw attention to the ultimatum and make it more difficult for the director to back away from his statement in the future. It would be much better to ignore the ultimatum and give the director space to retreat from it in the ensuing days and weeks. It is worth pointing out that this advice is sound even if the ultimatum is real—that is, even if the other side is truly unwilling or unable to offer you any more concessions. If this is the case, and you have ignored their ultimatum, rest assured that they will mention it to you again.

President Kennedy used a similar strategy during the Cuban Missile Crisis. During the height of the crisis, he received two different (and somewhat contradictory) messages from Khrushchev within the span of twenty-four hours. One of them (the “hard” message) was very aggressive; in it, Khrushchev demanded the removal of U.S. missiles from Turkey in exchange for the removal of Soviet missiles from Cuba. In the “soft” message, which was much less antagonistic, Khrushchev offered to remove the missiles from Cuba in exchange for the United States ending the blockade and promising that there would be no attack on Cuba. As Kennedy’s advisers discussed how to craft a response that would address all of the issues contained in both messages, Robert Kennedy suggested a different approach: ignore the hard message. Robert Kennedy was among those who believed that the hard message (which was the only one that was sent publicly) was designed more to help Khrushchev save face in the world community than it was to promote substantive discussions. Ignoring the hard message— whose terms the U.S. government could not immediately accept—and instead agreeing to the terms of the soft message, Robert Kennedy argued, would be a much more productive strategy.

More generally, it is possible to ignore the other side’s ultimatum even when it includes no softmessage. Consider the following ultimatum: “This is our final offer: take it or leave it.” How might you respond to this statement while still ignoring the ultimatum? Consider the following viable responses:

• “It seems pretty clear that you find it difficult to make further concessions on the issues we’ve been discussing. I suggest we focus on other aspects of the deal and come back to this point once all other elements are on the table.”

• “I can see that you fully believe that you have already conceded as much as should be necessary to close the deal. As it turns out, we feel the exact same way regarding our concessions. Hopefully, this means that we are close to reaching an agreement. So le t’s keep working.”

• “I can understand your frustration. We both know there is a deal to be made, and yet we can’t seem to find it. Can you help me better understand your perspective? Why do you think we’re not there yet?”

Notice that each of these responses ignores the “take it or leave it” demand. Instead, the responses are aimed at softening the other side’s statement so that it will not be a barrier in the future if, in fact, it is possible for them to make further concessions.

STRATEGY 2: NEUTRALIZE ANY ADDITIONAL THREATS THEY MIGHT BE TEMPTED TO MAKE 

Returning to the bank negotiation story, Deepak next advised the CEO to pre-empt (to the extent possible) any additional threats the director might be tempted to make. He did so by helping the CEO anticipate the threats and counterarguments that his draft e-mail reply would generate, and then encouraged him to respond comprehensively to these potential reactions. For example, one potential response by the director would be to threaten (implicitly) to drag out the negotiations, knowing that the prospect of lengthy discussions would likely force the CEO to capitulate. Anticipating this, Deepak advised the CEO to include the following text in the e-mail: “We understand that these new issues may cause delays in structuring and implementing a final agreement. If you also anticipate such delays, we suggest involving other senior bank officials in this process from the very start.” Why might this statement neutralize the director’s potential threat? Because the CEO knew that the involvement of senior bank officials would make the director lose credibility at his bank, a consequence he would be highly motivated to avoid.

Pre-empting the other side’s aggression is also a useful tactic when you are dealing not with threats, but with their legitimate complaints or concerns. For example, the director may have been genuinely concerned that having to restructure the deal at this late stage in the negotiation would cause him embarrassment, as he would be forced to tell his boss that the deal would bring in less money than he had earlier announced. In such instances, you can make your own position stronger if you are able to voice the other side’s legitimate complaints or concerns for them, rather than waiting for them to raise these issues. For example, you might say: “We understand that corporate politics and other institutional hurdles sometimes make it difficult to make even reasonable changes to a deal this late in the game. But we would like to work with you to figure out ways to make this happen. We also feel— and hope that you agree—that the most important issue continues to be reaching an agreement that is consistent with prevailing market rates.” When you are the first to voice their concerns, you lessenthe degree of antagonism with which they can argue against you. They may still fight back, but they will be in no position to suggest that you are concerned only about yourself, or that you don’t understand their perspective.

STRATEGY 3: IF YOU DON’T FIND THE THREAT TO BE CREDIBLE, LET THEM KNOW 

If the director’s threat had been credible—if he would have truly preferred “no deal” to a change in pricing—then the CEO would have had little room to maneuver. Often, however, a threat is not credible—you know they will not follow through on it—but it is still impossible to entirely ignore or pre-empt it. How should you respond? In as positive a tone as possible, signal to the other side that, because you understand their constraints and their interests, you don’t find the threat to be credible.

Consider, for example, how the CEO could have responded to the bank director’s threat to walk away from the deal:

Signal 1: Your constraints will not allow you to follow through on this threat: “Finally, with regard to the interest rate: we feel comfortable in knowing that you will, as always, follow your bank’s policy of pricing risk according to market standards. This gives us confidence that, as you run the numbers and look at the data, you will find ways to lower the rate you have quoted. As you’ve mentioned in the past, this is one of the benefits of working with a large bank like yours: at the end of the day, we don’t have to argue about what is fair—we can all take a look at the market.”

Signal 2: Your interests will not allow you to follow through on this threat: “It is obvious that there are some discrepancies on how we are calculating risk in this case. But we know that, like us, you have been working on this deal for many months now and will not want to see it unravel over one issue. So let’s work on resolving this in a way that is agreeable to all parties involved.”
Both of these responses are friendly and gracious, but both make it clear to the director that you do not perceive his threat (whether veiled or explicit) to be credible.

DEALING WITH THE NEED TO SAVE FACE 

When you have exposed the fact that the other side’s threat is not credible, that their anger is baseless, or that their lack of trust in you is unfounded, you have every reason to celebrate: you were right and they were wrong. But you are not in the clear yet. Unless the other side is able to save face—that is, to avoid embarrassment or humiliation—they may be very reluctant to change their perspective or their behavior. Instead, they may act in ways that help them preserve their dignity or salvage their ego, but that destroy value.

Negotiation geniuses will not only give their counterparts the opportunity to save face, they will help them to save face. “Above all, while defending our own vital interests,” President Kennedy said in a speech at American University soon after the Cuban Missile Crisis, “nuclear powers must avert those confrontations which bring an adversary to the choice of either a humiliating defeat or a nuclear war.”5 In your negotiations, the stakes will not be nearly as high. But if President Kennedy was worried that someone would enter a nuclear war to avoid humiliation, consider how much more likely it is that someone will walk away from thousands or millions of dollars in order to save face.

Suppose you are negotiating the purchase of a product or service, and the seller tells you: “There’s no way for us to lower our price—this is our final offer.” Later, it becomes clear to both of you thatshe will have to lower her price in order for you to make the purchase. Here are some ways to help this counterpart save face:

• “I’m glad I was able to find ways to compensate you for a lower price, because I know you could not have lowered it otherwise.”
• “I realize that you are doing me a favor by reducing the price beyond what is normally possible, and I greatly appreciate it.”
• “We’re fortunate that we were able to get past the discussion of price, in which you had already conceded all you could. Instead, we were able to focus on creating a package deal that pleased us both.”

Each of these responses reduces the likelihood that the other side will stick to her ultimatum, because each gives her a legitimate, face-saving way to frame her decision to change course. Often, your counterparts will find their own way to justify backing away from their original claims; if they can’t, it helps if you can give them a story to tell themselves—and to others who might question their decision to back down. It is worth pointing out, however, that each of these responses would be less necessary if, from the start, you had followed the strategy of ignoring their ultimatum altogether.

It is also worth keeping in mind that it’s not only your counterpart who has a strong need to save face. You are just as likely to sabotage your self-interest when pursuing it would make you lose face.

So when you’re involved in a disagreement or dispute, don’t place your ego on the line. This means refraining from making empty threats or ultimatums. It also means carefully thinking through the implications of calling someone a liar, lashing out in anger, or staking a firm claim on a position that you may one day have to abandon. Negotiation geniuses avoid these behaviors and instead focus on alternatives that serve the same purpose, but that entail less risk. Instead of calling someone a liar, ask him to substantiate his claims. Instead of lashing out in anger, tell your counterpart why you are upset.

And instead of swearing that you will never back off from a particular position, anchor aggressively and provide a justification for the anchor.

WHAT LOOKS GOOD VERSUS WHAT WORKS WELL 

Many of the strategies and tactics we have presented for dealing with tough negotiation situations are not the kind you would see in a Hollywood movie. In a movie (and, regrettably, in some negotiation texts), the protagonist fights fire with fire, slams his fist on the table, and doesn’t back down from a fight. These tactics look good on the big screen, but most of them do not work well in practice.
Negotiation geniuses approach “ugly” negotiations the same way that they approach “beautiful” ones —with an investigative approach that focuses on each side’s underlying interests. We will end with another sage quote from Deepak’s martial arts instructor: “If you’re in danger, don’t throw a spinning back-kick to their face. Instead, attack their kneecap. The kick to the face looks good, but the kick to the knee will save your life.” The same principle applies here: save the histrionics for the stage, and bring your negotiation genius to the bargaining table.

CHAPTER 13: When Not to Negotiate 

This story takes place on April 1, 2005—yes, on April Fool’s Day—but as strange as it may seem, this tale is entirely factual. It started with a Harvard economics professor who wanted to procure some manure (yes, you read that correctly). For years, this professor (who is not one of the authors) had been driving to a piece of farmland located about ten miles from his million-dollar home, shoveling manure into his truck, and carting it back to use in his garden. Of course, taking something from someone else’s property without their knowledge and without payment is illegal—even when the thing you’re taking is manure. There is some evidence to suggest that the professor was unaware that he had been breaking the law for all these years. Nonetheless, it was very clear to him on that night, April 1, 2005, that he was in big trouble. One of the farmhands spotted the professor as he tried to exit the property with the manure in his truck and promptly blocked the professor’s path with his own truck. The farmhand, who was also the nephew of the property owner, was clearly upset. The farmhand threatened to call the police, and the professor had to think fast. He had two clear options: he could rely on his people skills (apologize, plead ignorance, promise to make amends, et cetera), or he could rely on his training as an economist. He chose to do the latter.

Valuing the manure in his truck at no more than $20, the professor offered the farmhand $20. The farmhand became more upset. Believing he had just offered the farmhand more than his reservation value, the professor was probably surprised; nonetheless he upped his offer to $40. In response, the farmhand called the police. The professor was charged with trespassing, larceny, and malicious destruction of property (yes, we are still talking about manure). But these charges would soon become the least of the professor’s concerns. Once news of the event became public, it spread quickly through local, national, and international media channels. Even Jay Leno joked about the Harvard professor’s misadventure in his Tonight Show monologue.

Where did the professor go wrong? Obviously, he erred in not recognizing that he was stealing the manure. Even worse, he overlooked all of the signs that he was not in a position to negotiate his way out of trouble. Had the professor considered how weak his BATNA was (“If there is no deal, I will face legal hassles and public ridicule”) and how strong the farmhand’s BATNA was (“If there is no deal, he will call the police”), he might have decided not to try to haggle. Furthermore, seeing how upset the farmhand was, the professor might have realized that his “negotiation” might appear to be a bribe and only fuel the fire. Finally, even after deciding that a monetary offering would help settle the matter, why would the professor offer so little? Given the stakes, the strength of the farmhand’s BATNA, and his heightened emotions, a much better approach would have been to apologize, plead ignorance, and ask the farmhand what it might take to make amends for the unfortunate situation.

Instead, the professor decided to negotiate—and that’s when the manure really hit the fan.

This book is designed to help you improve your negotiation skills and give you the tools you need to achieve better outcomes for yourself and for the people you care about. Though titled “When Not toNegotiate,” even this chapter is aimed at expanding your negotiation ability, because one critical aspect of expertise in any domain is recognizing your limits. Upon reading this book, you may be tempted to start trying out your newfound negotiation skills everywhere—all the time and on everyone —to see if you can get others to do what you want.

Our advice: slow down. Recognize that the “softer” aspects of what you have learned (listening, understanding, empathizing, and so on) are some of the most widely applicable tools you can leverage, especially in sensitive situations where adrenaline-driven tactics might only make matters worse. Becoming a negotiation genius is a matter of not only knowing how to negotiate, but also knowing when to negotiate.

Specifically, negotiation may not be the best option: when the costs of negotiation exceed the amount you stand to gain, when your BATNA stinks (and everyone knows it), when negotiation would send the wrong signal to the other party, when the potential harm to the relationship exceeds the expected value from the negotiation, when negotiating is culturally inappropriate, or when your BATNA beats the other side’s best possible offer. This chapter will help you better understand—and better strategize in—each of these situations.

WHEN TIME IS MONEY 

Many years ago, Max was teaching a course on negotiation in Bangkok, Thailand. The students, naturally, were curious to know whether Max could negotiate in the real world or whether he simply knew the topic from an academic perspective. So each class began the same way. One of the students would ask Max where he went the previous evening and then ask the key question: “How much did you pay the taxi driver to get back to the faculty dorms?” At the time, in Thailand, one would routinely negotiate the price of the ride with the taxi driver before getting into the car. The students could then judge whether Max paid the rate that locals would pay or whether he paid the price reserved for foreigners—and for those lacking strong negotiation skills. By the end of the first week, Max understood the local taxi market quite well and was able to impress his students regularly with his ability to negotiate a good rate.

Then Marla, Max’s wife, arrived in Thailand. On the evening of her arrival, Max and Marla took a long walk across town to a nice restaurant. After dinner, just outside the restaurant, Max hailed a taxi and, in his poor Thai, told the driver the destination. The driver asked for 70 baht ($2.80 at the time), which was a very high price. Max countered with 30 baht ($1.20), the lowest possible price for a local taxi ride and the price Max had paid a few days earlier for a similar ride. The driver quickly dropped his price to 50 baht; Max repeated his offer of 30 baht. The driver came down to 40 baht.

Max stuck to 30 baht. The driver decided to pursue his BATNA and drove away.
Max hailed another taxi and shared the destination with the driver. The driver’s response was 50 baht—a much more reasonable first offer than the one made by the previous driver. Max countered with an offer of 30 baht. The driver came down to 40 baht, at which point Max repeated his 30 baht offer. Again the driver drove away.
At this point, Marla, exhausted from her trip across the globe, asked Max what was going on. He explained that the drivers were demanding $1.60 for the cab ride and that he knew he could negotiatethe price down to $1.20. Marla was not only unimpressed, but also rather annoyed. She offered to “chip in” 40 cents if that would seal the deal and get her home. Max wanted to explain that it was important for him to get a deal that would impress his class the next day, but he decided not to push it.
Instead, he learned an important lesson. He had not only been ignoring the value of his own time but, more important, the value of Marla’s time.
It is common for negotiators to become so focused on “getting a good deal” or “winning” that they fail to consider the value of the time they are spending (or wasting) in pursuit of fairness or victory. In doing so, they often waste time on trivial negotiations that could be better spent consummating more important deals, completing other tasks, or simply relaxing. Many negotiators claim they are extremely busy people who are constantly short on time—yet these same people do a very poor job of prioritizing their time. If you tend to claim that you have very little free time, consider where your effort would provide the highest payoff. Then focus more on improving your performance in these critical negotiations and less on trivial negotiations, such as those that would give you only a nominal discount on an already acceptable starting price.
Unfortunately, making this change is not as simple as recognizing that time is a limited resource that should not be wasted. You also need to recognize the many ways in which you have been conditioned to make these kinds of mistakes and work hard to change your habits. For example, consider that, across cultures, people are conditioned to look for the best deal, to not waste money, to avoid penalties and fines, and to finish everything on their dinner plate. What’s wrong with such advice?
Usually there is nothing wrong with following these rules, but sometimes they motivate us to make irrational decisions that destroy value. Deepak discovered this one evening when his wife, Shikha, asked him to return the DVD they had rented the previous evening. The DVD was due back before midnight; if it was not returned on time, they would have to pay a fine. The problem was that Deepak happened to be sitting very comfortably in the living room. He had no desire to get up, get dressed, and drive two miles to return the movie. Deepak explained that he would prefer to return the movie the following day when he drove by the video store on the way to work, and that he could live with the $3 fine. Shikha saw things differently. She was unimpressed by Deepak’s position on the matter, which she characterized as “being lazy.”

Deepak suggested that they look at the situation in a different light. “Suppose there was no DVD or penalty involved,” he said. “Instead, imagine there’s someone standing outside the video store, handing out $3 to anyone who comes by. Would you want me to get up, get dressed, and drive two miles to pick up that $3? No way! So if it isn’t worth going out there for $3 in that situation, there really isn’t any reason for me to go now.”

Shikha agreed with Deepak’s argument, but as always, she improved his analysis. “From now on,” she said, “perhaps we should plan ahead so that we don’t find ourselves in situations where we have to choose between wasting money and wasting time.” In fact, she pointed out, Deepak could have returned the DVD on the way to work that morning, avoided the penalty, enjoyed the evening in the living room, and eliminated the need for this entire conversation. But, according to Deepak, that would not have been nearly as fun—or insightful.

As this story reveals, we are often tempted to underestimate the value of our time because we aremisapplying seemingly reasonable advice (e.g., get the best deal, don’t accept what is unfair, avoid penalties, and so on). Furthermore, as Shikha’s solution to the DVD problem reveals, it is often possible to make rational decisions and at the same time avoid unpleasant trade-offs if one has prepared effectively from the start.

WHEN YOUR BATNA STINKS—AND EVERYONE KNOWS IT 

In our jobs as professors at the Harvard Business School, second-year MBA students often visit us seeking advice on negotiating their job offers. Quite often, the students sit down and describe the excellent offer that they have received—great company, great location, great boss, and great initial assignment. We congratulate them on obtaining the offer and ask how we can help. They explain that the offer is just a bit low on one issue—salary. It seems that many of their friends have been offered more money by other firms.
At this point, we ask the question they learned to expect from us during their first-year course on negotiation: “What’s your BATNA? What other offers do you have?” They often complain that negotiating would be easy—and they wouldn’t need our advice—if they had multiple offers. The problem, they explain, is that they only have one offer and that the prospective employer knows this (or will soon know, because the student will not lie about it).

How should these students negotiate for a higher salary? While the advice we give varies by situation, one piece of advice that we commonly offer—based on Deepak’s story in Chapter 11— comes as a bit of a surprise to our students: They should call their future employer, express their enthusiasm regarding the company and the offer, and accept the job. Then, after accepting, they should ask their new boss for a favor: “Would you mind looking at some data regarding starting salaries of MBA students who have graduated from HBS? I’d like you to consider whether a somewhat higher starting salary might be both possible and fairer.” Finally, they should clarify that they have already accepted the offer regardless of whether the salary changes or not—what happens in the salary negotiation will not affect their decision to join the firm.

Our students commonly protest that they would lose too much power in the negotiation by accepting first. “What power are you referring to?” we ask. “If you try to negotiate with your new employer, and your BATNA is to remain on the job market without an offer, and the employer knows that they have already given you something higher than your reservation value, then you have little power to begin with.” In such a situation, you may not want to play the “negotiation” game. You may be much better off playing a different game—for example, the game called “fairness,” or the one called “could you please help me?” More generally, you may want to avoid negotiating when a reasonable analysis suggests that you will lose the negotiation game but may win some other type of game. In particular, when your BATNA stinks, their BATNA is fine, and all of this information is common knowledge, you may want to simply say yes in the negotiation and then change the game.

Does this advice work? Think back to how Deepak negotiated a job offer with his preferred employer. His strategy was to accept the offer before negotiating and then to create an environment where the managing partner liked him, wanted to help him, and could find ways to justify a salary increase. The result: a 10 percent increase in starting salary after both the HR department and the managing partner had said that salaries were nonnegotiable.

WHEN NEGOTIATING SENDS THE WRONG SIGNAL 

Steve, a senior manager in a highly profitable accounting firm, was surprised one morning when he received a phone call from the president of his company. “What could he possibly want with me?” wondered Steve, who had never before met or spoken with the president. The president told Steve that he was planning to make a lot of changes in the organization and that one of the primary changes would involve restructuring the executive team: some people would be leaving, and some new blood would be brought in. The president asked Steve to meet with him the following day for a brief conversation. The next day, only minutes into their conversation, the president offered Steve a new job at the executive level, a promotion that would move him up three levels in the organization.

Most employees of most organizations would be absolutely thrilled to receive such an opportunity.

But this situation was different. In his current position, Steve was not only earning a high salary, but was also a member of a highly coveted bonus pool that usually tripled his annual salary. The new job, while at the executive level, might end up paying him considerably less. The president had not discussed compensation, and Steve wondered whether the president himself knew what his salary would be in the new position. Steve was excited about the new job, but was extremely worried about the prospect of seeing his compensation cut in half, or worse! What to do? Should he ask what compensation he would receive? Should he anchor the negotiation by revealing how much compensation he was currently receiving and then invite a response? Should he ask for more time to make the decision and then try to obtain additional information from other sources? Should he simply accept or reject the offer as it stood?

There may be no single “right” approach to this situation. But let’s consider what Steve did and, more important, why he did it.

Based on how quickly the company president made the offer and based on the fact that the president waited to make the offer until they were face-to-face, Steve gathered that the president wanted a quick decision. Furthermore, the president had chosen not to bring up the topic of compensation. Steve interpreted this to mean one of two things: either the president was confident that the compensation would be sufficient, or he was purposefully avoiding the topic because he did not want Steve’s decision to be motivated primarily by financial considerations. Given the emphasis the president kept placing on “building a new team with a shared vision,” Steve reasoned that the latter was almost certainly true. If so, perhaps the worst thing to do would be to bring up compensation.

Steve came to the conclusion that this was not the time to negotiate. For one thing, even if the compensation was very low, he might be in a better position to negotiate a higher salary after he had proven himself in the new role. He might regret his decision not to negotiate if he was unable to negotiate an adequate salary later, but he could stomach the risk. More important, trying to negotiate under the current circumstances would send the wrong signal—that he was more interested in money than in being a part of the leadership team and helping to reshape the organization.

Steve told the president that, while some aspects of the job were obviously still unclear, he shared his vision and was excited to join the team. He added: “I fully trust you to help make my transition into this new role both successful and mutually rewarding.”Later, some of Steve’s colleagues told him that he should have negotiated compensation—that he was in a great position to do so because the president had clearly sought him out.
Steve’s response? “Maybe I could have tried to negotiate a stellar compensation package, and maybe I’ll regret not having negotiated when I had the chance. But I’m absolutely certain that I sent exactly the right signals—that I am a team player, that I trust the president, and that I am not solely motivated by dollars and cents—to a powerful person with whom I expect to have a close long-term relationship.”

What eventually transpired? After he received the promotion, Steve’s salary was cut in half—but he was given enough in bonuses, stock options, and scope for future advancement that his annual compensation effectively doubled.

As the reasoning behind Steve’s decision reveals, the decision to negotiate always sends some signal. Typically, the signal you are sending when you initiate a negotiation is that you require more in value before you can agree to a deal. And, typically, this is a fine signal to send. However, in some situations, the signal you send when you decide to negotiate is that you do not trust the other side or that you are more concerned about what you will get from the deal than you are about the relationship, or about the rationale for the deal itself.

If your decision to negotiate will send the “wrong” signal, you have three options.

1. Negotiate anyway. 

You might decide that what you stand to gain from negotiation outweighs the costs of sending the wrong signal.

2. Change the signal. 

You might try to actively manage the way in which the other party will perceive your decision to negotiate. For example, Steve might have initiated a discussion of compensation as follows: “I am very excited about the offer and hope to play a role in transforming this organization. I also appreciate your trust in me. Before I sign on, I do have some questions. I’m sure that’s no surprise. Would it be possible for you to give me some more information regarding my role, responsibilities, and compensation? Regarding compensation—I don’t want you to get the wrong idea. I am not fixated on the dollars and cents. But it is something that anyone with three young children needs to at least consider. Is this something that we can discuss?” In saying this, Steve might have made it less likely that launching a compensation negotiation would upset or offend the president.

3. Decide not to negotiate. 

If you think that the cost of sending a negative signal is too high and that it will be difficult to change the signal, you may want to decide, as Steve did, that this is not the time to negotiate.

WHEN RELATIONSHIPS MIGHT SUFFER 

Sharon and Mark purchased a piece of land and proceeded with their plans to build their dream house. The home’s construction would stretch their budget, but they carefully planned a way to build at the lowest price possible. Fortunately, Sharon and Mark had attended a seminar advertised in their local newspaper on “getting the price you deserve.” Their instructor had told them that the more bids they sought, the lower their price would be. Accordingly, they took their architectural plans to eight different builders and were delighted when one builder came in with a surprisingly low bid—a full 10 percent lower than the second-lowest bid.

The negotiation course seemed to be paying off. If the builder is this desperate for projects, Sharon and Mark speculated, perhaps he will accept further concessions. In face-to-face negotiations, they pushed for a lower price. At first, the builder resisted. But when Sharon and Mark offered to sign the contract that day, set a deposit check on the table (another trick picked up in the negotiation class), and then threatened to go elsewhere, the builder had to reconsider. He thought about his desire to keep his crew employed and agreed to lower the price by another 3 percent, shaking his head and grumbling about whether any profit remained. Sharon and Mark seemed to have negotiated the best price they could have hoped to obtain—the lowest bidder’s reservation value! Their happiness kept them from noticing the fact that the builder felt trapped and was unhappy with how the negotiation had unfolded.

After the contract was signed, Sharon and Mark’s architect came up with a number of changes, all of which they thought looked great. They took these seemingly small “change orders” to the builder and were shocked by the prices that the builder demanded to accommodate the altered work plan.

Sharon and Mark pushed hard for lower prices, but this time the builder refused to make concessions.
Their excellent initial price continued to rise, due not only to the change orders, but also to an increase in lumber costs (the contract had a cost-of-lumber adjustment). Many difficult conversations took place between the builder, who remained grumpy about his profit margin, and Sharon and Mark, who were frustrated by the price increases.

When the builder told them that the house would most likely be completed in three months, Sharon and Mark sold their condo and set a closing date that coincided with the expected completion date of the house. However, the house was not completed on time, and Sharon and Mark were forced to move into temporary housing. Again and again, they discussed their need for completion with the builder, who repeatedly blamed the delays on subcontractors. Sharon and Mark checked the contract and found no clause dealing with delays.

After nine weeks in temporary housing, Sharon and Mark finally moved into their supposed “dream house.” At first they were pleased with the house. But the longer they lived in it, the more problems they encountered: one of the heating systems failed during the winter, two of the appliances were unreliable, some of the carpentry wasn’t finished, and cracks started to emerge in the drywall. Some of these items were under warranty; some were not. The builder did not quickly attend even to those items that were under warranty; after all, he had already been fully paid for his work. “I know that I’m obligated to fix the cracks in the drywall,” the builder said during one heated conversation with Sharon, “but I’m not obligated to do it at your convenience.”Ultimately, Sharon and Mark regretted that they had ever decided to build their dream house. Their condo had been fine for their needs, and a lot less of a hassle.

Why was the building project such a disaster? Sharon and Mark got a great price for a house that they eventually did not want. They focused on getting a low price at the expense of other important issues, such as timely completion and quality construction. Most important, they pushed for a price that, while desirable, destroyed their relationship with the other party. When Sharon and Mark received the builder’s low bid, they probably should have accepted it and then negotiated “friendlier” issues, such as how to deal with change orders, whether to add a small lateness penalty and a small timeliness bonus to the contract, and so on. Sharon and Mark did a good job negotiating the price of their home construction, but they would have done a much better job negotiating their overall outcome had they avoided negotiating the builder down to his reservation value.
As we think about how Sharon and Mark should have handled their negotiation, it is worth recalling (from Chapter 1) what transpired when Albert Einstein was “negotiating” his job offer with Princeton University. Einstein requested an annual salary of $3,000, and Princeton responded by offering to pay him $15,000 annually. Princeton’s decision to offer Einstein an appropriate wage, rather than accepting (or haggling over) his low bid, was the right one to make—and not simply because the other party was Albert Einstein. Organizations often face a choice between paying employees the bare minimum required to attract and retain them and paying a “fairer” or more generous wage. Ethical considerations aside, organizations (and consumers like Sharon and Mark) will generally benefit by taking a long-term perspective that entails building a reputation for fairness and for contributing to the well-being of their negotiation counterparts.

WHEN NEGOTIATING IS CULTURALLY INAPPROPRIATE 

Let’s revisit Max’s taxi negotiations in Thailand and see how these might work—or not work—once Max returns to Boston. Imagine that Max returns to the United States, walks out of the airport terminal, and waits in line for a taxi. When his taxi arrives, Max asks the driver how much it will cost for a ride to his home in Cambridge. The driver says that he will go by what the meter registers, but estimates that it will be close to $20. As other travelers wait impatiently behind him, Max begins to haggle. He offers $10. The taxi driver swears at Max and calls the attendant responsible for managing the taxi stand. The attendant pulls Max aside and tells him that he is holding up the line and will have to either take the ride now or find a different way to get home.

Should Max be surprised that this negotiation failed? Of course not. Nor should he be surprised if he next went to a grocery store and was unable to engage the clerk in a negotiation over the price of a bottle of water. Some of the behaviors that Max found to be perfectly acceptable in Thailand would be laughable, even offensive, back home in the United States. It is worth mentioning that we have had students tell us occasionally about their success in negotiating seemingly nonnegotiable items (such as the price of a cup of coffee at Starbucks). You might also recall how Shikha, Deepak’s wife, successfully negotiated with a taxi driver in Boston (as described in Chapter 3). But very often, such negotiations will fail because they are not culturally appropriate.

Within our own culture, we tend to know which behaviors are consistent with social norms and which are not. Our knowledge of our own culture tells us what time we should show up for a partythat “starts at 7 P.M.,” whether it is acceptable to burp after a meal or to show the soles of our shoes, and countless other rules of conduct. Our understanding of our own culture also tells us when it is appropriate to negotiate—and when it is not. Unfortunately, we often violate such norms in other cultures. If Max, when in Bangkok, had simply accepted the 70 baht offer from the taxi driver, he not only would have overpaid, but he would have also given the driver a funny story (about the ignorant foreigner) that he could share with his friends. As another example, consider that in some cultures and contexts, it may be acceptable to anchor aggressively and then negotiate down to a mutually agreeable price; in others, your willingness to retreat from your original, justified anchor may signal to the other party that you were initially lying or being greedy.

How can you know whether it is okay to negotiate in a particular culture? How should you initiate negotiations in a different culture? The first step in answering these questions is always preparation.

Before you travel, elicit advice from others who have done business in that culture or who are from that culture. Learn as much as you can, including what is and is not appropriate to say and discuss, how and when to initiate substantive discussions, how to build rapport and trust, how to manage status and respect issues, and how aggressively people can be expected to anchor. The more you know going in, the better prepared you will be to negotiate effectively.

Even if you are not culturally sophisticated, all is not lost. Imagine that you find yourself having to negotiate in a foreign land where you know very little about the local culture or social norms. What should you do? Ask to be educated. Most people in most parts of the world will not be offended by— and will probably appreciate—a statement such as the following:

As you know, we have not done business in this country before. That’s one of the reasons we are thrilled to have this opportunity to meet with you and discuss issues of mutual interest. However, this also means that we may not always know the correct way to articulate or convey certain ideas. We hope you will be forgiving if we say or do something that seems awkward. We assure you that we mean no disrespect and that, while we may stumble occasionally, we are fast learners. Perhaps you are feeling similar anxiety, in which case we can assure you that we understand your good intentions. I think we all stand to benefit if everyone feels comfortable discussing issues openly, asking questions, and being patient. I hope that you agree. We’re excited about the opportunity we have not only to do business with you, but also to learn about your culture. 

How would you respond if someone with whom you were negotiating made this statement? In all likelihood, you would welcome their sentiments and feel more relaxed and comfortable yourself.

Unfortunately, when negotiating cross-culturally, many people instead decide to “fake it,” rely on cultural stereotypes, or ignore the cultural element altogether. None of these strategies beats the investigative approach that we first introduced in Chapter 3: when you don’t know something, try to learn it.

WHEN YOUR BATNA BEATS THEIR BEST POSSIBLE OFFER 

In 1981, Roger Fisher and William Ury published a short book entitled Getting to YES: Negotiating Agreement Without Giving In. As you may know, the book became a best seller and transformed the practice of negotiation. Previously, most writing on the topic of negotiation focused on protecting “what’s yours” and getting as much of “what’s theirs” as possible—an approach that many people would describe as “win-lose” negotiation. By contrast, Getting to YES encouraged agreement andexalted the pursuit of “win-win” deals.

Overall, Getting to YES has had a very positive impact on society. But among some of its enthusiasts, the book seems to have created too strong of a bias toward always “getting to yes.” The amazing success of Getting to YES has contributed to the perception that an impasse, or “no deal,” is equivalent to a failed negotiation. But sometimes in negotiation, you should not get to yes! Sometimes your BATNA is better than any offer your current negotiation counterpart can make, and “no deal” is the best outcome that two fully rational negotiators can hope to achieve. In these cases, the best you can do is to get to “no” as efficiently as possible. How will you know when “no deal” is the best outcome? Look for the following signs:

• You have told them about your other offers, and they are unable to match or beat the value that these alternatives offer to you.
• Instead of trying to meet your needs, they are trying hard to convince you that your interests are not what you think they are.
• They seem more interested in stretching out the negotiation than in exchanging information, building a relationship, or structuring an agreement.
• Despite your best efforts, they will not answer any of your questions; nor will they ask about your needs or interests.
In such situations, there is no virtue in negotiating for the sake of negotiating or negotiating well past the time it should take for you to discover that no ZOPA exists. When there is no ZOPA, there should be no deal. In such situations, instead of “getting to yes,” exercise your BATNA.

CAN’T A GENIUS NEGOTIATE EVERYTHING?

As we have stressed throughout this book, more often than not, negotiating allows you to create value above and beyond your alternatives to reaching agreement. But it is worth keeping in mind that not every aspect of life is a negotiation. By considering the context of the negotiation, the relationships involved, and your alternatives away from the table, you will become adept at identifying when to negotiate, when to accept a deal without negotiating, and when to simply walk away. Some negotiation “experts” will tell you that “you can negotiate anything.” Perhaps you can—but that does not mean you should. Often, there are better things to do than negotiate. Negotiation geniuses are able to recognize and leverage these alternatives.

CHAPTER 14: The Path to Genius 

Some years ago, one of us sat in on an MBA negotiation class that was taught by a well-known negotiation professor. It was the last day of the semester-long course, and the professor kept referring to his students as “negotiation experts” (for instance, “now that you are negotiation experts,” and so on). We found this quite disturbing. These students were not experts—certainly not yet. Some of them might never become negotiation experts. And yet the last day of the course was being celebrated as the last step in the learning process. In contrast, we hold no such illusions. Rather, we believe that reading this book is your first step toward becoming a negotiation genius—or expert.

Recall the distinction we made in Chapter 6 between experience and expertise. Experience is what you gain when you engage in a particular behavior (such as negotiation) many times. Expertise is what you gain when you are able to infuse your experience with a “strategic conceptualization” of what you are doing. Unfortunately, many people confuse these two ideas and mistakenly think that their vast experience in negotiation qualifies them as experts.

One of our executive students recently told us that he didn’t expect to learn much from a course on negotiation. He had accumulated many years of negotiation experience and had “seen it all.” In support of his argument for the supremacy of experience, he even quoted Benjamin Franklin:

“Experience is a dear teacher.” Unfortunately for the student (and his prospects for learning), he had misunderstood Franklin’s point. When he used the word “dear,” Franklin meant it as a synonym for “expensive,” not “precious.” This becomes clear when you consider Franklin’s full statement: “Experience is a dear teacher, but fools will learn at no other.” Yes, experience is an extremely important part of becoming a negotiation genius, but it is not sufficient.

The students whose professor told them they were experts, the dealmaker who came to us with twenty years of negotiating experience, and you, all have one thing in common: when it comes to negotiation, you do some things well, you do some things poorly, and the best way for you to become a more effective negotiator—indeed, a negotiation genius—is to think more deeply and analytically about the framework we have developed. Only by leveraging experience and insight will you truly achieve expertise.

WHICH STORY WILL YOU TELL? 

Try to remember a recent negotiation in which you reached an agreement, but got a pretty lousy deal.
Now imagine that you complained about the outcome to your boss, colleague, friend, or spouse. How did you account for your result? Here are some common explanations that we have heard from negotiators.

• “The other party said that they had a better offer from the competition. There was nothing more that I could do.”
• “The market moved against us.”
• “There was not enough time to push for a better deal.”

And here are some explanations that we rarely hear:
• “I didn’t prepare systematically.”
• “Our team was not well-coordinated.”
• “I didn’t collect the information that I needed prior to the negotiation.”
• “I blurted out an offer before I thought it through.”

The difference between the two lists is crucial. The first consists of external attributions. The failure was due to factors beyond your control. The problem was with the situation, not with what you did or did not do. In contrast, the second list consists of internal attributions for the failure—there were things you could have done differently to achieve a better outcome. When we think of our successes, we are very quick to attribute them to factors within our control. But when we think of failures, we usually find ways of externalizing the blame.
The good news is that these types of external attributions may salvage your reputation with your boss. They will also make you feel better about the “fact” that the bad deal wasn’t your fault and that you did the best you could. The bad news is that the poor outcome probably was at least partially your fault; thus, you are not being entirely honest with yourself or with others. Most often, when you get a lousy deal, it is because you were in a difficult situation and you did not handle it as well as you could have. Now for the really bad news: when you attribute your failures to external factors, you make it very difficult to learn from your experience and improve as a negotiator.
As a negotiator, you face a choice: do you want to feel good about yourself or do you want to learn? Because you have reached the last chapter of this book, we presume the latter. If so, your goal is to find ways to integrate the principles, strategies, and tactics presented in this book into your life.
We end by suggesting some ways for doing so.

PERFECT CAN BE THE ENEMY OF GOOD 

It has been said that “perfect is the enemy of good,” a principle that applies to personal change in many areas. If you try to do too much, too soon, you will be overwhelmed. For example, you may want to try to memorize all of the ideas and strategies you found useful in this book so that you will be prepared for every possible eventuality in your next negotiation. If you try to do this, you will inevitably fall short of your expectations—and of your potential.

In addition to recognizing the virtues of incremental (rather than hurried) progress, you must anticipate the various obstacles to change that you will undoubtedly face. You may find it difficult to try new ideas or strategies because you are risk averse or because you find the status quo to be comforting. Or you may find it difficult to change your ways when everyone around you expects you to believe certain things and behave a certain way. It is also possible that you simply won’t have the time necessary to devote to change. Recognize that all of these obstacles—and others that you might think of—are typical. Your need to confront these obstacles does not say anything about you or your prospects for effective change; it simply means that you are human. This understanding may give you some relief, but it does not solve your problem. How can you overcome common obstacles to change and effectively leverage the ideas in this book?

Here are some practical steps that you can follow to transition from reading about key negotiation ideas and strategies to changing how you actually negotiate:

1. Review the book (or any notes you may have taken as you read) and make a list of all of the strategies and tactics that you would like to try in your own negotiations. Once you have done this, identify which items on the list require further contemplation and which ones you can use immediately.

2. Among those ideas that you wish to contemplate further, identify one key concept that you will spend time working on in the week ahead. Set aside some time in your schedule to think more deeply about this idea. How might you apply it to your negotiations? What are its strengths? What are its weaknesses? How might you integrate the principle into your way of thinking?
Do the same for all of the other ideas you would like to contemplate further: tackle one idea each week. If you have the time to explore more ideas in a particular week, add items to your weekly list.

3. Identify other people, such as friends and colleagues, with whom you would like to discuss particular negotiation strategies. Ask them to play devil’s advocate to your proposed use of a strategy and to critique your game plan. Trying out new negotiation strategies on supportive friends or colleagues will not only give you the confidence to transfer your new skills to important negotiations, but will also help you identify mistakes you may have overlooked.

4. For those strategies that you are ready to implement immediately, think about your current (or upcoming) negotiations. Write down which specific strategies and tactics you would like to employ in each negotiation. To avoid “shooting from the hip” when you get to the bargaining table, you should also plan how exactly you will implement these strategies.

5. After your negotiations, think about other strategies that you could have applied but did not. Think about how you might do so in the future.

6. Every so often, revisit the book to see if there are other ideas, strategies, or tactics that seem relevant to your current or upcoming negotiations.

CREATING THE RIGHT ENVIRONMENT FOR GENIUS 

An executive student who runs a midsize company came back to visit Deepak a year after taking his course on negotiation. The executive had been so energized by the course material that he wanted all of his employees to learn and master the strategies discussed in class. During the course of the past year, he reported, he had put forth a lot of effort to educate his employees. Unfortunately, he had achieved very mixed results. He described the problem: “In my company, we have two divisions: the ‘Openers’ and the ‘Closers.’ It is the job of Openers to bring in potential clients. Once the potential client is sufficiently interested in what we have to offer, they are passed on to the Closers. It is the Closers’ job to close the deal. When I tried to teach my employees about investigative negotiation, creating and claiming value, etc., a strange thing happened. The Openers got the message quickly. They were excited to leverage these new ideas in their negotiations with potential clients. But the Closers—they didn’t get it. They looked at me as if I was talking complete nonsense. And they went back to their jobs and didn’t change a thing. They continue to claim very little value and to do whatever it takes to sign the deal. They seem to have no sense of the merits of value creation, or of the potential for value claiming!”

The executive wondered aloud whether the problem was that he was recruiting more open-minded people as Openers and more closed-minded people as Closers. Deepak responded by asking whether, in his firm, these two divisions were actually referred to as “Openers” and “Closers.” “Yes,” the executive said. “Why, then,” asked Deepak, “are you so surprised that your Closers are closing deals for you?” The executive was not sure what he meant, so Deepak asked another question: “What do you think Closers are most afraid of doing in their jobs?” The executive thought for a moment, then responded: “Losing the deal.” Deepak asked if there were any incentive systems in place to reward Closers. There were: their bonuses were tied to the number of deals they closed.

That was the problem. These employees were being told (literally) that their job was to close the deal. They were also being rewarded financially on the basis of closing the deal. Yet the executive was surprised when the Closers ignored his suggestion that they should try to claim as much value as possible. Why would they do anything that might risk losing the deal?

This problem is common. Often, we—or our employees and coworkers—have both the analytic ability to learn new skills and the desire to change our behavior, yet we are constrained by the culture or incentive systems that exist in our organizations. For the ideas in this book to take shape in the real world, you need to take steps to remove these constraints. If you are in a position of authority, assess the culture and incentive systems that govern your team, division, or organization. If you determine that these systems will stifle the changes you hope will take root in the negotiation behaviors of your employees or colleagues, work to facilitate change. If you are not in a position of authority, but can see how your organization’s culture or incentive system is creating a barrier to change, consider taking it upon yourself to educate those who can do something about it.

THE DISAPPEARING CIRCLE 

When executives and MBA students first enroll in a course on negotiation, they typically arrive with assumptions about the “things that are negotiable” in life. Usually, in their minds, a small circle of negotiable things exists: buying or selling a house, a car, or a business; haggling with a street vendor; negotiating salary with an employer; and perhaps little else. They look forward to learning how to be more effective in these negotiations. But as the course progresses, and we discuss different strategies and tactics for negotiating in a wide variety of contexts, their circle of negotiable things begins to grow. More and more issues, conflicts, and situations seem negotiable. Students often report that this is an empowering feeling. But where does it end? How large is the circle really?

Those who reflect deeply on the ideas presented in their negotiation course—or the ideas presented in this book—in the months and years that follow their classroom (or reading) experience discover that, eventually, the circle grows infinitely large; that is, it simply disappears. There are no longer “things that are negotiable” and “things that are not negotiable.” Instead, they discover that they have learned a set of basic principles for human interaction. These principles are not about buying, selling, crafting deals, reaching agreements, overcoming bias, and so on. Those activities are mere applications of more fundamental principles for successfully engaging with other people who, like you, are usually well-intentioned human beings who have different interests and perspectives.

A negotiation genius is someone for whom the circle has disappeared—for her, the ideas and principles are what matter, and these are ingrained in her approach to dealing with all types of human interaction. For a negotiation genius, applying the ideas in this book during a complex business transaction is no different from applying the ideas when having a conversation with a spouse, a friend, or an employee. Investigative negotiation principles are as applicable to a legal dispute as they are to a spat with a coworker; influence tactics can be usefully applied not only to the sale of your business services, but also in your negotiations with your children.

NEGOTIATION GENIUS IS ACHIEVABLE 

We end with an observation regarding genius. The mistake is to think that some people are born geniuses (Einstein, Mozart, Michael Jordan, et cetera), and others of us are not. In fact, genius is often a combination of natural ability and a lot of hard work. But, you will argue, no amount of hard work will turn you into Michael Jordan or Mozart or Einstein. You are probably correct—you are unlikely to have the “raw materials” needed for their achievements. The good news is that you do have the raw materials needed to become a negotiation genius—almost everyone does. Negotiation genius is about human interaction, and the only raw material you need to achieve it is the ability to change your beliefs, assumptions, and perspective. You have this ability. If you now put forth the effort to implement what you have learned, then you will become a negotiation genius—someone who finds it easy to achieve brilliant results in all types of negotiations. We hope you will put forth this effort. We hope this book motivates you to do so and guides you along the path.

Coronavirus disease (COVID-19) advice for the public - Myth busters by WHO

1. The novel coronavirus (COVID-19) was first reported in Wuhan, China, on Dec. 31, 2019. It causes illnesses ranging from the common cold to the more severe Middle East Respiratory Syndrome (MERS-CoV) and Severe Acute Respiratory Syndrome (SARS-CoV). The World Health Organization (WHO) has issued some guidelines to negate misconceptions among people regarding the current outbreak of the COVID-19. 

2. COVID-19 virus can be transmitted in areas with hot and humid climates

From the evidence so far, the COVID-19 virus can be transmitted in ALL AREAS, including areas with hot and humid weather. Regardless of climate, adopt protective measures if you live in, or travel to an area reporting COVID-19. The best way to protect yourself against COVID-19 is by frequently cleaning your hands. By doing this you eliminate viruses that may be on your hands and avoid infection that could occur by then touching your eyes, mouth, and nose.

3. Cold weather and snow CANNOT kill the new coronavirus

There is no reason to believe that cold weather can kill the new coronavirus or other diseases. The normal human body temperature remains around 36.5°C (97.7°F) to 37°C (98.6°F), regardless of the external temperature or weather. The most effective way to protect yourself against the new coronavirus is by frequently cleaning your hands with alcohol-based hand rub or washing them with soap and water.

4. Taking a hot bath does not prevent the new coronavirus disease

Taking a hot bath will not prevent you from catching COVID-19. Your normal body temperature remains around 36.5°C (97.7°F) to 37°C (98.6°F), regardless of the temperature of your bath or shower. Actually, taking a hot bath with extremely hot water can be harmful, as it can burn you. The best way to protect yourself against COVID-19 is by frequently cleaning your hands. By doing this you eliminate viruses that may be on your hands and avoid infection that could occur by then touching your eyes, mouth, and nose.

5. The new coronavirus CANNOT be transmitted through mosquito bites.

To date there has been no information nor evidence to suggest that the new coronavirus could be transmitted by mosquitoes. The new coronavirus is a respiratory virus which spreads primarily through droplets generated when an infected person coughs or sneezes, or through droplets of saliva or discharge from the nose. To protect yourself, clean your hands frequently with an alcohol-based hand rub or wash them with soap and water. Also, avoid close contact with anyone who is coughing and sneezing.

6. Are hand dryers effective in killing the new coronavirus?

No. Hand dryers are not effective in killing the 2019-nCoV. To protect yourself against the new coronavirus, you should frequently clean your hands with an alcohol-based hand rub or wash them with soap and water. Once your hands are cleaned, you should dry them thoroughly by using paper towels or a warm air dryer.

7. Can an ultraviolet disinfection lamp kill the new coronavirus?

UV lamps should not be used to sterilize hands or other areas of skin as UV radiation can cause skin irritation.

8. How effective are thermal scanners in detecting people infected with the new coronavirus?

Thermal scanners are effective in detecting people who have developed a fever (i.e. have a higher than normal body temperature) because of infection with the new coronavirus. However, they cannot detect people who are infected but are not yet sick with fever. This is because it takes between 2 and 10 days before people who are infected become sick and develop a fever.

9. Can spraying alcohol or chlorine all over your body kill the new coronavirus?

No. Spraying alcohol or chlorine all over your body will not kill viruses that have already entered your body. Spraying such substances can be harmful to clothes or mucous membranes (i.e. eyes, mouth). Be aware that both alcohol and chlorine can be useful to disinfect surfaces, but they need to be used under appropriate recommendations.

10. Is it safe to receive a letter or a package from China?

Yes, it is safe. People receiving packages from China are not at risk of contracting the new coronavirus. From previous analysis, we know coronaviruses do not survive long on objects, such as letters or packages.

11. Can pets at home spread the new coronavirus (2019-nCoV)?

At present, there is no evidence that companion animals/pets such as dogs or cats can be infected with the new coronavirus. However, it is always a good idea to wash your hands with soap and water after contact with pets. This protects you against various common bacteria such as E.coli and Salmonella that can pass between pets and humans.

12. Do vaccines against pneumonia protect you against the new coronavirus?

No. Vaccines against pneumonia, such as pneumococcal vaccine and Haemophilus influenza type B (Hib) vaccine, do not provide protection against the new coronavirus. The virus is so new and different that it needs its own vaccine. Researchers are trying to develop a vaccine against 2019-nCoV, and WHO is supporting their efforts. Although these vaccines are not effective against 2019-nCoV, vaccination against respiratory illnesses is highly recommended to protect your health.

13. Can regularly rinsing your nose with saline help prevent infection with the new coronavirus?

No. There is no evidence that regularly rinsing the nose with saline has protected people from infection with the new coronavirus. There is some limited evidence that regularly rinsing nose with saline can help people recover more quickly from the common cold. However, regularly rinsing the nose has not been shown to prevent respiratory infections.

14. Can eating garlic help prevent infection with the new coronavirus?

Garlic is a healthy food that may have some antimicrobial properties. However, there is no evidence from the current outbreak that eating garlic has protected people from the new coronavirus.

15. Does putting on sesame oil block the new coronavirus from entering the body?

No. Sesame oil does not kill the new coronavirus. There are some chemical disinfectants that can kill the 2019-nCoV on surfaces. These include bleach/chlorine-based disinfectants, either solvents, 75 percent ethanol, peracetic acid and chloroform. However, they have little or no impact on the virus if you put them on the skin or under your nose. It can even be dangerous to put these chemicals on your skin.

16. Does the new coronavirus affect older people, or are younger people also susceptible?

People of all ages can be infected by the new coronavirus (2019-nCoV). Older people, and people with pre-existing medical conditions (such as asthma, diabetes, heart disease) appear to be more vulnerable to becoming severely ill with the virus. WHO advises people of all ages to take steps to protect themselves from the virus, for example by following good hand hygiene and good respiratory hygiene.

17. Are antibiotics effective in preventing and treating the new coronavirus?

No, antibiotics do not work against viruses, only bacteria. The new coronavirus (2019-nCoV) is a virus and, therefore, antibiotics should not be used as a means of prevention or treatment. However, if you are hospitalized for the 2019-nCoV, you may receive antibiotics because bacterial co-infection is possible.

18. Are there any specific medicines to prevent or treat the new coronavirus?

To date (03/15/2020), there is no specific medicine recommended to prevent or treat the new coronavirus (2019-nCoV). However, those infected with the virus should receive appropriate care to relieve and treat symptoms, and those with severe illness should receive optimized supportive care. Some specific treatments are under investigation, and will be tested through clinical trials. WHO is helping to accelerate research and development efforts with a range or partners.

Ref: https://www.who.int/emergencies/diseases/novel-coronavirus-2019/advice-for-public 

25 Interesting facts about the Indian rupee

1. In November 1994, printing of Re 1 note was stopped mainly due to higher cost and for freeing capacity to print currency notes of higher denomination.
After a gap of over 20 years, Re 1 note has been released in the country.

2. First paper currency
The process of issuing paper currency started in the 18th century. Private banks like Bank of Hindustan, Bank of Bengal, the Bank of Bombay, and the Bank of Madras were among the first to print paper money. 
It was only after the Paper Currency Act of 1861 that the government of India was given the monopoly to print currency.

3. The highest denomination note ever printed by the RBI was the Rs 10,000 note in 1938 and again in 1954. These notes were demonetized in 1946 and again in 1978.

4. The RBI can issue banknotes in the denominations of 5000 and 10,000, or any other denomination that the Central Government may specify. But, there can't be banknotes in denominations higher than 10,000 as per the current provisions of the RBI Act, 1934.

5. What's the rupee made of?
Not paper! Your currency is composed of cotton and cotton rag.

6. Commemorative coins in India have been issued on various occasions. 
The first 75 rupee coin was issued in 2010 to celebrate 75 years of Reserve Bank of India.
In 2011, 150 rupee coins were issued to commemorate the 150th birth anniversary of Rabindranath Tagore.  
The first 1000 rupee coin was announced in 2012, issued to commemorate the 1000 years of Brihadeeswarar temple in Thanjavur, Tamil Nadu.

7. Coins can be issued up to the denomination of Rs. 1000 as per Coinage Act, 2011.

8. 15 languages appear in the language panel of banknotes in addition to Hindi prominently displayed in the centre of the note and English on the reverse of the banknote.

9. Rupee symbol
In 2010, rupee got a new symbol ₹, designed by D.Udaya Kumar. 
The symbol was derived from Devanagari letter "र" (ra) and is a combination of the Latin letter 'R' and Devanagari letter 'र'. The parallel line in the symbol is drawn to make it look like the tricolor of the Indian national flag.

10. For the visually impaired
There is an identification mark (different geometrical shapes) on the left hand side of each note in the form of raised print (intaglio) - a diamond for Rs 1000, circle for Rs 500, triangle for Rs 100, square for Rs 50, rectangle for Rs 20 and none for Rs 10 - to help the visually impaired identify the denomination. 

11. Mystery of the vanishing rupee
In 2007, an acute shortage of coins gripped the eastern Indian city of Calcutta, which saw shopkeepers begging change from beggars and buying coins at prices above their face value.
Ex: A woman selling stacks of 100 rupee coins (USD$ 2.5) for 120 rupees (UDS$ 3), counts notes at a bus stand in Calcutta, India Friday, June 15, 2007.

12. When Re 1 coin was worth Rs 5
One reason cited for this acute shortage in Calcutta was: coins being melted down and smuggled to Bangladesh where they were turned into razor blades, ornaments, fountain pen nibs, metal idols.
The one rupee coin was actually worth Rs 35, for every single rupee coin was being melted into 5-7 blades, as per new reports.

13. Cardboard tokens as coins
To counter the coin shortage in the East, workers in tea gardens in states bordering Bangladesh, were encouraged by the owners to accept brown-coloured cardboard tokens instead of the metallic coins. 
The cardboard tokens were made of the same size as the coins they meant to represent, with similar values marked on them. 

14. Rupee vs dollar in 1947
The 'fact' that had been floating around that the rupee was equal to a US dollar in 1947 is but a myth.
At the time of independence (and till 1966), India’s currency was pegged to British pound, (and the exchange rate was Rs 13.33 to the pound). The pound itself was pegged to $4.03. 
That means, the $ to INR rate would be somewhere around Rs 4.

15. Notes are printed at four printing presses located at Nashik, Dewas, Mysore and Salboni.
Coins are minted at the four mints at Mumbai, Noida, Kolkata and Hyderabad.

16. Each mint carries its unique identifier shape/sign at the bottom of the coin (beneath the year). 
Delhi mint - dot
Mumbai mint - diamond
Hyderabad mint - star
Kolkata mint - No mint mark

17. A rare 5-rupee note, dated January 5, 1916, issued by the Government of India in Karachi was sold for £3,100 ($5,297 U.S.) in a London auction conducted by Spink last year. Karachi was then part of India, until 1947.

18. During the British rule, and the first decade of independence, the rupee was divided into 16 annas. Each anna was subdivided into 4 paisas.
In 1957, decimalisation occurred and the rupee was divided into 100 naye paise (Hindi/Urdu for new paisas). After a few years, the initial "naye" was dropped.

19. The Rs 5-note was the first paper currency issued by RBI in January 1938. It had the portrait of King George VI.

20. Initially, Pakistan used British Indian coins and notes simply over-stamped with "Pakistan". New coins and banknotes were issued in 1948.

21. The 500 rupee note was introduced in 1987 and 1000 rupee note in 2000.

The Indian 2000-rupee banknote (₹2000) was released by the Reserve Bank of India (RBI) on 8 November 2016 after the demonetisation of ₹500 and ₹1000 banknotes and has been in circulation since 10 November 2016.

22. A one-rupee coin and above can be used to pay/settle any amount or sum. However, a 50 paise coin cannot be used to pay/settle any amount above Rs 10.

23. Ever wondered how the old notes are destroyed?
According to the data obtained by RTI activist Manoranjan Roy, 11,661 crore notes lost their usable value (between 2001 and now) and were shredded to bits, to be later balled or gummed together, and be reborn as coasters, paper-weights, pen stands, key chains. 
In 2010-11 alone, 1,385 crore notes worth Rs 1,78,830 crore were destroyed.

24. In 2013, a Mumbai-based jewelry chain launched Sachin Tendulkar gold and silver coins on the occasion of 'Akshay Tritya.' The cost of a 10-gm was Rs 34,000 (US$620) (Image above)
In 2014, Britain’s premium luxury goods brand East India Company issued an exclusive legal tender gold coin worth 12,000 pound sterling (about Rs 12 lakh) in honour of Sachin Tendulkar.

25. The tooled one rupee coin (with the portrait of King George VI, i.e., the Head on both the sides) in the 1975-cult classic 'Sholay', was bought by a Bollywood fan for Rs 26000 at an auction last year. 

Ref: www.msn.com

Tactics and Values in Negotiation (The Negotiation Book by Steve Gates)

“Experience is not what happens to you; it’s what you do with what happens to you.” - Aldous Huxley

The decisions you take and the way you behave during your negotiations will be influenced by how much power you think you have and by the way your own values or ethics influence your behavior.

The tactics you employ will be limited by both how much power you have, whether you have a short- or long-term relationship to consider and this may influence how ethical you choose to be during your negotiations. The dilemma of where the value of fairness fits into negotiation has challenged many organizations. For instance, some organizations who hold strong views on being fair and reasonable may take exception when faced with a trading partner who behaves in a manipulative or irrational manner. On principle, they will not tolerate the behavior and will exit the relationship. 

RECOGNIZING THE PROCESS AND THE GAMESMANSHIP IN PLAY

The way the balance of power is split, and how it shifts with time and circumstance, means you cannot expect agreements always to be, or appear to be, balanced and fair, or even consistent. You can, however, work towards getting the best possible deal given the circumstances you face. Some, faced with such situations, turn to tactics and some become victims of the tactics in play. The Complete Skilled Negotiator sees them for what they are and where necessary uses counter tactics to neutralize their effects.

I am not implying here what is right or wrong. You will conduct business based on values that are probably different from those of others. This does not make yours right or wrong; it does not make the other party’s values right or wrong. It simply means that our interpretation, understanding, and use of tactics will differ from others as the implications of making use of them will differ based on your circumstances and our view of what acceptable behavior is made up of. 

As a general rule, negotiations that focus on short-term agreements with parties with whom we have no ongoing relationship, or prospect of one in the future, are more inclined to gravitate towards value distribution (1–6 o’clock) negotiations. Tactics tend to be more readily used in these styles of negotiations as the relationships involved tend not to be long term. 

A QUESTION OF CHOICES AND PERSONAL STYLE

The concept of “fairness” is exploited by some negotiators through the use of tactics. Western democratic societies are designed to offer freedom and choice. This serves to remove the notion of being controlled, and, as long as we have choices, many perceive this as freedom and fairness. So choices are designed to signal fairness. However, if like governments you are controlling the options or choices, then you have the power to influence the outcome. However, if you are overtly unfair in the choices you provide others, trust will be difficult to build and, with no trust, it is difficult to negotiate collaboratively (7–12 o’clock on the clock face).

Social laws, or the unwritten laws of society, influence our view of what is fair and reasonable under whatever circumstances. Business partnerships, where there is a need to maintain productive relationships and the need to jointly problem solve or develop incremental value by working together, require at least some level of trust.

To be perceived to be fair in business, you need to offer choices: choices that are not so one-sided that they quickly become regarded transparent and unfair.

Personal attributes 
Your personal values and how they influence your behavior will have a powerful bearing on where you and the other party gravitate to on the clock face. They can, if not managed, directly influence whether you build relationships or whether you enter into combat each time you seek to agree terms. Below are some of the personal attributes to consider and the influence they will exert during your negotiations.

Trust in business has to be earned and is easily broken. It implies that you are good for your word. If you say something will happen, it happens, consistently. You approach the conversation from their perspective, sharing their concerns and working on the problems that you both identify, together. It does not mean that you have to pay by conceding on terms, by offering personal favors or by being more transparent with your interests.

Respect comes from being firm, consistent and reliable. If you are too flexible or concede too easily, the other party will regard you as being weak. In negotiation, everything is possible, but difficult. The fact that it is difficult ensures that the work you put into the deal, engineering the terms, and moving reluctantly, attracts respect for you, your position and your credibility.

Integrity comes from consistency. This can present issues for negotiators who are too focused on not being unpredictable. Maintaining confidentiality and being reliable, in that you follow through with your commitments, also help promote integrity, which in some relationships or even industries is critical if business is to take place at all.

Honesty. You never need to lie in negotiation. You don’t need to tell them what you won’t do. Focus on what you will do. Think “how” or “on what basis could we, or could they?” By telling them what you are prepared to do you are at least maintaining honesty. By telling them you are prepared to pay $100 when you know that you could pay $150 is not lying. Don’t confuse the process of negotiation with lying and telling the truth. If you lie in negotiation, you could be taking unnecessary risks, and in some cases completely compromising relationships, however, don’t expect everyone to adhere to this discipline.

Consideration of the needs of the other party. If you don’t understand these you are not ready to negotiate. Your planning, preparation, research, and exploration meetings are all there to help you to establish their position, motives, priorities, and interests. To place a value on these you have to understand the deal the way they do business from inside their head. Considering the facts will allow you to remain sensitive to the issues and respectful where necessary.

Empathy is about understanding and appreciating the challenges from their perspective, but never compromising because of such understandings.

Responsibility. It is you who will conduct your negotiations and you who will make the decisions with the authority limits you have been given. The more trust that genuinely exists within your relationships, the more scope you have to open up the agenda and work together creatively. This will only come about if you cultivate the necessary climate and discussions.

Risky attributes 

Openness. This can be dangerous in negotiation. Information is power and the more you share with the other party, the more you will expose yourself. Be open but stay within the parameters that you set yourself. If you don’t understand this from the outset you will place yourself in a very vulnerable position.

Compassion. In the tough world of business your job is to maximize opportunity. You will do this with those you can work with and rely on, and who remain highly competitive. This is a capitalist market we operate in. Compassion, like generosity, has to take a back seat once a negotiation commences unless of course you have a longer-term plan in mind.

WHAT ARE TACTICS?

When do tactics usually come into play?

Tactics tend to be used more frequently when one party has more power than the other and tries to take advantage of it. Tactics are also more frequently used where the nature of the negotiation is based on value distribution and the focus is on taking as much value off the table as possible.

Dealing with tactics and when to use them 

There are dozens of books written on negotiation that present tactics as the basis of negotiation. They are given names that serve to explain the approach: “The Russian front,” “The Trojan horse,” and so on. The most important thing about tactics is to recognize them for what they are.

• They are neither clever nor sophisticated.
• They are designed to apply pressure and usually by those who can because they have enough power, or think they have enough power, to do so, or those who think they are clever enough to do so without any consequences.

However, they are used with such regularity that one has to recognize and understand them, adapt to them, and, where necessary and appropriate, even use them. To help with this I have categorized a range of tactics using a simple scale of 1–10 (1 is low and 10 is high) against two factors:

• Power required: the amount of power you will need to have or be perceived to have relative to the other party for this tactic to work.
• Relationship erosion: the degree to which your relationship or any trust that may exist within it will be eroded, if the tactic once used becomes obvious or transparent to the other party.





For the purpose of outlining some of the more widely used tactics, I have placed them into one of seven categories. These are:

1. Information 
- “The hypothetical question”
- “Off the record”
- Full disclosure and openness
- Why?

2. Time and momentum - Deadlines
- “And just one more thing”
- Denied access
- Time constraint
- The auction
- Time out

3. Fear or guilt - Physically disturbing them
- Good guy, bad guy
- The Russian front
- Personal favor
- Guilty party
- The social smell
- Silence

4. Anchoring - Sow the seed early
- The power statement
- The mock shock
- The professional flinch
- The broken record

5. Empowerment - Higher authority
- Defense in depth
- Use of official authority
- “It’s all I can afford”
- Onus transfer
- Off-limits
- New faces

6. Moving the costs around
- The building block technique
- Wipe the proposal off the table without saying no
- Linking the issues
- Side issue or red herring
- The slice

7. Deceit - Trojan horse
- The incorrect summary
- Deliberate misunderstanding
- The dumb foreigner
- The loss leader

1. Information
Information is power. The more information you have about the options, circumstances, and priorities of the other party, the more powerful you become.

The Hypothetical Question 




“What if...” and “Suppose that...” questions used during the exploratory and closing stages can help you to work out the degree of flexibility the other party is prepared to offer, or the relative value of the issues being discussed.

For example: “What if we were to ‘hypothetically’ increase the order after 3 months, how might that change the fee structure?” There may be no intention of doing so, but the idea is to test assumptions, gain insights and untimately trade more effectively later on during your negotiation. It can be used to explore possibilities, especially where deadlock is looming.

Off the record 




This is where one party asks the other for a view, a comment, or to simply share an insight, in the name of helping both parties make progress. Their intentions may be genuine, but the information is sought for one reason only: to get inside your head. You may choose to use it yourself for the same reason. However, when asked for an “off the record” meeting, always remember the real risks you carry. Any indications, signals, comments, or even attitudes you imply will be read into. There is no such thing as an “off the record” meeting. Anything you tell them or their business will quickly make its way to the decision maker and is likely to influence the outcome. By all means make use of “off the record,” but do not get used by it.

Full disclosure and openness




When a request for full disclosure is made before or during a meeting, there needs to be a reasonable degree of trust or mutual dependency before parties tend to agree. Even then it usually comes with conditions or limits: “We will share our data with you on the current site, but feel that extending this to our overall operation to be unnecessary,” is the type of response you will get. Some will say: “I’m going to be really open with you,” which usually means they are not. This is also the case when people use such words as “really,” “actually,” “genuinely,” “seriously,” “sincerely,” and, most common of all, “honestly.” Whenever I have heard these words in negotiation where people are under pressure, I have concluded that the truth has not been in play. Listen out for them and remain mindful of the longer-term implications of full disclosure.

In reality, you can assume that something will usually be held back. The process of due diligence is used for very good reasons: to ensure the integrity of information provided is true and complete.

"WHY?"




This simple question can be used to challenge everything from interests, priorities, agenda items or even new proposals. It has been used as an effective way of establishing the thinking and importance of any issue or statement. Anyone can ask “why?”, which is why curious children ask it time after time in their quest for knowledge. The information you receive will always provide an insight, even if it’s something like: “We are not prepared to go into detail on that issue.” During exploration discussions, it’s worth asking why the other party is asking the very question that they are; and what insight this gives you into their thinking.

2. Time and momentum 

Time is the most powerful lever available to any negotiator. Time and circumstances affect the value of just about every product or service bought and sold around the world. If I was going to provide you with a full advertising plan to support your June election campaign, but could not actually start until June, my services would be deemed useless and without value. However, if the service could commence in during March, and run for 3 months peaking with tailored activity throughout June, the service could attract a premium. It’s the same service with a different time slot, which makes all the difference. So, understanding the time pressures of the other party is vital to you being able to optimize the leverage during your negotiations. How you communicate your own time pressures or use the other party’s time pressures to gain movement or agreement can be directly influenced by the tactics you use.

"DEADLINES"




“If you do not agree by Friday we will not be able to start the project in the timescales you have stipulated.”

“We are closing the book on this one so we will need to know by this afternoon if you want to take part.”

“If we can agree in principle today, I will ensure you get the business, subject to us ‘ironing out’ the terms.”

The pressure that deadlines can exert means that some may not only use this tactic as a closing device, but also to provide you with the feeling of having “won.” Deadlines are used in many other ways, for example: “Because of changes in our business, after today’s deadline, any agreement will have to be signed off by my boss.” On some occasions, once the other party has established your deadlines they will employ this need as a trading variable. They will imply that the timing issue is not so critical to them. Be careful when providing total transparency relating to the implications of deadlines; it can be a highly effective and manipulative tool.

"AND JUST ONE MORE THING"




This is often used at the end of the negotiation when the deal is regarded as all but done. One party turns to the other just as you are about to shake hands and says: “Just one more thing, you will of course be including the flexible payment scheduling we discussed earlier?” They pause and wait with their hand held out. You think, I’m there, deal done, finished, closed. Do I now open up the discussion again, or worse still, compromise the agreement by saying “no, but I didn’t think that flexible payment scheduling was ever part of the terms we had agreed.”

As you can see, this tactic has a higher relationship erosion factor. If the other party has either power or enough nerve, they will and should challenge the assumption by attaching a condition to the flexible payment scheduling in the same way they would have if it had been raised earlier during the formal discussions.

"DENIED ACCESS"




When you need to move discussions on, perhaps due to time pressure or the implications of deadlines, some will use denied access as a tactic. They simply ensure they are not available. They tell their colleagues and assistants to pass on the message they are in back-to-back meetings, out of town, away, or anything that ensures that you, the other party, cannot make progress until they are ready.

One way of dealing with this situation when you are confident that denied access is in play is to leave a message for the other party, bringing your deadline artificially forward, adding that if the deadline passes without agreement, the deal is off or the terms on offer are time limited. Although risky, this buys you a window of opportunity between the deadline they think you are working to and the one actually in play. Another is to introduce a credible option, perhaps another party or option that you plan to take up and you need to let them know within certain timescales. If you don’t hear back you will place the order, reluctantly, elsewhere. Of course these options carry risks but often work as a way of unlocking the denied access tactic.

"TIME CONSTRAINT"




This is used where the other party introduces artificial time lines or deadlines, stating that their offer expires on a certain date. Further demands are then introduced as a consequence of the deadline not being met as “compensation” against the implications.

Time constraints are also used where one party is near agreement on most of the terms, but the other decides to hold out for a better fee rate. They say: “We will give you one last chance to increase your offer. Please advise us by 5.30 pm on Friday of what this is, and we'll let you know if we are prepared to progress.” During the time that passes, which is aimed at fuelling uncertainty and doubt, the other party is often pressured into improving their final offer.

"THE AUCTION"




The bidding process is designed to create competition. The process is engineered and controlled by the organizers. As the bids increase, rational judgment is tested and for those with high egos, winning has been known to take over as the predominant driver of behavior. Time and momentum work against those willing to continue bidding, so a clear and absolute break point must feature as part of your planning if you are to enter such a process.

"TIME OUT"




When in doubt, for whatever reason, adjourn the meeting and take a time out to regroup. You need to understand the implications, risks, or fi nances if you are to maintain clarity and be able to work out how you are going to move forward. It is often used when new information comes to the fore, or if deadlock is looming and a need for a “fresh look” at the deal is needed. It’s also used when time is running out and one party chooses to put the other under pressure by removing themselves from the room until time pressures become critical.

3. Fear or guilt 

This next category raises the stakes in the relationship and heightens the risk. With high levels of power, threats are used in subtle ways to create movement. It is the fear of these threats or the fear of losing the deal that is played upon by those seeking to manipulate the power they have.

"PHYSICALLY DISTURBING THEM"




This is made up of a variety of non-violent but yet physical gestures which are introduced to unsettle and distract you. This can include leaning across the table to invade your personal space, sitting very close to you, or changing the seating pattern, so they are sat next to you. Seating positioned to face the sunlight or groups crammed into very small rooms are all part of the environment used to intimidate. Always remember that you are in charge and that includes your environment, so if it does not feel right, challenge it, question it and change it. You’ll attract respect for doing so and set the scene for equal respect in the meeting.

"GOOD GUY, BAD GUY"




This is typically used in team negotiations where one member of the team makes very high or irrational demands, and the other offers a more reasonable approach; or one is challenging and dismissive whilst their colleague presents themselves as far more understanding. The approach is designed to make the “good guys” appear reasonable, rational, and understanding, and therefore all the more agreeable. Essentially it’s using the law of relativity to attract cooperation. It’s transparent enough and certainly erodes any potential for trust, so ensure next time you are exposed to it that you see it for what it is.

"THE RUSSIAN FRONT"




As described by Gavin Kennedy in his book Everything is Negotiable,this tactic is taken from the Second World War where a Russian lieutenant was told by his colonel that he would be sent to the Russian front unless he did as asked. The colonel had the power, the lieutenant believed it was for real, and the result was predictable. He would do whatever was asked willingly, rather than being sent to the Russian front. In negotiation, it is referred to when providing two options. This is based on getting the other party to accept the better of two evils. One you know will prove challenging and the other an outright disaster. If the whole concept is not rejected, the chances are you will be seduced into agreeing to the challenging one.

"PERSONAL FAVOR"




This tactic attempts to make the position or request “personal” and works most effectively in familiar relationships: “You can do this for old times’ sake,” or “If you do this for me I will ensure your proposal is accepted,” or “You scratch my back and I’ll scratch yours.” It leans on a sense of obligation to the point where it’s aimed at leaving you feeling embarrassed if you do not yield. You must remain firm, point out the compromising position this would leave you in and explain that it’s not personal, just business.

"GUILTY PARTY"




This involves suggesting that the other party is breaking some code or agreement, or that they are going against the industry norm, or that a commitment has not been met or a performance not as it should be. This tactic is used to full effect where one party is negotiating compensation to include inconvenience, loss of face, indirect loss of earnings, even future risk; this results in a demand way beyond the normal fi nancial obligations.

"THE SOCIAL SMELL"




The social smell is used to imply that you are the odd one out. It’s designed to make you question your own judgment: “If everyone else is behaving in a certain way (agreeing), why am I not?” It comes in the form of a statement about what “others are doing” and importantly what you are not. It implies that you are out of sync, the odd one out, and that you are missing out or even being irrational. “Everyone else has committed … you’ll be the only one not included so you are likely to miss out whilst your competitors have all agreed.” The idea is that it helps apply pressure to conform, highlights isolation, and promotes self-doubt.

"SILENCE"




As a powerful tactic, silence is used to unnerve the other party. It can result in a waiting game because the first to talk is likely to be the first to concede. For many, the discomfort alone of continued silence can result in a concession or offer of further flexibility. And yet for the experienced negotiator it may be that they simply need time to think through their next move. Silence is best used directly after you have stated your proposal or after they have stated theirs. Just wait. Even if they respond, wait further. The pressure builds and often leads to more concessions.

4. Anchoring 

This is where one party sets out to form an anchor (an opening position taken up by one party from which they will move but such movement will come at a price). The aim of anchoring is to adjust the expectations of the other party providing an extreme and yet realistic opening position. Movement becomes relative to the anchor. If you open with your position first and are able to get the other party talking about it, even if this means them rejecting it, it is your position that becomes anchored in their mind. Unless they make a counter-offer. Often they become so preoccupied with attacking your position, they forget all about their own position.

"SOW THE SEED EARLY"




This can take the form of the advance telephone call, which is designed to introduce an idea or a position, allowing for any emotional reaction to take place prior to the meeting. Or ideas that are introduced and parked in earlier meetings in the knowledge that they will need to be addressed in subsequent meetings. Sowing the seed early is based on getting inside their heads and adjusting their expectations.

"THE POWER STATEMENT"




Opening statements are designed to manage the aspirations of the other party. They are usually used as a statement in the form of an assumed fact. The idea is to test an assumed position of power by effectively telling them that, whilst you are in a position of “indifference,” they are under pressure to conclude the deal with you: “I understand that you need an agreement in place by the end of the day,” or “I want to make it clear that today’s discussions are to ensure that we have given you every opportunity to win the business.” The language is that used by a “critical parent” by implying assumed authority designed to get the other party talking and thinking about how they are going to move towards you.

"THE MOCK SHOCK"




This is an extension to the power statement where you start the meeting by implying that all is lost: “We have decided that given your current performance levels and clearly no desire to offer compensation, terminating the contract is the only option for us.” Or, “This may only be a small order, but failure to agree could affect all of your business with us.” The devastating consequences of non-cooperation can shock the other party into reconsidering their position or backtracking from the outset, where saving the relationship becomes their primary objective.

"THE PROFESSIONAL FLINCH"




This is a shock reaction to their opening position. Both physically whether by extreme facial reaction and/or verbally, you are demonstrating your shock and surprise at their position. Used regardless of their opening offer and designed to lower their aspirations, the professional flinch has the effect of undermining their confidence in their position and expectations.

"THE BROKEN RECORD"




One party repeats their position. The more they repeat it, the more credible it becomes. The more their position is discussed, the more likely the discussion will revolve around their position. They start to sound like a broken record but the message gets through. Of course this can be interpreted as intransigence and can result in you losing patience and concluding the meeting. They will require a moderate amount of power of around 4/10 to be able to carry it off.

5. Empowerment 

This involves the degree to which you are authorized to trade and the extent to which others need to be involved in the decision-making process.

"HIGHER AUTHORITY"




The use of the boss or a mysterious and distant overseeing body required to sign off anything beyond those limits that you are allowed to trade. The idea is to convince the other party to agree within the level you are authorized to go to, so that they can complete the deal today, rather than risk the deal being jeopardized, or so as not to allow your boss to see the other concessions that you have already offered. It’s also used to disassociate yourself from not being able to accept a proposal: "That’s out of my control and I will need to come back to you on that one."

"DEFENSE IN DEPTH"




This is where several layers of decision-making authority allow for further conditions to be applied each time the agreement is referred. Typically it’s where your supplier or customer states that they will take the deal for sign-off to their boss. A day later, the call comes that, subject to one final concession, the deal will be agreed. You reluctantly agree. A day later, they call and state that their boss has signed it off and it’s now been sent for approval to the board and that if you could just agree to the 30-day payment terms it will gain agreement. Reluctantly you agree and ask if they will let you know when it has been approved. The next day they calls to again advise you that the board have now signed it off and they have now handed it over to Health and Safety for final approval and then advise you of yet another small concession that will be necessary if “final” sign-off is to be achieved. You should always understand the decision-making levels and process, otherwise you leave yourself exposed to defense in depth.

"USE OF OFFICIAL AUTHORITY"




This is used where one party disempowers themselves, saying that they cannot or are not allowed to change the terms. They refer to their own company policy, legal requirements, association requirements, or even historical precedents and, although sometimes true, it’s often a tactic in play used to legitimize their position. “Our company policy is 60 days payment on all transactions and there is nothing we can do about that.” It’s frequently used to provide rationale in an attempt to bolster the credibility of their proposal. Ensure you insist that such constraints are their problem and that you welcome suggestions on how they plan to work around them in order to avoid you having to escalate the issue.

"IT'S ALL I CAN AFFORD"




This is used to suggest that budgets are finite, the specification is fixed, and that it’s all that is available: “I have no other funds available so take it or leave it.” It’s designed to place the onus of obligation on the other party, implying that they need to work within that which you can afford. In contrast, when faced with such tactics the receiving party can change the specification, the volume, the timing, or any variable that helps to naturalize the implications of the fixed fee.

"ONUS TRANSFER"




Transferring the obligation for solutions or ideas onto the other party, to make it their problem. “We have a problem in making our payment on time this month. We can make the transfer but it is going to be 5 days late, how do you want to deal with this?” Once they have been advised, the problem becomes a shared one. The implications may still sit squarely with you but you have transferred the onus onto the other party.

"OFF-LIMITS"




This is where issues are positioned as off-limits (non-negotiable or “off the agenda” for the purpose of these discussions). They are often described as “things I can’t agree, so let’s focus on the terms we can agree today.” Remember, nothing is agreed until everything is agreed. Their motive is to protect some of the more critical issues from negotiation. This can also result in a negotiation over what is negotiable before the real negotiation even begins. This tactic is commonly used in political negotiations but regularly features in all types of commercial settlement negotiations too.

"NEW FACES"




When a new person takes over the relationship or a new account manager is introduced, both past precedents and history carry far less relevance. New faces need not be tied to or constrained by what has happened in the past. They can sometimes offer a solution to deadlock where personalities stand in the way of progress. They can provide for a fresh examination of affairs or can even be used to intimidate the other party where the seniority of the new negotiator carries certain gravitas. Retailers are renowned for changing their buyers systematically and periodically so that new faces remove the familiarity of an existing trading relationship. This keeps the focus on terms fresh and removes any scope for complacency.

6. Moving the costs around 

This category comes from reconfiguring the package or specification, or manipulating the terms in order to provide a different complexion to the deal. The relationship between specification and price is used by many tactical negotiators as a means of manipulating the cost of supply, whilst attracting the best possible price.

"THE BUILDING BLOCK TECHNIQUE"




This is where one party requests a price but only for part of their actual requirements. You then request prices for various quantity arrangements, ranging up to and including your actual needs. The idea is to manage expectations in the fi rst instance and understand the relative cost/price differences and implications across the different arrangements. This can reveal much about their cost base and margin structure. You then negotiate for a 1-year agreement, for example, in the knowledge that you can raise this to a 3-year agreement. You then seek incentives from the other party in the event that you could extend the agreement to 2 years, and then negotiate incremental terms for this “doubling” of the contract.

Finally, you broaden the discussion to a 3-year partnership. Of course, to agree to such a deal, you will require more preferential terms.

The building block technique involves planning out your stages, which can apply to any variable and provides time for the other party to adjust to concessions that would otherwise be difficult to extract.

"WIPE THEIR PROPOSAL OFF THE TABLE WITHOUT SAYING NO"




Each time they make a proposal, you say “yes, subject to our terms.”

Your terms turn out to be either equally as outrageous, or are financially designed to offset the implications of agreeing to them. One party says: “Your discount levels based on last year’s performance are being adjusted from 10% to 7.5% for the year ahead.” And the other party responds: “Subject to you improving your promotional funding from $100,000 to $250,000 for the year, we will accept the reduction in discount.”

The response from the fi rst party will inevitably be: “We can’t do that” to which you suggest: “and that’s why we are not in a position to accept your position.” You rarely need say no in a negotiation. Just fi nd a way, a basis, a set of conditions upon which the consequences, be they fi nancial, risk, or third-party implications, are neutralized by the terms you attach to it.

"LINKING THE ISSUES"




Everything is conditional and therefore linked to other conditions. Linking the relative values and importance of issues is key to ensuring that linked issues gain the attention you require. This is sometimes used to protect certain terms. For example, if the contract length was very important to one party and they knew that a high-value variable to the other party was attracting a 10,000-volume order, the two would be linked to ensure that the contract length issues could not be easily dismissed.

"SIDE ISSUE OR RED HERRING"




This is where some issues are introduced onto the agenda that have been positioned to lose or trade off against. Later during the negotiation, value is traded as each of the red herrings is conceded, having played their part in attracting improved terms elsewhere. For example, you need to attract shorter lead times and improved discounts. Both items are on the agenda as is a new termination clause, allowing you to terminate the contract with very short notice and lower volume discount thresholds. The last two are effectively red herrings, which you expect to concede on. However, in doing so you are able to trade for better terms on lead times and discounts.

"THE SLICE"




This is where you believe that the issue is of high value to the other party and trade against the issue in “slices.” For example, you know that volume is critical to them. You are currently at 50,000 units and know that your requirement is for an order of 150,000 units. Rather than trade up to 150,000 units, you trade to 80,000 in return for a concession. Later you trade to 100,000 for a further concession, then to 115,000, and so on. Each move is conditional on a concession, ensuring that the value of your total move is maximized.

7. Deceit 

There is no other way to describe this fi nal category: deceit. If reputation or relationships hold any value to you or your business, think twice before using the following. More importantly, be wary of those who carry a different view and choose to use deceit – they may choose to use it on you even after the contract has been signed.

"TROJAN HORSE"




This is named after a tactic used during the ancient war on Troy, which led to the saying: “Beware of Greeks bearing gifts.” The Greeks left a gift in the form of a wooden horse outside Troy. The Trojans accepted the gift and brought it inside the city only to find that thehorse was full of soldiers ready to invade. Beware if the deal appears too good to be true. This relates to the hidden small print, and the conditions and issues that can literallycome out of the woodwork after the deal has been completed. The Trojan horse represents a package created to entice you. Once accepted, it has some surprises in store because much of the downside was hidden at the time of agreement.

"THE INCORRECT SUMMARY"




This is where one party summarizes from their perspective, leaving out or even adjusting some of the terms discussed earlier. The idea is that you won’t notice or won’t challenge through fear of jeopardizing progress. Try to ensure that you summarize progress throughout the meeting and that you do so from your perspective. Also, ensure that you summarize in writing after the meeting. If you don’t agree on what you believe you have agreed, then you’re unlikely to have an agreement that is going to stand the test of time.

"DELIBERATE MISUNDERSTANDING"




So as to open up areas that have already been regarded as concluded, one party introduces a condition that they know to be unacceptable. After you have responded with confusion or start to demand clarity they adopt an “innocent misunderstanding” stance. Their motives could be varied, but it is usually related to stalling progress or allowing them to try and renegotiate terms that have otherwise been regarded as closed.

"THE DUMB FOREIGNER"




They choose not to understand you at a given time during the negotiation due to language difficulty. This is especially used once the subject of price is introduced. As they seek to take up a firm position, they appear increasingly confused by what you have to say as you attempt to explain your position. When faced with such behavior, patience, restating your position, and maybe even a “time out” is needed to dampen their confidence.

"THE LOSS LEADER"




This involves one party convincing the other to agree to a deal at highly preferential rates, which will lead to benefits in the future. These “benefits” are often not contractual, conditional, or delivered on. In fact they are often used as a precedent: “You were able to offer that price last time we worked with you so we know you can do it again.” If you are to enter into such agreements always ensure that it is in writing and the conditions are clearly stated in the contract.

KEY TAKEAWAYS 

Influential tactics in negotiation have been used for thousands of years as a means of gaining leverage and advantage. They can be as subtle as providing misleading information or as blatant as an outright lie. As you never need to lie in negotiation, many tactics are regarded as a fast route to destroying trust.

• Recognize tactics being used and qualify them by challenging their consequences.
• The type of the tactics you use should be limited to how much trust and dependency you require in the relationship once the deal is done.
• The risk/benefit of employing tactics is something you must judge based on your own circumstances, objectives, motivation, and values.
• More than one tactic at a time will often be combined to increase pressure as others will seek to manipulate your actions.
• Performing as a conscious competent negotiator will help increase your awareness of the tactics in play and will help you recognize, qualify, challenge, and navigate through the gamesmanship.